Document Actions
Tandberg manual
Documents the operation of the Tandberg video conferencing units via the remote or using the web interface
(TANDBERG_6000_MXP_User_Manual.pdf
- 2960Kb)
User Manual
Software version F3
D13355.04
This document is not to be reproduced in whole or in part without permission in writing from:
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Trademarks and Copyright
All rights reserved. This document contains information that is proprietary to TANDBERG. No part
of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, electronically, mechanically, by photocopying, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of TANDBERG. Nationally and internationally recognized trademarks and
trade names are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.
Contains iType™ from Agfa Monotype Corporation.
Disclaimer
The information in this document is furnished for informational purposes only, is subject to
change without prior notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by TANDBERG. The
information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable; however TANDBERG
assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this
document, nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties resulting from its
use. No license is granted under any patents or patent rights of TANDBERG.
This document was written by the Research and Development Department of TANDBERG,
Norway. We are committed to maintain a high level of quality in all our documentation. Towards
this effort, we welcome you to Contact us with comments and suggestions regarding the content
and structure of this document.
COPYRIGHT © 2005, TANDBERG
ii
User Manual
Environmental Issues
Thank you for buying a product, which contributes to a reduction in pollution, and thereby helps
save the environment. Our products reduce the need for travel and transport and thereby reduce
pollution. Our products have either none or few consumable parts (chemicals, toner, gas, paper)
and low energy consuming products.
Battery handling
Batteries for the Remote Control are Long Life and Alkaline batteries saving the environment;
please follow guidelines on the packing material for handling and disposal of the batteries.
Waste handling
There is no need to send any products or material back to TANDBERG as there are no
consumables to take care of. Please contact your local dealer for information on local waste
handling and recycling of electronic products.
Production of products
Our factories employ the most efficient environmental methods for reducing waste and pollution
and ensuring the products are recyclable.
Digital User Manuals
TANDBERG is pleased to announce that it has replaced the printed versions of its User Manuals
with a digital CD version. Instead of a range of different user manuals, there is now one CD which
can be used with all TANDBERG products, in a variety of languages. The environmental benefits
of this are significant. The CDs are recyclable and the savings on paper are huge. A simple web-
based search feature helps users directly access the information they need. In addition, the
TANDBERG video systems now have an intuitive on-screen help function, which provides a
range of useful features and tips. If desired, the user manuals on the CD can still be printed
locally.
iii
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Operator Safety Summary
For your protection, please read these safety instructions completely before operating the
equipment and keep this manual for future reference. The information in this summary is intended
for operators. Carefully observe all warnings, precautions and instructions both on the apparatus
and in the operating instructions.
Equipment Markings
The lightning flash symbol within an
equilateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltages” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical
shock.
The exclamation mark within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions
accompanying the equipment.
Warnings
Water and moisture - Do not operate the equipment under or near water - for example
near a bathtub, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool
or in areas with high humidity.
Cleaning - Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet before cleaning or polishing. Do not
use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a lint-free cloth lightly moistened with water
for cleaning the exterior of the apparatus.
Ventilation - Do not block any of the ventilation openings of the apparatus. Install in
accordance with the installation instructions. Never cover the slots and openings with a
cloth or other material. Never install the apparatus near heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Grounding or Polarization - Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A
grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or third
prong is provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician.
Power-Cord Protection - Route the power cord so as to avoid it being walked on or
pinched by items placed upon or against it, paying particular attention to the plugs,
receptacles, and the point where the cord exits from the apparatus.
Attachments - Only use attachments as recommended by the manufacturer.
Accessories - Most systems should only be used with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Lightning - Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods
of time.
iv
User Manual
ISDN cables - CAUTION - To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger
telecommunication line cord.
Servicing - Do not attempt to service the apparatus yourself as opening or removing
covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other hazards, and will void the
warranty. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Damaged Equipment - Unplug the apparatus from the outlet and refer servicing to
qualified personnel under the following conditions:
When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed
If liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus
If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture
If the apparatus has been subjected to excessive shock by being dropped, or the
cabinet has been damaged
If the apparatus fails to operate in accordance with the operating instructions
v
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Contact us
If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please see the Online Support service at
www.tandberg.net.
It is also possible to send a fax or mail to the attention of:
Product and Sales Support
TANDBERG
P.O. Box 92
1325 Lysaker
Norway
Tel: +47 67 125 125
Fax: +47 67 125 234
vi
User Manual
Table of Contents
1 Introduction............................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 At a Glance ............................................................................................................................ 4
1.2 Menu Structure ...................................................................................................................... 8
2 Installation .............................................................................................................................. 10
2.1 Unpacking and Mounting ..................................................................................................... 11
2.2 Connecting Cables............................................................................................................... 13
2.3 Monitor Configuration........................................................................................................... 15
2.4 System Configuration........................................................................................................... 16
3 General Use ........................................................................................................................... 19
3.1 The Welcome Screen .......................................................................................................... 20
3.2 Using the Remote Control.................................................................................................... 21
3.2.1 Navigation ................................................................................................................ 23
3.2.2 Selfview.................................................................................................................... 24
3.2.3 Layout ...................................................................................................................... 25
3.2.4 Mic Off...................................................................................................................... 26
3.2.5 Volume + and - ........................................................................................................ 27
3.2.6 Number and Letter keys........................................................................................... 28
3.2.7 Touch Tones ............................................................................................................ 29
3.3 On-screen Indicators............................................................................................................ 30
3.4 Using the Menu .................................................................................................................... 32
3.5 Make a Call .......................................................................................................................... 34
3.5.1 Place Video Call....................................................................................................... 35
3.5.2 Place Telephone Call............................................................................................... 36
3.5.3 Add Call ................................................................................................................... 37
3.5.4 Call Settings ............................................................................................................. 39
3.5.5 Streaming................................................................................................................. 40
3.6 Answer an incoming call ...................................................................................................... 42
3.7 End Call................................................................................................................................ 43
3.8 Standby ................................................................................................................................ 44
3.8.1 Delay Standby for 1 hour ......................................................................................... 45
3.8.2 Delay Standby for 3 hours ....................................................................................... 46
3.8.3 Do Not Disturb ......................................................................................................... 47
3.9 Phone Book.......................................................................................................................... 48
3.9.1 Call Log .................................................................................................................... 50
3.9.2 My Contacts ............................................................................................................. 51
3.9.3 Global Contacts ....................................................................................................... 58
3.10 Camera Control.................................................................................................................. 62
3.10.1 Move Camera .......................................................................................................... 63
3.10.2 Far End Control........................................................................................................ 64
3.10.3 Camera Presets ....................................................................................................... 65
3.10.4 TANDBERG Tracker................................................................................................ 66
3.10.5 Picture Control ......................................................................................................... 67
3.10.6 Camera Tracking ..................................................................................................... 68
3.11 Presentation ....................................................................................................................... 69
3.11.1 Presentation Key...................................................................................................... 70
3.11.2 Presentation Menu................................................................................................... 71
3.11.3 PC Presenter (DVI/XGA Input) ................................................................................ 72
3.11.4 PC Soft Presenter and VNC .................................................................................... 73
3.11.5 Dual Stream (DuoVideoTF/H.239)........................................................................... 74
3.11.6 Take New Snapshot................................................................................................. 75
3.11.7 Display Snapshot ..................................................................................................... 76
vii
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.12 Conference Services.......................................................................................................... 77
3.12.1 Request Floor and Release Floor............................................................................ 80
3.12.2 Conference Layout................................................................................................... 81
3.12.3 Terminal Names....................................................................................................... 82
3.12.4 Chair Control............................................................................................................ 83
3.12.5 Assign Floor and Release Floor from Participant .................................................... 84
3.12.6 View Site and End View........................................................................................... 85
3.12.7 Disconnect Participant ............................................................................................. 86
3.12.8 Terminate Meeting ................................................................................................... 87
3.12.9 More about MultiSite (embedded MCU) .................................................................. 88
3.13 Control Panel ..................................................................................................................... 90
3.13.1 Diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 91
3.13.2 Text Chat ............................................................................................................... 104
3.13.3 Audio Demo ........................................................................................................... 105
3.13.4 Administrator Settings............................................................................................ 106
3.13.5 Restart ................................................................................................................... 107
3.13.6 User Guide............................................................................................................. 108
4 Administrator Settings .......................................................................................................... 109
4.1 General Settings ................................................................................................................ 110
4.1.1 Language ............................................................................................................... 111
4.1.2 System Name ........................................................................................................ 112
4.1.3 Dual Monitor........................................................................................................... 113
4.1.4 Auto Answer........................................................................................................... 114
4.1.5 Max Call Length ..................................................................................................... 115
4.1.6 Phone Book Settings ............................................................................................. 116
4.1.7 Permissions ........................................................................................................... 117
4.1.8 Screen Settings...................................................................................................... 119
4.1.9 Software Options ................................................................................................... 124
4.2 Menu Settings .................................................................................................................... 125
4.2.1 Menu Timeout In Call............................................................................................. 126
4.2.2 Welcome Menu ...................................................................................................... 127
4.2.3 Welcome Picture.................................................................................................... 128
4.2.4 Logo ....................................................................................................................... 129
4.2.5 Menu on TV ........................................................................................................... 130
4.2.6 Menu on PC ........................................................................................................... 131
4.2.7 Balloon Help........................................................................................................... 132
4.2.8 Display Welcome Text ........................................................................................... 133
4.2.9 Welcome Text ........................................................................................................ 134
4.2.10 Administrator Password ......................................................................................... 135
4.3 Presentation Settings......................................................................................................... 136
4.3.1 Presentation Start .................................................................................................. 137
4.3.2 H.239...................................................................................................................... 138
4.3.3 Startup Video Source............................................................................................. 139
4.3.4 Presentation Source .............................................................................................. 140
4.3.5 Snapshot Source ................................................................................................... 141
4.3.6 Auto-Display Snapshot .......................................................................................... 142
4.3.7 PIP Appearance..................................................................................................... 143
4.3.8 PIP Placing ............................................................................................................ 144
4.3.9 VNC Settings ......................................................................................................... 145
4.4 Call Quality......................................................................................................................... 146
4.4.1 Video Algorithm...................................................................................................... 147
4.4.2 Audio Algorithm...................................................................................................... 148
4.4.3 AAC-LD 128kbps (stereo audio)............................................................................ 149
4.4.4 Natural Video ......................................................................................................... 150
4.4.5 Max Upstream Rate (kbps) .................................................................................... 151
4.4.6 Video Quality.......................................................................................................... 152
viii
User Manual
4.4.7 Default Call Settings .............................................................................................. 154
4.5 Audio .................................................................................................................................. 157
4.5.1 Inputs ..................................................................................................................... 158
4.5.2 Outputs .................................................................................................................. 160
4.5.3 Echo Control .......................................................................................................... 161
4.5.4 Stereo Settings ...................................................................................................... 162
4.5.5 Audio Levelling (AGC) ........................................................................................... 164
4.5.6 Alert Tones and Volume ........................................................................................ 165
4.6 Video .................................................................................................................................. 166
4.6.1 Camera Tracking Mode ......................................................................................... 167
4.6.2 MCU Status Line.................................................................................................... 168
4.6.3 Floor to Full Screen................................................................................................ 169
4.6.4 Web Snapshots...................................................................................................... 170
4.6.5 MultiSite Picture Mode ........................................................................................... 171
4.6.6 Video Name ........................................................................................................... 173
4.7 Security .............................................................................................................................. 174
4.7.1 Encryption .............................................................................................................. 175
4.7.2 Encryption Mode .................................................................................................... 176
4.7.3 Passwords ............................................................................................................. 177
4.8 Network .............................................................................................................................. 178
4.8.1 ISDN/External/Leased E1/T1................................................................................. 179
4.8.2 ISDN-BRI Settings ................................................................................................. 180
4.8.3 ISDN-PRI Settings ................................................................................................. 182
4.8.4 Leased E1/T1 Settings........................................................................................... 185
4.8.5 External Network Settings ..................................................................................... 186
4.8.6 H.331 Settings ....................................................................................................... 187
4.8.7 LAN Settings .......................................................................................................... 188
4.8.8 Network Profiles..................................................................................................... 203
4.8.9 Data Port ................................................................................................................ 204
4.9 Restore Default Settings .................................................................................................... 205
5 Peripheral Equipment........................................................................................................... 206
5.1 Interfaces ........................................................................................................................... 207
5.1.1 Video ...................................................................................................................... 207
5.1.2 Audio ...................................................................................................................... 209
5.1.3 Network .................................................................................................................. 210
5.1.4 Data port ................................................................................................................ 215
5.2 Document Camera............................................................................................................. 216
5.3 DVD / VCR ......................................................................................................................... 217
5.4 Additional Cameras............................................................................................................ 218
5.5 Additional Microphones...................................................................................................... 220
5.6 The TANDBERG DNAM .................................................................................................... 222
5.7 Stereo Speaker Kit............................................................................................................. 224
5.8 Telephone Add-On............................................................................................................. 225
5.9 Dual Monitor....................................................................................................................... 226
5.10 XGA Monitors and Projectors .......................................................................................... 227
5.11 VESA Display Power Management ................................................................................. 228
5.12 Digital Monitor Power Management................................................................................. 229
5.13 Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) ................................................................... 230
6 Appendices........................................................................................................................... 232
7 Index..................................................................................................................................... 267
8 Glossary ............................................................................................................................... 269
ix
1 Introduction
The TANDBERG 6000 MXP provides high-end performance features, large monitors and
precision audio. This creates a collaborative meeting environment for medium to large-sized
meeting rooms.
Audio Quality
High-performance audio provides a richer, more complete visual communication experience. The
MPEG4 AAC-LD standard is used to provide true standards-based CD-quality audio.
The Digital Natural Audio Module (DNAM), specifically designed for videoconferencing, provides
TM
higher fidelity sound for a natural sound image, featuring 250W of power.
Users can record and send stereo audio from presentation and playback sources using PCs,
DVDs and VCRs.
NEW Enhanced packet loss handling in the audio decoder
NEW Improved lip synchronization
Video Quality
Features which ensure high quality video includes:
Natural Video which provides 60 fields per second true interlaced picture.
TF
Support for H.264 in MultiSite, DuoVideo/H.239 and encryption.
SXGA input and 2 x XGA output through DVI-I (analog or digital).
WAVE II (Wide Angle View) Camera that delivers the widest angle of view in the industry.
H.264 video compression up to 2Mbps.
Support native 16:9 Wide XGA monitors by increasing the resolution to 1280x768
(WXGA).
Automatic use of WXGA format when ”VGA Monitor Format” is set to Wide.
Network
The system supports videoconferencing via both IP and ISDN networks. The bandwidth
capabilities are:
up to 4Mbps* on IP
up to 2Mbps* on ISDN
up to 6Mbps* IP in MultiSite.
SIP support, for both point-to-point and MultiSite*.
If channels are dropped during a videoconferencing session, downspeeding automatically
TF
maintains connections without interruption.
NEW Enhanced packet loss handling and downspeeding TF
NEW Remote software upgrade over ISDN
Security
Secure Conference provides embedded encryption for both Point-to-Point and MultiSite call and
TF
ensures both privacy and security.
1
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
The system is delivered with integrated Expressway™ firewall traversal technology. When used
together with a TANDBERG Border Controller it enables:
Secure and seamless traversal of ANY firewall.
No missing features when traversing the firewall – works with H.264, MPEG4 audio,
encryption.
Outside systems, such as home offices, to be part of the enterprise dial plan.
Dialing to systems by URI, e.g. user@company.com.
NEW Standards based H.235 authentication towards Border Controller / Gatekeeper
MultiSite*
TF
The embedded MultiSite functionality can cater for up to 6 video sites and 5 audio sites and
supports screen layouts such as VoiceSwitched, AutoSplit, 4 Split and 5+1 Split. The MultiSite
TF
functionality supports any combination of ISDN and IP participants in a conference.
A superior quality and reliability is ensured by:
Supporting DuoVideo/H.239, encryption and H.264.
Rate matching and Transcoding which supports different call rates for all sites in a
TF TF
MultiSite.
The TANDBERG videoconferencing system can also be used purely as an audio-bridge (with an
ISDN connection).
Presentations
The Natural Presenter Package* (NPP) makes it possible to run presentations and comprises:
Digital Clarity which provides presentations of exceptionally high quality resolution video.
TF
Duo Video /H.239 which allows participants at the far end to simultaneously watch a
TF
presenter on one screen and a live presentation on the adjoining screen.
PC Presenter which is an easily accessible PC connection over a wired VGA cable that
TF
supports up to SXGA resolution.
PC SoftPresenter which shows PC images via the LAN connection supporting XGA
TF
resolution.
Users can display video and presentations in the best layout based on the situation. Supported
screen layouts are:
Picture in Picture
Picture outside Picture
Side by Side
PC zoom:
The PC image is transferred in native resolution and may be controlled as a camera with
zoom and pan/tilt to get SXGA resolution.
NEW Auto Layout
The system will automatically choose the best layout for the call
NEW New large Picture outside Picture layout for wide monitors
User interfaces
A web-interface is provided to handle:
Text chat/closed captioning
2
Introduction
System management, diagnostics and software uploads
Streaming – which allows broadcasting of audio/video via an IP network
The On-Screen Menu:
Easy interface for first-time users with symbols and descriptions
Builds upon the familiar current interface
True Localization with enhanced language support and international customization:
Enabling Asian and non-Latin character text input on Web and API for local language in
Phone Book and System Names
NEW Usability upgrade and improved user feedback
Improved Phone Book
On-screen Warnings and Network Statistics information
NEW Including support for Thai and Finnish On-Screen menu language
The remote control has a simplified look and feel, auto system wake-up and large, easy-to-read
keys.
Interoperability
The TANDBERG 6000 MXP is worldwide compatible with other standards-based
videoconferencing systems.
* - optional feature. To check which options are installed, select Control Panel - System Information in the menu.
- TANDBERG First
TF
3
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
1.1 At a Glance
WAVE II Camera
The main camera is mounted on top of the product. The main camera includes a high quality
color camera with a fast pan/tilt/zoom action. The main camera is controlled by the system’s
infrared remote control and operates pan/tilt, focus and zoom. Up to fifteen camera positions can
be pre-stored using Camera Presets.
Monitors
4
Introduction
The main monitor displays the far-end and near-end videoconferencing sites in addition to the
menus and video from connected video sources. The second monitor displays selfview,
Snapshots and Duo Video.
Note that the TANDBERG 6000 MXP is shipped with different monitors depending on product
variants and which country the system is shipped to. Hence, the pictures/drawings used in this
manual might differ from the actual monitor model shipped with the system.
Codec
The codec is the heart of the system. Its main task is the compression of outgoing video, audio
and data, the transmission of this information to the far end and the decompression of the
incoming information - the name codec comes from a combination of the two words compression
and decompression.
Cabinet
The cabinet is easily movable with large wheels and handles. The codec is located inside the
cabinet. Below the codec is an accessories drawer for storing the remote control, the user manual
and other accessories. Push gently on the drawer and it will pop out. The Digital Natural Audio
Module (DNAM) is mounted above the codec. Below the codec there is room for additional
equipment, e.g. a VCR or DVD player.
5
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Remote Control
The remote control is used to control all functions of the system. If the screen saver is activated
(black monitor), touching the remote control will automatically wake up the system. The remote
control uses 4 AAA batteries. The system will tell you when batteries are running low. Change the
batteries at the back of the remote control.
The reach of the remote control signal is 20 meters (65 ft). For users sitting in an open plan office,
this can cause problems. Use the little, white switch placed in the batteries compartment to
change the reach of the signal from 20 meters to 2 meters (6.5 ft). This will prevent you from
unintentionally controlling another video system, when you control your own system.
Microphone
The high quality table microphone is designed to be placed on a table during a videoconference.
Up to three microphones can be connected. The ideal location for the microphone is on a flat
surface at least 2m (6.5 ft) from the front of the system. The microphone cable should always
point towards the system. The system will automatically equalize sound levels. Loud and soft
voices are picked up and transmitted to the far end at approximately the same level.
6
Introduction
Digital Natural Audio Module (DNAM)
The Digital Natural Audio Module (DNAM) is designed to enhance the audio quality during a
videoconference. The DNAM provides natural sounding audio, as if the person or another sound
source in the conference is present in the same room as you.
The DNAM is a frequency-compensated sound system optimized for voice and other sounds that
appears in modern videoconferencing. It is designed and dedicated specifically for
videoconferencing requirements. The use of the highest quality speaker elements as well as
proper amplifier- and software techniques minimizes signal distortion. The monitor- or television
speakers are disabled, and the sound is completely handled by the DNAM. The system will
automatically detect the DNAM and optimize the audio output. Once detected the audio output
will be in digital format (S/PDIF). The DNAM supports both analog and digital input.
The DNAM amplifier is mounted in the rear of the speaker cabinet.
TANDBERG Tracker
The tracker is a small infrared remote control device made
to steer the camera to any desired location within the
room. Typically, several trackers would be used with each
system.
Each tracker has two buttons:
One Single person button to point the camera at a
specific person/location.
One Group button to point the camera at all
participants.
Beneath the battery in the tracker, there is a switch, which
can be set to 16 different positions between 0 and F. For
camera preset 10 to 15, the numbers A to F should be
selected.
For more information, contact your local TANDBERG
representative.
7
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
1.2 Menu Structure
The menu structure is divided in two. The Main Menu is available for all users and contains all
functionality of the system. The Administrator Menu contains all the settings of the system. The
Administrator Settings are accessible from the Main Menu by selecting Control Panel and
Administrator Settings. Making changes to the Administrator Settings will change the behavior of
the system. The menu structure for Main Menu and Administrator Settings is shown below.
8
Introduction
9
2 Installation
Precautions:
Never install communication wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install jacks for communication cables in wet locations unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
Never touch uninstalled communication wires or terminals unless the telephone line has
been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying communication lines.
Avoid using communication equipment (other than a cordless type) during an electrical
storm. There may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning.
Do not use the communication equipment to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Always connect the product to an earthed socket outlet.
The socket outlet shall be installed near to the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Never install cables without first switching the power OFF.
1TR6 network type is not approved for connection directly to the telecommunications
network. This network type is only to be used behind a PABX.
X.21 network type is not approved for connection directly to the telecommunications
network. This network type is only to be used together with already approved equipment,
and is not meant for direct connections to the telecommunication networks.
V.35/RS-449/RS-366 network type is not approved for connection directly to the
telecommunications network. This network type is only to be used together with already
approved equipment, and is not intended for direct connection to the telecommunication
networks.
This product complies with directives: LVD 73/23/EC, EMC 89/366/EEC, R&TTE 99/5/EEC
1
Installation
2.1 Unpacking and Mounting
Unpacking the system
To avoid damage to the unit during transportation the system is delivered as separate
components:
Cabinet including DNAM speaker system
High quality monitor, one or two, depending on configuration. XGA monitors are optional.
Inside the cabinet you will find the accessories box, which will contain the following:
WAVE II Camera
Table Microphone
Remote Control and Tracker with batteries
Documentation
Mounting of the base
Place the top plate on top of the cabinet and secure it.
Place the monitor on the top plate.
Take the camera and remove the plastic backing from the double-sided tape-pads on the
base of the unit. Place the camera centrally, on top of the monitor close to the front. If the
system has two monitors, place the camera on the left monitor as this is where the
menus and incoming picture will be displayed.
11
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Note! The camera should be aligned with the front edge of the monitor to ensure that the IR-
sensor in the camera can pick up signals from the remote control.
12
Installation
2.2 Connecting Cables
All cables needed in standard configuration are already connected to the codec. Connect these
cables to their respective parts of the system as shown in the figure below.
1. Power cables
Connect the system power cable and monitor power cable to an electrical distribution socket.
2. Monitor cables
Connect the S-video cable to the input on your monitor as shown in the figure above.. For
Scart-monitors, use the Scart-adapter. Only a video connection cable is required, as the Digital
Natural Audio Module will provide the audio output.
3. Microphone cables
Connect the microphone cable to the microphones.
4. Camera cable
13
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Connect the camera cable labeled “Main Cam” from the S-Video output on the camera to the S-
Video input “Main Cam” on the codec. Connect also the control cable labeled “Camera Control”
between the RJ-45 on the camera, and the Dataport 2 on the codec.
5a. ISDN cables - using BRI interface
Connect the ISDN cables to the ISDN sockets (S/T interface) provided by the network provider.
The main ISDN number will be that number associated with the socket to which ISDN cable
number 1 has been connected.
Note! The system does not have a built-in network terminator. If wall socket provides an
ISDN U-interface, an NT1 between your system and the ISDN line is needed, see Appendix
10 for more information.
5b. ISDN cable - using the PRI interface
If using the PRI interface, the E1/T1 cable should be connected to a CSU (Channel Service
Unit). ). It is recommended that a CSU be used between the system and the PRI line from the
network provider, see Appendix 8.
5c. Other networks - using the External Network interface
If using other networks, see ISDN/External/Leased E1/T1 and Appendix 9.
6. LAN cable
To connect the system to a Local Area Network (LAN), connect the cable labelled "LAN
Ethernet" to a suitable Ethernet port on the LAN.
14
Installation
2.3 Monitor Configuration
Switch the system on by activating the power switch on the codec (located on the right hand side
at the rear of the codec). A green light is shown, located in the center on the front of the codec.
After the system has performed a self-test routine, the welcome menu will be displayed on the
monitor.
Monitor Configuration
Power on the monitor and use the monitor remote control to select the Audio/Video input used
(refer to your monitor manual). Remember to select S-video (S-VHS) input to avoid a black and
white picture.
15
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
2.4 System Configuration
The system must be configured for each installation. Configuration settings can be made via the
system menu. If an external IMUX or non-standard network is being used it may be necessary to
configure any associated external equipment.
Navigate through the menu system using the arrow keys and OK. Remember to press the Save
button on the bottom of each menu to save the changes. Press Cancel (x) to return to the
previous Menu. See General Use for more information about how to use the menus and the
remote control.
General configuration:
1. Open the General Settings menu
Press OK/Menu to open the Main Menu, if not already displayed. Select Control
Panel - Administrator Settings - General to open the General Settings menu.
2. Language
Press OK in the Language field and select the wanted language from the list.
3. System Name
Enter a name in the System Name field using the number keys on the remote control,
in the same way as with a mobile or cellular phone.
4. Dual Monitor
If using two monitors Dual Monitor should be set to "On". If using one monitor, set
Dual Monitor to "Off".
16
Installation
5. Auto Answer, Max Call Length, Phone Book Settings and Permissions
Leave Auto Answer, Max Call Length, Access code and Permissions unchanged if no
special needs are required. See chapter General Settings for more information.
6. Screen Settings
When using wide screen (16:9) monitors, set TV Monitor Format to Wide (16:9).
TANDBERG also recommends setting Picture Layout to Picture outside Picture when
using 16:9 monitors. Picture outside Picture provides a display layout optimized for
wide screen monitors. The display layout may be changed at any time using the
Layout button on the remote control.
7. Software Options
To activate all options for the system, a new option key must be entered in the
Software Options menu (see paperwork accompanying the system). The Presenter
option key should be entered under “New Option Key”. Any bandwidth option key
should be entered under “New Bandwidth Key”. For more information on these
options, please contact your TANDBERG representative.
8. Save changes
Remember to save any changes made in a menu by selecting the Save button on the
menu line and pressing OK.
Network configuration:
1. Open the Network menu
Press OK/Menu to open the Main Menu, if not already displayed. Select Control
Panel - Administrator Settings - Network to open the Network menu.
2. ISDN configuration
Set the Network type to the desired network. Specify the settings for the selected
network in the relevant menu. Enabled but unused ISDN lines (i.e. lines not active)
should be disabled. For details, follow the instructions in ISDN /External/Leased
E1/T1. See also the examples in Appendix 9: Connecting the system to the Switched
56 network and in Appendix 10: Connecting the system to ISDN using NT1 network
adapters.
3. LAN configuration
Select LAN Settings in the Network menu and specify the necessary LAN settings
according to the instructions from your LAN administrator. For details, follow the
instructions in LAN Settings. If there is an H.323 Gatekeeper present on your LAN,
refer to H.323 Settings as well.
17
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4. Network Profiles
Please refer to Network Profiles for details
5. Data Port
Please refer to Data Port for details
6. Save changes
Remember to save any changes made in the menu by selecting the Save button on
the Menu line and pressing OK.
18
3 General Use
Wake up the system
When the system is not in use, it is in standby mode and the screens are black. Wake up the
system by picking up the remote control. An incoming call or pressing any key on the remote
control will also wake up the system.
If the system does not respond:
Make sure that the system is switched on by using the On/Off switch located at the rear
of the Codec (see figure below).
Verify that your monitor is switched on. This is normally done by pushing the power
button on the front of the monitor depending on monitor type.
1
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.1 The Welcome Screen
When the system is switched on, the welcome screen will be displayed. The welcome screen
presents the menu and displays your main camera image in the background (main camera is
system default). The ISDN/IP numbers and the system name are displayed in the upper right
corner. The ISDN Number and IP Number are the dial-in numbers of the system.
The welcome screen provides you with the most important system information:
System Name
Your ISDN Number
Your IP Address or IP Number
Indications of Missed Calls or Warnings if any
It is possible to customize the text on the welcome screen. See Menu Settings for how to edit
welcome text.
20
General Use
3.2 Using the Remote Control
The system is controlled with a remote control. Think of the remote control as a mobile phone
with number keys and call keys. Use the arrow keys and OK to navigate the menu. The system’s
most commonly used functions are also accessible directly from the remote control.
The Infra Red (IR) sensor for the remote control is located in front of the WAVE II Camera. There
is also a second IR-sensor located in the front of the Codec itself, which will be automatically
enabled if the WAVE II Camera is not connected.
1. Mic Off turns your microphone on and
off, see Mic off.
2. Arrow keys are used for navigation in
the menu and for moving the camera*
when the menu is hidden, see
Navigation.
3. Volume + and – adjusts the Codec
volume only and not the monitor's
volume, see Volume + and -.
4. The Layout key toggles between full
screen and different display layouts, see
Layout.
5. Cancel takes you back one step in the
menu system. Use Cancel to delete
characters in an input field, see
Navigation.
6. Press the Call key to place a call, see
Make a Call.
7. Camera presets define specific camera
positions. Move the camera to the
desired position and press and hold a
number key for 1 second to save the
current camera position to that number
key. To activate a preset whilst in a call,
simply press and release that number
key, see Camera Presets.
8. Snapshot takes a snapshot of your video
only while you are in a call, see Take
New Snapshot.
9. The Presentation key switches to a
predefined presentation source. If the
Presentation key is held down for 1
second then the Presentation video
sources menu will appear, see
Presentation Key.
10. Press OK/Menu to show the menu and
to select menu items, see Navigation.
11. Use Zoom + and – to zoom the camera
in and out.*
21
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
12. Selfview displays your outgoing video.
Press Selfview again to turn selfview off,
see Selfview.
13. Use the Phone Book to store and recall
video contacts for easy placement of
calls, see Phone Book.
14. Use the red End Call key to end the
current call. Pressing this key when not
in a call will place the system in Standby
mode, see End Call and Standby.
15. Number/Letter keys function in the same
manner as with a mobile or cellular
phone, see Number and Letter keys.
16. Press Touch tones when you are in a
call and need to dial extension numbers
etc. (instead of presets). Press the
OK/Menu button to exit Touch Tones,
see Touch tones.
*This does not apply to all systems with small integrated cameras.
22
General Use
3.2.1 Navigation
Arrow keys and OK
Navigate in the menu with the arrow keys on the remote control. The
orange selector on screen shows the selected item. Press OK to select.
Cancel key
In the main menu, pressing Cancel (X) will hide the menu. If the menu is
hidden, bring it back with OK. In other menus, pressing Cancel (X) takes
you one step back. In an input field, pressing Cancel (X) will delete
characters/numbers to the left.
Back/Cancel button
The X button in the menu corresponds with the X key on the remote.
23
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.2.2 Selfview
The term “Selfview” means the outgoing image. In a normal call, using main camera, this is the
image of your self. The Selfview button toggles the images between Far End, Selfview and Dual
Video (if any).
How to use Selfview:
1. Outside a call, pressing the Selfview button will switch between the near end video and a
black screen on the main monitor.
2. In a point to point call, press the Selfview button once to switch from far end video to near
end video see a full screen picture of the outgoing video. Press Selfview again to go back
to normal.
3. In a point to point call with a dual video stream, the dual stream is displayed in the big
picture. Press the Selfview button to toggle to the Near End picture, then the Far End
picture, and finally back to the dual stream.
The above behaviour is similar for both single monitor systems and dual monitor systems.
Selfview applies for the main monitor.
24
General Use
3.2.3 Layout
The layout of the screen can either be shown as Picture in Picture (PIP) or Picture outside Picture
(POP) when displaying more than one video image. The behaviour of the Layout button is
dependent on the Picture Layout setting in Screen Settings.
3.2.3.1 Picture in Picture
When Picture Layout is set to PIP, the Layout button makes it possible to see a second image in
a smaller view in one of the corners of the screen. The second image will be placed on top of the
main image. The user can decide in which corner the second image is to be displayed.
3.2.3.2 Picture outside Picture
When Picture Layout is set to POP, the Layout button makes it possible to see up to three images
in a composition optimized for wide screens. The second image can be displayed either as a
side-by-side the main image (1+1) or smaller images next to the main image (1+2 and 1+3).
Press the Layout button once to get side-by-side view (1+1). Press again to get the layouts 1+2
and 1+3, and finally go back to full screen view. You can also go back to full screen directly by
pressing and holding Layout for 1 second. It is recommended to use Picture outside Picture for
wide screen monitor systems.
3.2.3.3 Auto Layout
The system will automatically choose the best layout for your call. The layouts vary depending on
how many participants there are and if you use a dual video source or not. You can however
always change layout manually with the Layout button. Auto Layout applies when you open or
close a dual stream, or add or disconnect participants.
Auto Layout also includes the former automatic PIP. That implies that PIP will automatically be
shown when suitable, e.g. to display selfview when you move your near end camera. The
automatic PIP times out after a couple of seconds.
If Auto Layout is Off you will get no automatic layout changes during a call and the user must
manually control the images with the Layout button. Auto Layout is default On. To turn Auto
Layout Off, go to Screen Settings.
25
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.2.4 Mic Off
To mute the microphone during a call, press the Mic off button. An on-screen indicator appears in
the upper right corner when the microphone is off. In a call, if audio is detected, the on-screen
symbol will start to flash. Pressing the Mic off button one more time will activate the microphone
again.
Note that Mic off will mute all microphone inputs and audio 4 input, but will not mute audio from
the AUX and VCR inputs.
When an incoming call is answered, the microphone may be in the off state because the Auto
Answer setting is On+Mic off, see Auto Answer. The icon will start to flash when you start
speaking. Remember to turn the microphone on before a meeting.
26
General Use
3.2.5 Volume + and -
Press the Volume key to adjust the volume level of the codec only and not the monitor. An on-
screen indicator will show the current level.
27
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.2.6 Number and Letter keys
Pressing a number key when outside a call will bring up the call menu. When in a call, the
number keys are used for Camera Presets. Press a number and go to the corresponding Camera
Preset (see Camera Presets). However, when having an input field where numbers are required,
the system automatically goes to number mode and numbers can be dialed with the number keys
as usual.
When in an input field where letters are required, the system automatically goes to letter mode.
Writing letters works like on a mobile phone. Press the key that corresponds to your desired
letter. Press the key as many times as needed to get the right letter. Change to lower or back to
upper case letters with the a/A key, and space with the 0 _ key.
To write numbers in a text input field, press the button through all the letters. Press once more
and the number will appear.
Example: How do I write "System 123" in the System Name input field (in General in
Administrator Settings)?
Press the 7-key four times to get an "S".
Press the #-key once to switch between upper case and lower case letters.
Press the 9-key three times to get a "y".
Press the 7-key four times to get an "s".
Press the 8-key once to get a "t".
Press the 3-key twice to get an "e".
Press the 6-key once to get an "m".
Press the 0-key once to get space.
Press the 1-key three times to get a "1".
Press the 2-key four times to get a "2".
Press the 3-key four times to get a "3".
28
General Use
3.2.7 Touch Tones
If wanting to dial extension numbers during a call, press the Touch tones button to activate the
number keys, otherwise the number keys will activate the corresponding camera presets. An
indicator will tell that Touch tones are enabled. Finish with OK to exit Touch tone mode.
29
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.3 On-screen Indicators
The system has a number of icons signaling different settings:
Microphone Off
This indicator is shown when the microphone is turned off. Press the Mic off
button again to turn the microphone back on, see Mic Off for details.
Volume Off
This indicator is shown when the volume is turned off. Press Volume + to turn the
volume back on, see Volume + and - for details.
Secure Conference, AES
This double padlock indicator is shown when AES encryption (Secure
Conference) is active, see Security for details.
Secure Conference, DES
This padlock indicator is shown when DES encryption (Secure Conference) is
active, see Security for details.
Not Secure Conference
This open padlock indicator is shown during the initialization phase for AES or
DES encryption. During this period the call is not secure, see Security for details.
Warning
This indicates that the system has detected a warning. Select the icon and press
OK to see details on the warning. Please see Warnings for a list of possible
warnings.
Bad Network
This indicator appears if the system detects network anomalies like packet loss,
jitter etc., during a call. Open the menu by pressing the OK/Menu button and
select the warnings icon too see details.
Floor
This indicator is shown when you are displayed in full screen in a multipoint
conference, see Request Floor and Release Floor for details.
30
General Use
Telephone
This indicates that there is a telephone participant in the conference. The
displayed number indicates how many telephone participants there are in the
conference.
31
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.4 Using the Menu
Main menu outside a call and in a call.
Press the Menu button on the remote control to display the menu. The menu contains all
functions needed in order to control the system.
The menu contains the following items:
32
General Use
Make a Call/Add Another Call
Standby/End Call
Camera Control
Presentation
Conference Services
Control Panel
Close
See Menu Structure for a full overview of the menu.
The functions of the menu are displayed as icons. The currently selected icon is marked by an
orange square, and the name of the corresponding function is displayed on the line above, see
the figure above.
Press the OK button to activate the current selected function.
The menu automatically times out after 15 seconds if not used, see Menu timeout. Press the
Menu button to bring it back. It is also possible to hide the menu manually by pressing the Cancel
button on the remote control or select the Close icon in the menu.
* Systems with no Camera Control icon available may have a Far End Control icon present when in a call and Far End
Control possible.
33
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.5 Make a Call
Display the call menu by either:
1. Select Make a Call from the menu, or
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control
The TANDBERG system can make both video calls and telephone calls.
Call Settings specifies the quality of the call. It is possible to alter the default call settings for the
current call if required. The Default Call Settings are defined in Control Panel - Administrator
Settings - Call Quality - Default Call Settings.
It is possible to start streaming from this menu.
For setting up a MultiSite conference, see Add Call for more details.
34
General Use
3.5.1 Place Video Call
In the Make a Call menu enter the Dial Number either:
1. Manually, or
2. Select the book symbol in order to display the Phone Book and select a conference
participant.
When dialing manually, toggle between ABC/abc by pressing the # button on the remote control
and between abc/123 by holding the # button for one second. Use a star as separator in IP
addresses. If a system is registered on a gatekeeper or border controller with DNS support, there
are several ways to call into the system:
<IP address>
<E.164>
<H.323 ID>
<H.323 ID>@<domain>
<E.164>@<domain>
See H.323 Settings for details.
Place the call by either:
1. Press OK on the remote control so that the Place Video Call icon is selected, and press
OK once again, or
2. Use the arrow button on the remote control to select the Place Video Call icon and press
OK, or
3. Press the green call button on the remote control.
Note that the call will be set up as a telephone call if the Call Type in Call Settings is set to
Telephone Call. See Default Call Settings for more details.
35
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.5.2 Place Telephone Call
In the Make a Call menu enter the Dial Number either:
1. Manually, or
2. Select the book symbol in order to display the Phone Book and select a conference
participant, see Phone Book for details.
When entering a Dial Number manually, toggle between abc/123 by pressing the # button on the
remote control for one second. Use a star as separator in IP addresses.
Place the call by either:
1. Press OK on the remote control, select the Place Telephone Call icon and press OK once
again, or
2. Use the arrow button on the remote control to select the Place Telephone Call icon and
press OK.
When dialing a telephone number and pressing the green Call button on the remote control, the
system will in most cases automatically interpret the number as a telephone number and not a
video number. The interpretation can sometimes take a little while and it is faster to use the Place
Telephone Call button in the menu.
See Default Call Settings for more details.
36
General Use
3.5.3 Add Call
(optional feature)
Conference systems with built-in MultiSite can handle up to 6 video calls and 5 telephone calls
simultaneously.
It is possible to both set up a conference with many participants and also add participants during
a conference.
Set up a conference with two or more participants
In the Make a Call menu enter the Dial Number either:
1. Manually, or
2. Select the book symbol in order to display the Phone Book and select a conference
participant, see Phone Book for details. It is also possible to select a predefined MultiSite
entry, see New MultiSite Contact.
3. Press OK on the remote control.
Add another participant to the conference by either:
1. Select the Add Video Call icon if the next participant is using a video system, and press
OK, or
2. Select the Add Telephone Call icon if the next participant is using a telephone system,
and press OK.
A new entry is now displayed in the call list. Enter the number as described above.
It is also possible to set up a list of all the wanted conference participants by selecting the Add
Video Calls and Add Telephone Calls the wanted number of times, and enter their numbers
afterwards.
Place a MultiSite call:
1. If the call is a mixed conference with both video and telephone participants, select the
Place Video Call icon, or
2. If the call is a conference with telephone participants only, select the Place Telephone
Call icon.
Add participant(s) during a conference
Display the call menu during a call by either:
1. Select Make a Call from the menu, or
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control
Enter the new participants in the same way as described above.
37
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
38
General Use
3.5.4 Call Settings
The Call Settings specifies the quality of the call. Each call will be set up with the Default Call
Settings if the settings are not altered. In this case the field is named Default Call Settings. If the
settings for some reason are altered for the current participant in the current call, the name of the
field will be changed to reflect this.
Usually it is not necessary for the user to alter the settings.
The Default Call Settings are defined in Control Panel - Administrator Settings - Call Quality -
Default Call Settings.
When setting up a call in the Make a Call menu:
1. Select the Default Call Settings field for the participant and press the OK button on the
remote control.
2. Make desired changes to Call Type, Network, Bandwidth and Restrict (56k). If this is to
be the new default call settings, select Set as Default in the menu.
3. Select the OK icon and press the OK button on the remote control. The name of the Call
Settings field will reflect the changes made.
It is possible to make the changes made to the Call Settings default by selecting Set as Default
and OK. These settings will now be the default settings for all future manually dialed calls.
These settings are also available in the menu Control Panel - Administrator Settings - Call Quality
- Default Call Settings.
39
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.5.5 Streaming
Streaming lets you broadcast your meeting to participants on web. The web participants can
listen to the meeting, see snapshots, but not participate themselves. Snapshots of current stream
(if MultiSite), selfview, far end and DuoVideo streams are accessible via http. See Appendix 6 for
descriptions of the possible snapshot files.
How to use Streaming:
1. Choose Streaming from the Call Menu to open the Streaming menu.
2. Press Start Streaming from the menu line. An indicator will appear on the screen when
streaming is activated.
3. Press Stop Streaming to end streaming. Streaming will also end when you disconnect the
call.
4. Press Streaming Settings if you want to change streaming settings (see Streaming
Settings below)
How to view streaming from a PC:
1. After streaming is started, an easy way to view the streamed audio/video is to start your
Web browser and enter the IP-address of the streaming system.
2. After the Web page of the system is shown, click on Streaming. Alternatively, enter
http://<codec ip-address>/stream.sdp
Streaming Settings
Address Address is defined as the IP-address of a streaming client, streaming
server or a multicast address. Giving an address in the range 224.0.0.1-
239.255.255.255 will broadcast the stream to any host that has joined
the specified multicast group. Specifying normal broadcast address
255.255.255.255 will broadcast to any members on the LAN.
Address Port If several codec’s are streaming to the same IP-address, different ports
have to be used in order for the client to know which stream to receive.
If the first codec streams on port 2240 and the second codec on port
2250, the client has to specify which port to listen to. Video is
transmitted on the specified port; audio is transmitted on the port
number 4 above the specified video port, in this case 2244 and 2254.
TTL/Router This is used for streaming data to limit how many routers the data
Hops should pass before it is rejected. If TTL is set to 2, data will not traverse
more than 2 router hops.
40
General Use
Streaming Auto: Enables streaming of both local and far end video.
Source* Selection of which site to be streamed is done using voice
switching (the site that speaks is streamed).
Local: Only the local video will be streamed.
Remote: Only the far end video will be streamed.
Local and far end audio is always streamed.
Allow Remote On: Streaming can be started from external user interfaces like
Start the Web-browser or Telnet session.
Off: Streaming can only be started from the Video Conferencing
System User Interface using the remote control, or by using the
Data port. This will prevent activation of streaming using Web
browser or Telnet sessions. See also Password section below
Announcements On: The codec will announce to the network that it is streaming.
This enables a streaming client (e.g. a PC) to connect to the
codec’s streaming session. Used by Cisco IP/TV.
Off: No announcement packets will be transmitted.
Video Rate Defines the Video streaming rate from the system. Range is 16 kbps -
320 kbps. In addition, audio (G.711) streaming rate is 64 kbps, providing
a maximum streaming rate of 384 kbps.
Streaming Set password so that only participants entering correct password will be
Password able to view the streaming session. Entering a password will prevent
unauthorized people from accessing the streaming session.
*The streaming source setting is not available when streaming only is supported outside a call.
41
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.6 Answer an incoming call
How to answer an incoming call:
To accept an incoming call, press the OK button or the green Call button on the remote
control.
How to reject an incoming call:
To reject an incoming call, select the Reject icon and press the OK button, or press the
End Call button on the remote control.
Incoming calls will connect automatically if Auto Answer is set to On, see Auto Answer for details.
When idle, the system will accept all incoming calls as long as Incoming MCU Calls and Incoming
Telephone Calls are set to On, see Permissions for details. Also, Do Not Disturb must not be
activated, see Do Not Disturb for more details.
42
General Use
3.7 End Call
How to end a call:
Press the red End Call button on the remote control, or
Press the Menu button on the remote control to display the menu and select End Call.
When the End Call dialog box is displayed either:
Press the red End Call button on the remote control again, or
Press the OK button to confirm that the call is to be ended.
How to end a MultiSite call:
In the list of participants:
Note that switching off the monitor(s), if they may be switched off individually, will not end a
call.
43
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.8 Standby
The system will automatically go to Standby mode when it is not in use. In standby mode, the
screen(s) are black. It is however still possible to receive incoming calls.
How to turn on the standby mode manually:
Select Standby from the menu and select Standby Now, or
Press the End Call button on the remote control twice.
How to turn off the standby mode:
When the system is in standby, pick up the remote control, or press any of its keys to
activate the system again.
The standby mode of the system should be used if the system is to be left idle.
Note! Standby is not activated by switching off the monitor(s) (if possible to switch off
individually).
It is possible to postpone the system from entering standby mode for 1 hour or 3 hours, see Delay
Standby for 1 hour and Delay Standby for 3 hours.
44
General Use
3.8.1 Delay Standby for 1 hour
Delay Standby for 1 hour postpones the system from entering standby mode for 1 hour.
This function is useful when using the monitors for a local presentation to prevent the system
from automatically blanking the monitors.
It is also possible to postpone the system from entering standby mode for 3 hours, see Delay
Standby for 3 hours.
45
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.8.2 Delay Standby for 3 hours
Delay Standby for 3 hours postpones the automatic standby mode for 3 hours.
This function is useful when using the monitors for a local presentation to prevent the system
from automatically blanking the monitors.
It is also possible to postpone the system from entering standby mode for 1 hour, see Delay
Standby for 1 hour.
46
General Use
3.8.3 Do Not Disturb
To prevent the system from accepting any incoming calls, the function Do Not Disturb has to be
activated. The caller will hear a busy tone when calling the system. The monitor will be black
when Do Not Disturb is active, see figure below.
End Do Not Disturb by pressing any key on the remote control.
47
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.9 Phone Book
The Phone Book is available via the Phone Book button on the remote control or from the Make a
Call menu.
Using the Phone Book is time saving and prevents the user from inadvertently calling the wrong
number. The contacts are sorted alphabetically. The contact names are displayed in the list and
the telephone or video numbers, bandwidth and net profiles of the selected contact is displayed at
the bottom line.
Navigate up and down in the Phone Book with the arrow keys on the remote control. Use the
letter keys to search through the contacts beginning with the typed letter.
The functions in the Phone Book are available when pressing the left arrow key on the remote
control, and then the up and down arrow keys. Note that the last selected contact will be marked.
When selecting Phone Book the phone book opens showing the folders Last Number Dialed,
Missed Calls, Call History and My Contacts. Global Contacts are listed below these folders.
The following information is available from the Phone Book:
Last Number Dialed
Missed Calls
48
General Use
Call History
My Contacts
Global Contacts
49
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.9.1 Call Log
The Call Log lists Last Number Dialed, Missed Calls and Call History allows the user to see which
calls that are made in the past. The lists contain a maximum of 30 numbers and the numbers are
stored in these lists until the system is restarted. If the contacts listed are available in the phone
book, the names will be displayed instead of the numbers.
Last Number Dialed lists all outgoing calls. Missed Calls lists the calls that are not accepted. Call
History lists all outgoing, incoming and missed calls. The calls in the lists are marked with these
icons:
outgoing calls
incoming calls
missed calls
The following buttons are available from these folders :
Call Now
Copy to My Contacts
Delete
Delete All
Cancel
How to make a call using the call lists:
1. Select a number from the list.
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control, or press the left arrow key to select the
Call Now icon, followed by OK. The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call
depending on the selected contact. Alternatively, press the OK button when the contact is
selected. The Make a Call menu will then be displayed with the name of the contact in
the Dial Number field, and the Call Settings field will reflect the call settings for this
contact. It is possible to alter the call settings before placing the call. The call will be set
up as a video call or a telephone call as described in Make a Call.
3. Wait for the call to connect.
How to delete numbers in the call lists do one of the following:
Choose the Delete button to delete a selected contact from the call list.
Choose the Delete All button to delete all contacts listed in the call list.
Note that you will not delete contacts from the Phone Book if you delete them from the call lists.
50
General Use
3.9.2 My Contacts
My Contacts are the locally stored contacts on the system. This means that it is possible to add
new contacts and edit or delete existing contacts. My Contacts can store up to 200 contacts.
How to make a call using My Contacts:
1. Find the desired contact using the arrow keys or searching on the first letter with the letter
keys.
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control, or press the left arrow key to select the
Call Now icon, followed by OK. The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call
depending on the settings made when storing the contact. Alternatively, press the OK
button when the contact is selected. The Make a Call menu will then be displayed with
the name of the contact in the Dial Number field, and the Call Settings field will reflect the
call settings for this contact. It is possible to alter the call settings before placing the call.
The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call as described in Make a Call.
3. Wait for the call to connect.
Note that the telephone or video number and profile of the selected contact is displayed at the
bottom line.
51
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
The following functions are available from My Contacts:
Call Now
New Contact
New MultiSite Contact
Edit Contact
Delete Contact
Close
52
General Use
3.9.2.1 Add New Contact
The New Contact function is available from My Contacts.
Add a new contact to My Contacts by:
1. Select the New Contacts button to open the New Contacts dialog box.
2. Enter Name by using the letter keys on the remote control. Input will automatically be
interpreted as letters. Toggle between capital letters and small letters by pressing the #
button on the remote control. The maximum name length is 30 characters. For numbers,
press the # button for one second.
3. Enter Number by using the number keys on the remote control. Input will automatically be
interpreted as numbers. The maximum number length is 60 numbers. Use a star as
separator in IP addresses. For letters, press the # button for one second.
4. Alter the default setting of Call Type if necessary.
5. Alter the default setting of Network if necessary.
6. Alter the default setting of Bandwidth if necessary. For bandwidth 2x64 kbps or 2x56
kbps, two numbers are required, see Default Call Settings for more details.
7. Alter the default setting of Restrict (56k) if necessary.
8. Press OK to save.
53
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.9.2.2 New MultiSite Contact
(Optional feature*)
The New MultiSite Contact function is available from My Contacts.
It is possible to pre-define the participants of a conference meeting as a MultiSite Contact. All
participants in the MultiSite Contact will then be connected automatically instead of having to call
the participants one by one.
My Contacts can hold up to 50 MultiSites Contacts. The MultiSite Contacts consist of participants
that are already stored in My Contacts.
It is possible to have up to totally 6 video participants and 5 telephone participants in a meeting.
How to define a New MultiSite Contact:
1. Open the Phone Book via the Phone Book button on the remote control or in the Make a
Call menu.
2. Select the New MultiSite Contact icon. The New MultiSite Contact dialogue box is
displayed.
3. Enter a name of the MultiSite Contact, and press OK on the remote control.
4. Select Add Participant. The contents of the Local Phone Book is displayed. Find the
desired contact and press the OK button on the remote control. Repeat until all the
desired participants are selected.
5. Press OK to save the MultiSite Contact.
54
General Use
Bandwidth for a MultiSite Contact call
When calling a MultiSite Contact, the system will try to call the participants with their specified
bandwidths. If the total bandwidth exceeds the systems maximum bandwidth, the system will
downspeed and distribute the available bandwidth equally for all the participants.
Example: In a MultiSite Contact there is one participant with bandwidth 256kbps and one
participant with bandwidth 384kbps. 512kbps is the maximum bandwidth of the system.
The two participants' bandwidth exceeds the maximum bandwidth. The system will then
downspeed so that each participant connects with equal bandwidth, i.e. 512kbps/2 = 256kbps.
* The MultiSIte option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP
55
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.9.2.3 Edit Contact
The Edit Contact function is available from My Contacts.
How to edit a contact in the Local Phone Book:
1. Select the contact that is to be edited.
2. Press the left arrow on the remote control, followed by the down arrow until the Edit
Contact icon is selected.
3. The current settings for this contact is displayed in a dialogue box. Alter the wanted
settings.
4. Press OK to save.
If the altered contact is part of a MultiSite Contact*, the contact will be updated in the MultiSite
Contact automatically.
* The MultiSite option is not available on all systems.
56
General Use
3.9.2.4 Delete Contact
The Delete Contact function is available from My Contacts.
How to delete a contact:
1. Select the contact that is to be deleted.
2. Press the left arrow on the remote control, followed by the down arrow until the Delete
Contact icon is selected. The Delete Contact dialogue box is displayed.
3. Confirm by pressing the OK button again.
57
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.9.3 Global Contacts
When selecting Phone Book the phone book opens showing the Global Contacts below the
folders Last Number Dialled, Missed Calls, Call History and My Contacts.
Global Contacts are available if the system is connected to an external management system like
the TANDBERG Management Suite (TMS). These contacts cannot be changed locally by the
system, only from the management system. If there is a need to modify the number or any
settings of a contact before making a call, select the contact and press OK on the remote control.
The Make a Call menu is displayed and the settings can be altered before placing the call. The
changes are not saved.
How to make a call using Global Contacts:
1. Find the desired contact using the arrow keys or searching on the first letter with the letter
keys or use the search function described in Search.
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control, or press the left arrow key to select the
Call Now icon, followed by OK. The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call
depending on the settings made when storing the contact. Alternatively, press the OK
button when the contact is selected. The Make a Call menu will then be displayed with
the name of the contact in the Dial Number field, and the Call Settings field will reflect the
call settings for this contact. It is possible to alter the call settings before placing the call.
The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call as described in Make a Call.
3. Wait for the call to connect.
From Global Contacts the following functions are available:
Call Now
Up one Level
Search
Copy to My Contacts
Close
58
General Use
3.9.3.1 Up one Level
Global Contacts can be arranged in a tree structure with several sub folders. Use the Up one
Level button to navigate up in the tree structure.
When a search in the Global Phone Book is made, by using the Search function, only contacts
matching the search text are displayed. Select the Up one Level button to return back to the
alphabetical list.
59
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.9.3.2 Search
The phone book can contain an unlimited amount of global contacts. Using search makes it
easier to find the wanted contact.
How to search in the Global Phone Book:
1. Select the Search icon.
2. Enter search text in the dialogue box that appears and press the OK button on the
remote control. The system will list all entries that contain the entered letter combination.
3. It is also possible to search on first letter in the Phone Book with the letter keys on the
remote control.
60
General Use
3.9.3.3 Copy Contact to My Contacts
The Copy Contact to My Contacts function is available from the Last Number Dialed, Missed
Calls, Call History and Global Contacts folders, see Phone Book for details.
It may be wise to copy contacts that are often used to My Contacts. Note that the local copy will
not be updated if the Global Contacts are updated from the management system.
How to copy a contact from the Global Phone Book to the Local Phone Book:
1. Select the contact to be copied to My Contacts.
2. Press the left arrow on the remote control, followed by the down arrow until the Copy
Contact to My Contacts icon is selected.
A message box telling that the operation was successful will be displayed.
61
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.10 Camera Control
There are several ways to control the camera:
Control the camera directly with the arrow keys when the menu is closed or use the Move
Camera function in the menu to control both the near end and far end camera, see Move
Camera and Far End Control for details.
Use the zoom button on the remote control will zoom the picture in (+) and out (-).
Use Camera Presets, see Camera Presets for details.
Adjust focus, brightness and whitebalance, see Picture Control for details.
Use Automatic Camera Tracking, see Camera Tracking for details.
Use the TANDBERG Tracker, see separate instructions included with the TANDBERG
Tracker.
62
General Use
3.10.1 Move Camera
It is possible to move the camera with the remote control or via the menu.
Moving the camera directly with the remote control
When the menu is hidden, the arrow keys will work on the camera. If the menu is displayed, press
the Cancel button on the remote control to hide it. Use the left and right arrow keys to pan the
camera, and the up and down arrow keys to tilt the camera. Use zoom + and – to zoom in and
out.
Moving the Camera via the menu:
1. Select the Camera Control icon from the menu.
2. Select the Move Camera button in the Camera Control menu.
3. Use the arrow keys on the remote control to pan and tilt the camera.
4. Press OK when done.
63
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.10.2 Far End Control
Far End Control allows you to control your conference partner’s camera. Far End Camera Control
is useful if e.g. it is not possible to see what a participant at the far end is writing on their white
board. Use Far End Control to move the far end camera and zoom closer on the white board. Use
the left and right arrow keys to pan the camera, and the up and down arrow keys to tilt the
camera. Use zoom + and – to zoom in and out.
You can also control your conference partner’s video sources and presets and request a
snapshot from the far end side. Enabling Far End Control will put the system in Far End mode
and camera control, camera preset, presentation, and snapshot will work on the far end camera.
Far End Control only works when you are in call and if the far end side supports H.281 (Far End
Camera Control). You can prevent others from controlling your system by setting Allow Far End
Camera Control to Off in Control Panel - Administrator Setting - General - Permissions, see
Permissions for details.
How to use Far End control:
1. Select the Camera Control icon in the menu.
2. Select the Far End Control icon. When far end camera control is selected an indicator will
appear and it is possible to control the far end camera, camera preset, presentation and
snapshot for the far end.
3. Deselect the Far End Control button to deactivate far end control mode. This may also be
done by pressing the Cancel or the OK button.
Far End Camera Presets
Far End Camera Presets works just like your own camera presets. When Far End is on, use the
number keys to activate far end camera presets. You are however not allowed to save far end
camera presets.
Far End Presentation
Pressing the Presentation key or choosing a presentation from the presentation menu while Far
End is on, will result in opening a far end presentation. Be aware of that the far end video sources
may not correspond with the buttons in the presentation menu. If you press Document Camera,
the far end side might have another video source on this input.
Request snapshot from the Far End
You can request a snapshot from the far end side. Put the system in Far End mode and press
Snapshot on the remote control to take a snapshot of the current far end video (current is default
snapshot source).
64
General Use
3.10.3 Camera Presets
Use camera presets to easily vary between predefined near end camera angles. This is useful
when pictures from many different camera angles have to be sent to the far end. E.g. in a
meeting there is a white board, a PC and a small meeting table. Use camera presets to move
between these camera angles in order to present the correct information to the participants at the
far end without having to move the camera manually every time. A preset is deactivated when the
camera is moved manually with the arrow keys.
Presets are available from the menu. When you are in a call you can also activate presets directly
from the remote control. You can save up to 15 presets. Each camera preset is able to store
camera angle, video source and audio source selection.
How to use preset directly from the remote control:
When you are in a call you can activate presets with just one press on the number keys on
remote control. The number keys will however not work as presets when you are in an input field,
in order to write numbers or letters.
1. Press a number on the remote control. The camera will move to the corresponding angle,
or video source, stored on that number.
How to use presets via the menu:
1. Select Camera Control - Display Presets in the menu.
2. Select the wanted preset with the arrow keys on the remote control and
press OK.
How to save a new preset directly from the remote control:
1. Move the camera to the desired position or select the desired video source that you
would like to store as a preset.
2. Press a number on the remote control for 1 second to save the preset. It is possible to
store one camera preset on each of the number keys, 0-9, when storing camera presets
from the remote control. (Camera preset 10 is stored on the 0-key).
3. The new camera preset will overwrite any existing camera preset on that number.
How to save a new Preset via the menu:
1. Move the camera to the desired position or select the desired video
source that you would like to store as a preset.
2. Select Camera Control - Save New Camera Preset in the menu.
3. Enter a number between 1 and 15 and press OK.
4. Type a name for the preset to make it easier to separate the different
presets.
5. Press Save. The new Camera Preset will overwrite any existing camera
preset on that number.
65
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.10.4 TANDBERG Tracker
How to save presets for the TANDBERG Tracker:
1. Select which camera preset to be used on the TANDBERG Tracker.
2. Move the camera to the desired position to store on the tracker.
3. Select Move Camera - Save New Preset in the menu.
4. All camera presets are accessible from the TANDBERG Tracker.
For more information, see separate instructions included with the TANDBERG Tracker.
66
General Use
3.10.5 Picture Control
Focus, Brightness and White balance are set for auto focus, auto brightness and auto white
balance by default. If you need to set focus, brightness and white balance manually, go to Picture
Control in the Camera Control menu.
Focus
Auto Auto focus continuously updates the focus throughout the call. When moving
the camera, the system will use auto focus for 5 seconds to set the right focus
of the new camera position. After 5 seconds auto focus is turned off to prevent
continuous focus adjustments of the camera.
Temporary When Temporary is selected, the slide bar is enabled. Use the arrow keys to
adjust the focus. The temporary focus will last until you move the camera again
and auto focus will take effect.
Camera Brightness
Auto Auto brightness continuously updates the brightness of the camera picture.
Manual When Manual is selected, the slide bar is enabled. Use the arrow keys to manually
adjust the camera brightness. If brightness is set manually, the system will keep
this brightness level also when the camera is moved.
White balance
Auto Auto white balance continuously updates the white balance.
When Manual is selected, the “Set White balance” field is enabled. To update the
Manual
white balance manually, select Manual. A white object should be held in front of
the camera a few seconds before and after pressing “Set White balance”. If white
balance is set manually, the system will keep this white balance also when the
camera is moved.
67
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.10.6 Camera Tracking
Through Camera Tracking and the use of two or three microphones, the camera can
automatically position itself on the current speaker. Before using camera tracking, the camera
positions used must be stored at Preset 7 (Mic1), Preset 8 (Mic2) and/or Preset 9 (Mic3).
How to use Camera Tracking:
1. Select the Camera Control icon in the main menu.
2. Enable Camera Tracking by choosing Camera Tracking. An indicator will appear on the
screen.
3. End Camera Tracking by deselecting the Camera Tracking button. Camera Tracking will
also end if you activate a camera preset or move the camera manually with the arrow
keys.
Example: You have placed Microphone 1 on the table. Where should you position the camera
for Preset 7?
The camera position stored at Preset 7 must be related to Microphone 1. Therefore all
participants who are located closest to Mic1 should be included in the Preset 7 camera
position etc. When camera tracking is activated and a person close to Mic1 speaks, Preset 7
will be automatically selected.
When activating another video source (for instance document camera), camera tracking will be
temporarily disabled until you re-select Main Camera or a Main Camera preset.
The camera tracking speeds may be altered in the Video Settings menu in Administrator Settings,
see Camera Tracking Mode for further details.
A Voice Detector makes the system more tolerant of noise and ensures the camera not to be
moved by noise such as paper shuffling, etc.
Note that pressing Mic Off will temporarily disable camera tracking until you turn on the
microphone again.
Please also note that the camera tracking will not work properly if using an Audio Science
Microphone.
68
General Use
3.11 Presentation
The Presentation Functionality in the system enables you to show other available video sources
in addition to your Main Camera. This is perfect for meetings where you would like to show a
PowerPoint presentation for instance. You can even use arrow keys up and down on the remote
control to activate Page Up/Down on the PC (this only applies when using VNC).
Use Presentation outside a call to make a local presentation for the people in your own meeting
room. Use Presentation when you are in a call to make a presentation for the far end as well.
The quickest way to show a presentation is to use the Presentation Key on the remote control.
The presentation key shows a predefined video source, PC is default. It is possible to change the
presentation source in the Presentation menu. Choose Presentation from the main menu if you
want to select a video source manually. The Presentation Menu offers you all the available video
sources supported by your system.
69
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.11.1 Presentation Key
The quickest way to show a presentation is to use the presentation key on the remote control.
The presentation key is used to start and stop a presentation. The presentation key will display
PC (default*) or the last used presentation source.
When holding the presentation key for 1 second, the presentation menu will be displayed. This
menu allows you to choose other video sources. When choosing a source different from the
default presentation source, this source will be temporarily stored as presentation source until
next time the system goes to standby.
The default presentation source can be permanently changed in Presentation Settings.
When using the presentation key, your presentation will be displayed as a Dual Stream, if
possible. If the call does not support a dual video stream, the presentation will display as main
video stream.
How to start and end a Presentation using the Presentation key:
1. Press the Presentation key. The video source that is set as presentation source is
displayed in full screen (PC is default). Remember to connect your PC to the codec in
advance.
2. Press the Presentation key again to end the presentation and go back to main camera.
* If available on your system.
70
General Use
3.11.2 Presentation Menu
The Presentation menu offers you all available video sources; Main Camera, PC, Document
Camera, VCR, AUX and VNC. All these sources can be used as Main Video Stream or Dual
Video Stream (Duo Video / H.239). Not all systems has all video sources available, see Interfaces
for details.
Outside a call the presentation menu only contains Main Video Sources. In a call, the headers
Dual Video and Snapshot display in addition to Main Video (if the call supports Duo Video
/H.239). Use the up/down keys to change between video sources and headers. Start a Dual
Stream by selecting a Dual Video source. Close the Dual Stream by deselecting the video source
button.
Note that Dual Video Stream may not be available if option not installed, not supported on
your system or if already activated. Use the up/down keys to change between video source
and header.
For Snapshots, see Take New Snapshot and Display Snapshot.
How to change your main video source:
1. Choose the Main Video header from the Presentation menu.
2. Choose your desired video source and press OK.
How to show a presentation in addition to your main video (Dual Video Stream):
1. Select the Dual Video header.
2. Choose a dual video source and press OK.
3. Deselect the active video source button to end the presentation.
71
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.11.3 PC Presenter (DVI/XGA Input)
(Optional feature - not available on all systems)
Users often have their presentations on a laptop that is brought into the meeting room.
Remember to connect your PC to the codec before you press the Presentation button. Note that
the image will appear smoother on the system if your presentation is already displaying in full
screen on your PC prior to connecting your PC to the video system.
Plugging a PC into the system is made extremely simple through the PC Presenter, avoiding the
need for any additional hardware such as a projector, PC/Video converter or extra cables.
How to connect a PC to the codec with the DVI/VGA cable:
1. Connect the VGA-DVI cable to the PC Presenter (PC DVI-I in) connector on the codec.
2. Connect the VGA-DVI cable to your PC (VGA Output).
3. When the PC is connected to the codec, hit the Presentation key to display the PC image
on the system.
If no PC image is displayed on your monitor, make sure that your PC is set to activate your VGA
output. On most laptop PCs you must press a special key combination to switch the PC image
from the PC screen to the video screen.
Note that the DVI/VGA input is compliant with VESA Extended Display Identification Data (EDID)
and will be able to reconfigure the PC’s screen settings if it is currently configured to a VGA
format that the system doesn’t support.
Also note that you can use the DVI input to transmit high resolution images from document
cameras or other sources supporting the HD format 720p.
For details on formats supported on 'DVI-I in', please refer to Interfaces.
72
General Use
3.11.4 PC Soft Presenter and VNC
(Optional feature)
PC SoftPresenter is used to display PC images on your system without using a VGA cable (PC
Presenter). The system and your PC must be connected to the same LAN. In addition, VNC
(Virtual Network Computing) server software must be installed on the PC. Free software can be
downloaded from http://www.realvnc.com. Install the software by running the downloaded file.
How to configure the VNC Server software:
1. Select the following to setup VNC; Windows-Start\All Programs\Highlight
RealVNC\Hightlight VNC Server\Show User Properties
2. Select Accept Socket Connections.
3. Select Auto for Display Number. Display Number in the system must then have the value
0.
4. Enter a password in the Password-field. This must correspond with the VNC Settings on
your system.
How to show PC using the PC Soft Presenter and VNC:
1. Start the VNC software on your PC.
2. To use VNC, you must configure VNC Settings. Open VNC Settings in the Presentation
Settings menu in Administrator Settings.
3. Fill in the IP address of your PC, Display Number and Password.
4. Press Save.
5. When you now choose VNC as video source in the Presentation menu, you will see your
PC using VNC. If a PowerPoint presentation is being displayed then you can scroll
through the presentation by pressing the up and down arrows on the remote control. VNC
settings will go back to default when the system goes to standby.
73
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.11.5 Dual Stream (DuoVideoTF/H.239)
(Optional feature - not available on all systems)
With Dual Stream you have the opportunity to show two different live video streams
simultaneously, main video and one additional source. This is handy when showing a
presentation. You see the live presentation and the live video of the presenter simultaneously.
When you start a presentation, Dual Stream starts automatically if both local and remote system
supports Dual Stream. If one of the systems does not support Dual Stream, no second video
stream will be established and your presentation will be shown as your main video.
Dual Stream is available on all systems with Natural Presenter Package installed. H.239 is the
new ITU standard defining how to send two video sources simultaneously.
Example:
Start a meeting with main camera as video source. Press the presentation key on the remote
control to start a PC presentation.
PC will appear as a Dual Video Stream in addition to main camera. End the Dual Stream
presentation by pressing presentation key again.
In Presentation Settings, you can set Presentation Start to Manual. That means that Dual Stream
will not start automatically.
Example:
Start a meeting with main camera as video source. Press the presentation key on the remote
control to start a PC presentation.
A dialog box appears where you can choose to show PC as Dual Video Stream or not. This is
handy if you not always want to use Dual Stream.
Dual Stream and Bandwidth
Using Dual Stream, the quality will automatically downspeed to the optimal bandwidth. This
means that you need higher quality to allocate enough bandwidth for the two video streams. Dual
Stream borrows bandwidth from main video. When Dual Stream is closed, the bandwidth is
returned to the main video.
Note that when selecting the Document Camera or PC, the system will automatically request floor
when connected to a MCU conference as MultiSite host* or connected to an external MCU.
* Not available on all systems.
74
General Use
3.11.6 Take New Snapshot
The system can take a snapshot of your live video. Snapshot is handy when you are in a call with
a system that does not support Dual Stream. Use Snapshot to show a snapshot of your
presentation and continue the meeting with main camera.
How to use snapshot:
You find Take New Snapshot in the Presentation menu.
1. Select the Snapshot header.
2. Select Take New Snapshot and press OK to take a snapshot.
Snapshot is found on the Star key on the remote control.
1. Press Star and you take a snapshot of the current video source (current video is default
snapshot source). You can change the snapshot source in Control Panel - Administrator
Settings - Presentation Settings. Note that snapshot does not work when you are in an
input field in the menu (the star key is then used to write the star sign).
Note that Take New Snapshot is not possible when Dual Video Stream is activated and that
it is only available when you are in a call.
Note that the Snapshot feature uses H.261 Annex D and hence will not work when using
H.264 video compression
75
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.11.7 Display Snapshot
The system stores the last sent or received Snapshot. The snapshot is deleted automatically after
the call.
How to display snapshots:
1. To view a stored snapshot, first choose the Snapshot header.
2. Select Display Snapshot in the Presentation menu.
3. Press the Display Snapshot button again to deselect it. When disconnecting the call, the
stored snapshot will be erased.
Receiving snapshots:
1. When receiving a snapshot, the snapshot is displayed in full screen.
2. Press OK to escape from the snapshot. The last sent or received snapshot will be stored
in the graphics memory and erased once the call is disconnected.
Note that Display Snapshot is only available when you have a stored snapshot.
76
General Use
3.12 Conference Services
A Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) enables several sites to participate in the same conference.
During an MCU conference, the status line will provide information about the conference.
You can make a multipoint conference in different ways. The Conference Services vary
depending on how you make the call, see Add call for details.
Example of MultiSite for high end systems
77
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Example of MultiSite for mid- to low end systems
Using the system’s internal MCU, MultiSite TF *
Most TANDBERG MXP systems has an optional built-in MCU, which is called MultiSite*. It
supports up to 6 video calls and 5 telephone calls including yourself for high-end systems, and 4
video calls and 3 telephone calls including yourself for the mid- and lower end systems. The
MultiSite supports both Split Screen and Voice Switched mode. With MultiSite, you have the
following services:
Request/Release Floor
Assign Floor To Participant/Release Floor From Participant
Terminal Names
Layout (Auto/4 Split/5+1 Split/Voice Switched)
Using an external MCU that supports Chair Control (H.243)
With an external MCU that supports H.243, you have the following services:
Request/Release Floor
View Participant/End View
Chair Control
If you take Chair control, you get the following services:
Release Chair
Assign Floor To Participant/Release Floor From Participant
Disconnect Participant
Terminate Meeting
78
General Use
Using an external MCU with limited Chair Control Support you may have the following
services
With an external MCU that does not support H.243, you have the following services:
Request/Release Floor
Terminal Names
* The MultiSIte option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP
79
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.12.1 Request Floor and Release Floor
When requesting floor, your video will be broadcasted in full screen to all other participants in the
conference. Request Floor is useful when you want to speak or display something in front of all
participants.
Release Floor when you are done and make the floor available for other participants in the
conference. An indicator appears when you have floor and disappears when you release floor,
see floor indicator in On-screen Indicators.
How to use Request and Release Floor:
1. Open the Main Menu by pressing OK.
2. Choose Conference Services and press OK.
3. Choose Request Floor and press OK. A Floor indicator will appear when you have floor.
4. When done, press the same button again, which now means Release Floor. The Floor
indicator disappears.
80
General Use
3.12.2 Conference Layout
(Only supported by TANDBERG MultiSite*)
With a TANDBERG MultiSite you can choose between the layouts: Auto Split, 4 Split, 5+1 Split
and Voice Switched view. Auto Split displays all participants on the screen simultaneously. 4 Split
displays the 4 last speaking Participants including the MultiSite host. 5+1 Split displays the
speaking participant in a big picture and the other participants in small pictures. Voice Switched
mode displays the participant that is speaking in full screen. Switch between these picture modes
using the Conference Layout menu.
Continuous Presence layout 4 split
Voice Switched mode
* The MultiSite option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP
81
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.12.3 Terminal Names
Choose Terminal Names to see a list of the participants of the MultiSite conference. Press Cancel
to go back.
82
General Use
3.12.4 Chair Control
(Not supported by TANDBERG MCU, TANDBERG MPS or MultiSite)
As chairman, you have access to more MultiSite Services. Select Chair Control to assume the
role of chairman of the conference. Select Release Chair to end the role as chairman. A Chair
indicator appears when you have Chair and disappears when chair is released.
83
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.12.5 Assign Floor and Release Floor from
Participant
Assign Floor allows the chairman to select which of the conference participants that is to be
broadcasted to all other participants.
84
General Use
3.12.6 View Site and End View
(Not supported by TANDBERG MCU or MultiSite)
View Site allows you to view any participant in the conference regardless of whom having floor
and chair. Choose End View to go back to normal.
85
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.12.7 Disconnect Participant
Disconnect Participant allows the chairman to disconnect any participant in the conference. In a
multipoint call, this is equivalent to disconnecting a participant from the end call menu.
86
General Use
3.12.8 Terminate Meeting
Terminate Meeting allows the chairman to terminate the conference altogether. In a MultiSite call,
this is equivalent to pressing End All Calls from the end call menu.
87
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.12.9 More about MultiSite (embedded MCU)
(Optional Feature*)
Calling in to a MultiSite
Any system can be part of a MultiSite conference by calling in to a MultiSite. The dial-in numbers
to the MultiSite depends of the network that is used.
To dial in to the MultiSite on IP:
Dial the IP Number or the IP Address of the system. All sites can dial the same number.
To dial in to the MultiSite on ISDN-PRI:
Dial the ISDN number of the system. All sites can dial the same number.
To dial in to the MultiSite on ISDN-BRI:
The MultiSite has specific numbers for each call that participates in the conference. To
find the dial-in numbers for the MultiSite, choose Information from the main menu and
open System Information from the bottom menu line.
Site 2 must dial MultiSite Number 2.
Site 3 must dial MultiSite Number 3.
Site 4 must dial MultiSite Number 4.
And so forth
Receiving calls to a MultiSite
When the MultiSite receives incoming calls you can accept or reject it. Pressing the green key is
equivalent to pressing Accept. Pressing the red key is equivalent to pressing Reject.
End a MultiSite Call
Ending a MultiSite Call is not very different from ending a normal point-to-point call. Use the red
key on the remote control or End Call from the main menu. The end call menu lists all the calls
that participate in the conference. To end a single call, select the call, press OK or the red key on
the remote control. To end all calls, press the End All Calls button in the menu.
Duo Video in MultiSite calls
In a MultiSite call, the MultiSite can transmit the Duo Video and/or H.239 to the other participants
that support Duo Video and/or H.239. This means that any participant can send Dual Stream and
the MultiSite will transmit it to the other participants. The participants that do not support Duo
Video or H.239 will only receive Main Video or only the dual stream dependent on software
options installed.
Mix ISDN/IP
A conference can consist of any combination of ISDN/IP sites.
MultiSite cascading
88
General Use
By connecting MultiSite systems together, it is possible to connect even more sites in a cascaded
MultiSite (see example below). All connections can use any combination of ISDN/IP. The host
can connect up to 5 other video systems with MultiSite functionality. The cascaded systems can
connect to 4 other video sites. These systems will automatically run Voice Switched mode and
transmit a full screen image to the host. In this case you get 26 participants in the cascaded
MultiSite conference.
* The MultiSite option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP
89
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.13 Control Panel
The Control Panel contains the features:
Diagnostics
Text Chat
Audio Demonstration
Administrator Settings
Restart
User Guide
90
General Use
3.13.1 Diagnostics
Diagnostics allows testing of individual system components and displays the current system
settings.
Diagnostics contain:
System Information
Channel Status
Call Status
System Selftest
View Administrator Settings
IP Address Conflict Check
Warnings
91
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.13.1.1 System Information
Select System Information to view system numbers, line status, software version, hardware serial
number and other useful information. Press arrow key up and down to scroll in the System
Information list.
System Information contains:
System Name Software Network Hardware
Version Serial
My ISDN Number Lines active
Number
My IP Number Internal Test Lines not active
My IP Address Software MAC address
MultiSite number Options Ethernet
2 installed Speed
MultiSite number
3
Note that the serial number is also found on a sticker on the system. It is
essential for identifying the system when it comes to service contracts or
other support activities. The serial number format is xx.xxxxx.
92
General Use
3.13.1.2 Channel Status
Comprehensive information about the call progress is available through the Channel Status
window. This window indicates the various stages each B-channel goes through whilst
establishing a connection.
Status – Comments
BRI
Idle the channel is idle
when calling — the network has acknowledged the call
Calling
Connected when connection is established
Sync when the channels are synchronized
Active when all available channels are connected
Releasing waiting for the network to confirm a release of the call
Released when disconnected - the network has acknowledged the disconnection
Cause codes
The most common cause codes (for ISDN) are:
1 Unallocated (unassigned) number
2 No route to specified transit network (WAN)
16 Normal clearing
17 User busy
18 No user responding
21 Call rejected
28 Invalid number format (incomplete number)
29 Facility rejected
31 Normal, unspecified
34 No circuit/channel available
41 Temporary failure
58 Bearer capability not presently available
65 Bearer service not implemented
69 Requested facility not implemented
81 Invalid call reference value
88 Incompatible destination
100 Invalid information element contents
102 Recovery on timer expiry
127 Internetworking, unspecified
255 TANDBERG specific. undefined cause code
PRI Red Alarm
Red alarm or Loss of signal (LOS) means that there is no signal and thus no framing info
received (this has same effect as pulling out the PRI cable).
PRI Yellow Alarm
93
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Yellow alarm or Remote Alarm Indicator (RAI) means that the system is receiving framing info,
but in this framing info the other side tells the system that it is not reading the system’s
transmitted framing info. Typically, this may be a broken connector in the TX part of the system
PRI cable. This could also indicate weak or noisy signal in the TX part of the system PRI cable.
PRI Blue Alarm
Blue alarm means that network on the far side of the CSU is unavailable.
Example:
The system is connected via a CSU (i.e. a Channel Services Unit’) as follows: System–
cableA–CSU–cableB–Network
If a CSU loses framing/sync from the network (example: a bad cable B), it shall no longer
send valid framing out on cable A towards the system. Instead it transmits "Blue Alarm".
Seen from a system receiving blue alarm, this means that the network on the far side of the
CSU is unavailable.
94
General Use
3.13.1.3 Call Status
Comprehensive information about the call is available through the Call Status window. The menu
has two columns, one for transmitted and one for received audio/video/data information. If Dual
Stream or MultiSite is available on your system and in use, pressing the UP/DOWN keys will
show one page per connected site. Some of the information fields will vary dependent on if H.320
(ISDN calls) or H.323 (IP calls) are made.
95
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.13.1.4 System Selftest
The system performs a check to determine internal hardware integrity. System Selftest is useful
when you want to check if your network connection is active.
96
General Use
3.13.1.5 View Administrator Settings
This window displays all the system settings. Use the arrow key on the remote control to scroll
through the list.
View Administrator Settings may contain*:
General Settings System Name
Language
Dual Monitor
Auto answer
Max Call Length
Access Code
Incoming MCU calls
Incoming Telephone calls
Far End Control
Fallback to Telephony
Screen Settings TV Monitor Format
Picture Layout
VGA Monitor Format
VGA Out Quality
PC Picture Format
Allow VGA 50Hz
Software Options Options Installed
Serial Number
Current Option Key
Menu Settings Menu Timeout in Call
Welcome Menu
Welcome Picture
Logo
Balloon Help
Display Welcome Text
Welcome Text
Administrator Password
Presentation Settings Duo Video Mode
Start up Video Source
Presentation Source
Snapshot Source
Auto Display Snapshot
PIP Appearance
PIP Placing
VNC Settings Address
Display Number
Call Quality
Video Algorithm
Audio Algorithm
Interlaced
97
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Video Quality Main Camera
PC
Document Camera
VCR
AUX
VNC
Split Screen
Default Call Settings Call Type
Network
Bandwidth
Restrict (56k)
Auto H320 Bandwidth
Auto H323 Bandwidth
SIP
Audio Settings Mic1
Inputs Mic2
Mic3
Audio4
Audio5
Audio6
Mix Mode
VCR Ducking
Level Settings Mic1
Mic2
Mic3
Audio4
Audio5
Audio6
Outputs Out1
Out2 (AUX)
Out3 (VCR)
Out1 Mode
Level Settings Out1
Out2 (AUX)
Out3 (VCR)
Echo Control Mic1
Mic2
Mic3
Audio4
Audio Levelling (AGC) Mics
Audio5 (AUX)
Audio6 (VCR)
Received Audio
Alert Tones & Volume Video Call Alert Tone
Telephone Alert Tone
Alert Volume
Alert Speaker
Key Tones
Video Settings Camera Tracking Mode
MCU Status Line
Web Snapshot
MultiSite Picture Mode
98
General Use
Picture Control Focus
White balance
Brightness
Video Name Main Cam
AUX
Doc Cam
VCR
PC
VGA
VNC
Network Type ISDN-BRI\PRI\Leased E1\T1\Enternal
H331
ISDN Switch Type ETSI (Euro ISDN),…
Line1 Setup On
Number1
Number2
SPID1
SPID2
Line2 Setup On
Number1
Number2
SPID1
SPID2
Line3 Setup On
Number1
Number2
SPID1
SPID2
Advanced ISDN Settings Subaddress
Validate Numbers (MSN)
Parallel Dial
Send Own Numbers
Sending Complete
ISDN-PRI Settings Number Range
ISDN-PRI Switch Type
Channel Hunting Max Channels
Low Channel
High Channel
Search High, Low
Line Settings:
T1 Cable Length 1
T2 Cable Length 2
E1 CRC-4
Advanced ISDN PRI Settings NSF Code Video
NSF Code Telephone Call
Leased E1/T1 Settings Call Control
Network Interface
Max Channels
Start Channels
T1 Line Coding
Line Settings
External network configuration Call Control RS66
RS449/V.35 Compatible
99
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
IP Settings IP assignment
IP address
IP subnet mask
Gateway
Ethernet Speed
H.323 Settings E.164 Alias
Use Gatekeeper
Gatekeeper IP
H.323 Prefix
Advanced H.323 Settings RSVP
NAT
NAT Address
QoS
IP Precedence Audio
Video
Data
Signaling
IP Type of Service (TOS)
Diffserv Audio
Video
Data
Signaling
SNMP Settings SNMP Trap Host1
SNMP Trap Host2
SNMP Trap Host3
SNMP Community
Streaming Settings Address
Address Port
TTL/Router Hops
Streaming Source
Allow Remote Start
Announcements
Video rate (kbps)
Network Profiles Auto
H.320
H.323
Network Profile 4
Network Profile 5
Network Profile 6
Security Encryption
Encryption mode
Data Port 1 Baud rate
Parity
Databits
Stopbits
Mode
Data Port 2 Baud rate
Parity
Databits
Stopbits
Mode
* The administrator settings available will vary within the MXP system range depending on system and what software
options installed.
100
General Use
3.13.1.6 IP Address Conflict Check
The system will give a warning if there is an IP conflict. The user may initiate this check by
selecting IP Address Conflict Check.
101
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.13.1.7 Warnings
If any warnings registered by the system it will be displayed in the Warnings menu. Open a
warning in the list to get more information about the warning.
The following warnings are displayed if detected by the system:
ISDN BRI warnings
ISDN is enabled on BRI line x, but the line is not connected. Please check your network
connection or disable the line. (101)
There is something wrong with ISDN BRI line x. Please check your network connection.
(102)
IP network quality warnings
The system is experiencing packet loss in the IP network. This may affect the quality of
the call.
The system is experiencing high jitter in the IP network. This may affect the quality of the
call.
The system is dropping IP packets due to latency in the network. This may affect the
quality of the call.
ISDN PRI warnings
ISDN PRI is configured for this system, but the line is not connected. Please check your
network connection or disable the network. (131)
There is something wrong with the ISDN PRI line (Blue alarm). Please check your
network connection. (132)
There is something wrong with the ISDN PRI line (Yellow alarm). Please check your
network connection. (133)
There is something wrong with the ISDN PRI line (D-Channel not active). Please check
your network connection. (134)
External Network warnings
External Network is configured for this system, but the line is not connected. Please
check your network connection or disable the network. (161)
Leased E1/T1 warnings
Leased E1/T1 is configured for this system, but the line is not connected. Please check
your network connection or disable the network. (191)
There is something wrong with the Leased E1/T1 line (Blue alarm). Please check your
network connection. (192)
There is something wrong with the Leased E1/T1 line (Yellow alarm). Please check your
network connection. (193)
102
General Use
H323 gatekeeper warnings
Could not register to the gatekeeper.
The gatekeeper rejected to register the system. Another system is already registered with
the same alias or H.323 ID.
The max capacity on the gatekeeper is reached. Registration failed.
Tried to register to the gatekeeper without a valid alias. Registration failed.
The system is not allowed to register with this gatekeeper.
Can not find the gatekeeper. Check the gatekeeper configurations on the system.
103
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.13.2 Text Chat
While in an ISDN or IP call to another system supporting Text Chat (T.140), select Text Chat from
the Control Panel. Enter text in the displayed window.
How to use Text Chat:
1. Choose Text Chat from the Control Panel to open the Text Chat window.
2. Enter text with the number keys like on a mobile phone. The text is sent to the far end
continuously letter by letter.
3. Press OK to end Text Chat and escape from the text chat window.
Note that Text Chat is supported in point to point calls only.
104
General Use
3.13.3 Audio Demo
Note that the Audio demo will only appear in the User Guide if a Digital Natural Audio Module
is connected to the codec.
105
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.13.4 Administrator Settings
Administrator Settings contains the configuration of the whole system. It is recommended to
password protect Administrator Settings to prevent occasional users to make changes to the
system. See Administrator Settings for further details.
106
General Use
3.13.5 Restart
Restart the system by pressing the Restart button. You are prompted with a dialog box saying:
Do you want to restart the system? Press OK to restart, press Cancel (X) to abort.
107
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.13.6 User Guide
The on screen user guide takes you through a quick step-by-step introduction to
videoconferencing. It gives the user basic skills in how to use the system.
108
4 Administrator Settings
Administrator Settings contain all the settings of the system. Making changes to Administrator
Settings will change the behavior of the system. It is recommended to password protect the
access to Administrator Settings to prevent occasional users from making crucial changes to the
system, see Administrator Password.
Administrator Settings contain:
General
Menu Settings
Presentation Settings
Call Quality
Audio
Video
Security
Network
Restore Default Settings
1
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.1 General Settings
When installing the system, go through the General Settings menu to ensure that you have the
right settings for your system, see System Configuration.
General Settings contain:
Language
System Name
Dual Monitor
Autoanswer
Max Call Length
Phone Book Settings
Permissions
Screen Settings
Software Options
110
Administrator Settings
4.1.1 Language
The system supports 15 different languages for its on-screen menus; English, German, French,
Norwegian, Swedish, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional,
Japanese, Russian, Korean, Finnish and Thai. Select the preferred language and press OK to
save.
111
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.1.2 System Name
System Name identifies the system:
On the welcome page.
During an MCU conference call.
When using the Web-interface.
When the codec is acting as an SNMP Agent.
Towards a DHCP server.
H323 ID. Other systems can call in using this name instead of IP-number/IP-address.
System Name is blank by default. System name can be alphanumeric and up to 50 characters
long. Follow the installation procedure to enter a System Name.
112
Administrator Settings
4.1.3 Dual Monitor
TANDBERG systems can be used with both one and two monitors. If you use two monitors, make
sure that Dual Monitor is set to "On".
On Selfview, snapshots and Dual Stream will be displayed on the second monitor.
Off The second monitor shows selfview only.
113
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.1.4 Auto Answer
The auto answer setting decides whether an incoming call is put through automatically or
manually.
On The system will automatically answer all incoming calls.
On+Mic The system will automatically answer all incoming calls and switch the
Off microphone off when the call is connected. Press Mic Off to switch the
microphone on.
Off You must manually answer all incoming calls by pressing OK or the Call key.
114
Administrator Settings
4.1.5 Max Call Length
This feature will automatically end both incoming and outgoing calls when the call time exceeds
the specified Max Call Length. Max Call Length can have the following values: 0-999 (minutes),
where 0 means off.
115
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.1.6 Phone Book Settings
Phone Book
On Phone Book is available in the menu.
Off Phone Book is hidden from the menu and is unavailable for users.
IP address
Enter the IP address of the management system that provides the Phone Book.
Path
The Path indicates the function of the management system.
116
Administrator Settings
4.1.7 Permissions
Permissions contains settings for incoming MCU Calls, incoming telephone Calls, Far End
Control, Remote Software Upgrade and Fallback to Telephony.
Access Code
An access code will help you control the use of the system. All users must enter a code to identify
themselves and the call will be charged on their account. Access Codes are handy for group
systems where there are more users or divisions that share the costs of using the system. Access
Code can be set to "On" and "Off". Please refer to section Appendix 5 for more information on
Access codes.
On When making a call, an Access Code dialog box will be shown. The user must enter
the correct password in order to put the call through.
Off No password is necessary to make a call.
Incoming MCU Calls
On When you are in a call, the system will provide visual and audible indications of an
incoming call and ask you to accept/reject the call.
Off The system will not accept incoming calls when you are in a call.
Incoming Telephone Calls
On The system will accept incoming telephone calls.
Off The system will not accept incoming telephone calls. This is useful to prevent
incoming calls from systems other than videoconferencing systems.
Far End Camera Control
On The far end will be able to:
• Control your camera
• Select your video sources
• Activate your camera presets
• Request snapshots
Off The far end can access none of the four features above on the local system. You will
however still be able to control the camera on the far end.
117
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Remote Software Upgrade
It is possible to upgrade software remotely, i.e. a far end system may upgrade software on a local
system via http on ISDN. The system to be upgraded must be configured to allow remote
software upgrade. It is possible to set a password which is needed for the far end system to be
able to accomplish the software upgrade.
On The system will allow a remote system to upgrade local software.
Off The system will not allow a remote system to upgrade local software.
Note that the configuration can also be done via the telnet or the serial port.
Fallback to Telephony
When dialing a number and the system fails to place a video call to the number dialed, the
system will attempt to place a telephone call if Fallback to Telephony is enabled.
On Enables fallback from video calls to telephone calls.
Off Disables fallback.
118
Administrator Settings
4.1.8 Screen Settings
Auto Layout
On If Auto Layout is On the system will change layouts automatically depending on the
number of participants in a call and if you have a dual video stream or not. Please
refer to Layout for more information.
Off If Auto Layout is Off there will be no automatic layout changes during a call. All
desired layout changes must be done manually.
Note that when you receive low resolution images (176x144 pixels or less) the screen will
automatically adjust to a smaller view to give optimum quality experience.
Picture Layout
The Advanced Picture Layout is related to the Layout button on the remote control and it can be
used at any time to change the screen layout. For wide screen systems POP mode is
recommended. You will get optimized picture layouts for wide screen by pressing the Layout
button on the remote.
Picture in Pressing the Layout button on the remote will result in an extra picture in
Picture (PIP) smaller view (Picture in Picture). Press the Layout button to move it around
in the corners of the screen and finally hide it. Pressing and holding Layout
for 1 second will hide the small picture directly from any position.
Picture Press the Layout button to see the images side-by-side, e.g. 1+1 layout,
outside where the far end and near end are displayed as images of equal size, see
Picture figure below.
(POP)
Press the Layout button once more to change to 1+2 layout. The far end
image will be displayed as the main video, with the near end, usually the
user of the system, as a smaller image in the upper right corner. If Duo
Stream is used, the Dual Stream image is displayed as the main image and
the far end and near end as smaller images to the right, see figure below for
an example.
Press the Layout button again to get the 1+3 layout.
The next time the Layout button is pressed, the normal full screen view of
the far end is displayed. Pressing and holding Layout for 1 second will
always bring you back to full screen.
119
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Example of Picture in Picture.
Example of 1+1 Side-by-Side view (wide screen).
Example of 1+2 Picture outside Picture (wide screen).
Example of 1+3 Picture outside Picture (wide screen).
120
Administrator Settings
Note that if both TV monitor format and VGA format is set to Normal, the system will
skip the 1+3 layout, which is not beneficial for 4:3 monitors.
Note that the following menu settings do not apply for all TANDBERG MXP systems. Please
refer to the actual menu page on your system.
TV Monitor Format (wide screen monitors only)
To fully leverage your wide screen display, activate the Native 16:9 format by setting the TV
Monitor Format to Wide. Note that you should only change this setting if your TV monitor is a
wide screen (16:9) monitor or projector. All composite- and s-video output formats will then be
optimized for Wide Screen TV monitors.
Normal Output format is optimized for Normal TV monitors (4:3)
Wide Output format is optimized for Wide TV monitors (16:9)
VGA Monitor Format
To fully leverage your wide screen display, activate the Native 16:9 format by setting the VGA
Monitor Format to Wide. Note that you should only change this setting if your VGA monitor is a
wide screen (16:9) monitor or projector. The VGA and DVI output will then be optimized for Wide
Screen VGA and High Definition (HD) display.
Normal Output format is optimized for Normal VGA monitors (4:3)
Wide Output format is optimized for Wide VGA monitors (16:9)
Wide screen VGA or TV monitor in Normal (stretched) mode.
121
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Wide screen VGA or TV monitor In Wide (native) mode.
VGA Out Quality*
The supported range of VGA formats will be optimized for the VGA display monitor based on the
source image.
VGA Out Quality enables the user to change the preferred format for the DVI/VGA output. It is
recommended to keep this setting in Auto unless your screen doesn’t support some of the XGA
or SVGA formats the system is using. Note that the VGA Out port support VESA Power
Management.
Auto VGA output format will be optimized dependant of the video source format,
refresh and of the EDID information available.
Supported formats are:
SVGA (800x600) 75Hz
XGA (1024x768) 60Hz / 75Hz
WXGA (1280x768) 60Hz
SVGA 800x600 VGA output format is forced to SVGA format (800x600) 75Hz
75Hz
XGA 1024x768 VGA output format is forced to XGA format (1024x768) 60Hz
60Hz
VGA Out Quality for Wide XGA:
If VGA Monitor Format is set to Wide, PC Picture Format is set to Normal, VGA Out
Quality is set to Auto, the layout on the monitor is either fullscreen or POP, and the
input source to the largest window is PC with resolution 1024x768, the system will use
WideXGA (1280x768) instead of XGA, when the monitor supports this.
PC Picture Format (wide screen monitors only)
PC Picture Format setting only takes effect when TV or VGA Monitor Format is set to Wide. Use
this setting to determine if you want your PC presentations to be shown stretched in full screen,
or with correct aspect ratio using part of the widescreen display. With the VGA Out Quality set to
Auto the presentation will be of the best possible quality supported by the monitor.
122
Administrator Settings
Normal VGA output will have 4:3 aspect ratio on wide screen monitor.
Wide VGA output will utilize the wide screen monitor at full.
PC presentation shown in Normal (correct ratio) mode.
PC Presentation shown in Wide (stretched) mode.
123
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.1.9 Software Options
The system requires a valid option key to activate MultiSite and/or Presenter functionality. In
order to activate additional bandwidth, you need to enter a bandwidth key. A restart of the system
is required after entering a new option and/or bandwidth keys. If the key is invalid, the original key
will be used.
The following options are available:
1. No option
2. Presenter
3. MultiSite + Presenter
4. Bandwidth options
124
Administrator Settings
4.2 Menu Settings
Menu Settings contain the settings:
Menu Timeout In Call
Welcome Menu
Welcome Picture
Logo
Menu on TV
Menu on PC
Balloon Help
Display Welcome Text
Welcome Text
Administrator Password
125
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.2.1 Menu Timeout In Call
Main menu appears on the bottom line of the screen. Set Menu Timeout In Call to On if you want
the menu to time out automatically when you are in a call.
On The menu will time out automatically after 15 seconds if there is no activity on the
remote control. Menu timeout does only apply when you are in a call. Outside a call,
the menu will not time out.
Off The menu will not time out automatically. Press Cancel (X) to hide the main menu
manually.
126
Administrator Settings
4.2.2 Welcome Menu
The Welcome Menu contains the Main Menu, System Status, your System Name and dial in
numbers.
On The Welcome Menu is shown when the system wakes up from standby mode.
Off The Welcome Menu is not shown when the system wakes up from standby mode.
Press the OK button to open the welcome menu.
127
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.2.3 Welcome Picture
The Welcome Picture is what you see in the background of the welcome menu.
Selfview Selfview is shown in the background of the welcome menu. In most cases this
means that main camera is displayed and you can see the video image of
yourself.
Off No picture is shown in the background of the welcome menu.
128
Administrator Settings
4.2.4 Logo
It is possible to upload a company logo to the system. For more information about how to upload
a Logo, see Appendix 6. Set the Logo settings to On to display the logo.
On Choose On if you want the company logo to appear in the background of the
welcome menu.
Off The logo is not displayed.
Note: The TANDBERG Logo will be displayed if no other company logo is load and logo is
enabled.
129
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.2.5 Menu on TV
The Menu on TV setting decides if the menu shall be displayed on the TV screen or not. For
optimal layout of the menu, Menu on TV should be Off if Menu on PC is On and vice versa.
On The menu is available on the TV screen.
Off The menu is not available on the TV screen.
130
Administrator Settings
4.2.6 Menu on PC
The Menu on PC setting decides if the menu shall be displayed on the PC (VGA screen) screen
or not. For optimal layout of the menu, Menu on TV should be Off if Menu on PC is On and vice
versa.
On The menu is available on the PC screen.
Off The menu is not available on the PC screen.
131
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.2.7 Balloon Help
It is possible to enable / disable the balloon help window.
On Choose On if you want help text windows to appear.
Off There will be no help text window.
132
Administrator Settings
4.2.8 Display Welcome Text
The welcome text displays your system name and dial in numbers by default. It is possible to hide
this information by choosing Display Welcome Text Off.
On Welcome text is displayed on the welcome menu.
Off Welcome text is not displayed on the welcome menu.
133
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.2.9 Welcome Text
You can change the welcome text to any text you like, instead of the default text. Remember that
Display Welcome Text must be On to be able to edit the welcome text.
134
Administrator Settings
4.2.10 Administrator Password
It is recommended to put an Administrator Password on the system. The Administrator Password
can be maximum 5 digits long. The Administrator Password dialog box will pop up when you
choose Administrator Settings from the Control Panel. This will prevent occasional users from
going in to administrator settings. With an administrator password, you can ensure that your
system will behave in the same way every time and that only dedicated people are allowed to
make changes to the system.
135
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.3 Presentation Settings
Presentation Settings contain:
Presentation Start
H.239
Startup Video Source
Presentation Source
Snapshot Source
Auto-Display Snapshot
PIP Appearance
PIP Placing
VNC Settings
136
Administrator Settings
4.3.1 Presentation Start
If your system has Dual Stream capabilities, you can show two video streams at the same time
(see also Dual Stream). Presentation Start is Auto by default. This means that you will start Dual
Stream (a second video stream) automatically when starting a presentation. Dual Stream requires
the Presenter Option and H.263 video. To check which options are installed, see the System
Information menu in Control Panel.
Manual means that you manually choose if you want to start Duo Video or not every time you
start a presentation.
Auto Dual Stream starts automatically when you start a presentation (in other words,
when you choose a second video source). If your system or the far end system is
not capable of Duo Video/H.239, you will not use Dual Stream, but rather send the
presentation source as your Main Video
Manual When starting a presentation, select Presentation in the call menu and select Start
Presentation. Choose a video source from the list displayed on the screen.
137
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.3.2 H.239
H.239 supports transmission of two video streams. It combines elements of Duo Video and
People+Content. If H.239 is disabled you will still be able to start TANDBERG Dual Video
Stream*
Enabled Enables H.239
Disabled Disables H.239
* The TANDBERG 550 MXP can only receive Dual Video Stream.
138
Administrator Settings
4.3.3 Startup Video Source
The Startup Video Source is the video source on display when the system wakes up from
standby mode. If you use Main Camera as start up source, the system will start with Main
Camera every time the system wakes up from standby, regardless of what the previous user was
using.
You can change Startup Video Source to Main Camera, PC, Document Camera, VCR, AUX,
VNC or Current depending on what video sources you have available for your system. Choosing
Current will result in the last used video source before the system went to standby.
139
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.3.4 Presentation Source
The Presentation Source is connected to the Presentation button on the remote. Pressing the
Presentation button will put the Presentation Source on display. Presentation Source is PC by
default*. You can change the Presentation Source to any video source and none. Choosing none
results in opening the Presentation menu when pressing the Presentation key.
* Only for systems with the PC video input available.
140
Administrator Settings
4.3.5 Snapshot Source
When you take a Snapshot, you get a snapshot of the Snapshot Source. Current is the default
Snapshot Source. This means that you take a snapshot of the video source that is currently
active.
You can change the Snapshot Source to any video source. In this way you can program the
snapshot key to apply only for PC for instance. Press Snapshot and you will take a PC snapshot
regardless of what video source that is currently active.
141
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.3.6 Auto-Display Snapshot
Select Auto to automatically display a received snapshot. Turn Auto-Display Snapshot Manual if
you wish not to have them displayed on the screen when they are sent or received. The
snapshots will be sent and received, but not displayed. With Auto-Display Snapshot set for
Manual, you must enter the Presentation menu to display a snapshot.
Auto A sent or received snapshot will automatically be displayed on the screen.
Manual A sent or received snapshot will not be displayed on the screen. To see the
snapshot, choose Display Snapshot in the Presentation menu.
142
Administrator Settings
4.3.7 PIP Appearance
A Picture in Picture (PIP) is a smaller picture placed in one of the corners of the screen. The PIP
enables you to see an extra picture in your video conference.
Auto PIP Auto means that Picture In Picture will appear automatically when it is suitable.
A picture in picture is nice when you use Duo Video and you need an extra window
to see all the pictures. You can of course show or hide the PIP with the Layout
button on the remote anytime.
On PIP On means that a Picture in Picture will always be displayed.
Off PIP Off means that PIP is not displayed automatically.
143
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.3.8 PIP Placing
PIP Placing lets you decide where the PIP shall appear. You can of course move the PIP with the
Layout button on the remote anytime.
Top Right PIP is placed in the Top Right corner.
Bottom PIP is placed in the Bottom Right corner.
Right
Bottom PIP is placed in the Bottom Left corner.
Left
Top Left PIP is placed in the Top Left corner.
144
Administrator Settings
4.3.9 VNC Settings
VNC Settings is necessary when using a VNC presentation. See chapter PC Soft Presenter and
VNC for more information on how to use VNC.
Address The IP-address of the PC with the VNC software installed. To find the IP-
address of the PC, place the mouse pointer on the VNC program icon in the
lower right corner of the Windows taskbar. You can also select Command
Prompt from the Startup-menu\Run and type cmd then enter. This will open a
command window and from here. Type “ipconfig” and press enter.
Display The display number for VNC is 0 and upwards. If you are using WinVNC,
Number double-click on the icon on the taskbar to view WinVNC properties. This
number should correspond with Display Number in this menu.
Password Enter the same password as specified in WinVNC properties. The password
will be shown as asterisk signs (*) the next time you enter the menu.
145
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.4 Call Quality
Call Quality contains the settings:
Video Algorithm
Audio Algorithm
AAC-LD 128kbps
Natural Video
Max Upstream Rate
Video Quality
Default Call Settings
146
Administrator Settings
4.4.1 Video Algorithm
The system will automatically select the best video algorithm based on the video source and the
capabilities of the remote system. Use this menu to disable video algorithms in case you have
interoperability issues calling other systems.
H.264 Bandwidth efficient video compression and decompression.
H.263 Normal video compression and decompression.
H.261 Legacy video compression and decompression. The system will always have H.261
enabled. Therefore it is impossible to uncheck H.261.
147
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.4.2 Audio Algorithm
The system will automatically select the best audio algorithm based on the call rate and the
capabilities of the remote system. Use this menu to disable audio algorithms in case you want to
remove “low quality” audio, or if you have interoperability issues calling other systems.
G.722 High quality audio (7 kHz at 48kbps, 56kbps or 64kbps)
G.728 Compressed normal quality audio (telephone quality, 3.1 kHz at 16kbps)
G.711 Normal quality audio (telephone quality 3.1kHz at 64kbps). This audio algorithm is
mandatory for video conferencing equipment and is impossible to uncheck.
G.722.1 Compressed high quality audio (7 kHz at 24kbps, 32kbps and 48kbps).
AAC- CD-quality audio, MPEG-4 Advanced Audio Coding Low Delay (20 kHz, stereo at
LD 128kbps, mono at 64kbps).
Call Rate vs Audio algorithms selected
Modify/remove algorithms used by unchecking the different audio algorithms.
Automatically preferred audio algorithms on call rates up to and including 192kbps
1. G.722.1 (24kbps or 32kbps)
2. G.728 (16kbps)
3. AAC-LD (64kbps or 56kbps)
4. G.722 (56kbps, 64kbps or 48kbps)*
5. G.711 (64kbps, 56kbps or 48kbps)**
6. AAC-LD (48kbps or 128kbps)
Automatically preferred audio algorithms on call rates above 192kbps
1. AAC-LD (128kbps)***
2. AAC-LD (64kbps or 56kbps)
3. G.722 (64kbps, 56kbps or 48kbps)*
4. G.722.1 (32kbps or 24kbps)
5. G.728 (16kbps)
6. G.711 (64kbps, 56kbps, 48kbps)**
7. AAC-LD (48kbps or 128kbps)
* G.722 at 64kbps is used in H.323 (IP) calls only.
** G.711 at 64kbps is used in SIP and H.323 (IP) calls only.
*** Dependent on a call rate above the AAC-LD 128 threshold. Note that this is not available on all TANDBERG systems.
148
Administrator Settings
4.4.3 AAC-LD 128kbps (stereo audio)
Specify a call rate for 128kbps AAC-LD. From this call rate and above, "128kbps AAC-LD" is
available. On lower call rates "64kbps AAC-LD" is available.
Stereo audio requires twice the bandwidth as mono CD-quality audio. Therefore we recommend
to enable stereo audio on high call rates only. To enable stereo CD-quality audio you need to
specify a call rate for when stereo automatically should be enabled. On lower call rates, mono
CD-quality audio "64kbps AAC-LD" will be enabled. Stereo I/O mode needs to be enabled to get
stereo audio, see Stereo Settings for details.
149
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.4.4 Natural Video
Choosing Natural Video will enable 60 fields* per second true interlaced picture for high motion
video. The use of Natural Video requires the H.263+ and H.263++ video protocols. Natural video
will be disabled in H.323 MultiSite calls and in H.320 Continuous Presence MultiSite calls.
Auto Natural Video Auto will enable transmission of Natural Video from 768 kbps and
above. Reception of Natural Video is in this case always enabled.
Off Natural Video Off will disable both transmission and reception of Natural Video.
Custom 384 kbps and above to 1920 kbps and above.
* 50 fields per second on PAL systems.
150
Administrator Settings
4.4.5 Max Upstream Rate (kbps)
The Max Upstream Rate (kbps) defines the desired maximum transmitted call rate. This is to be
able to limit the outgoing bandwidth whilst keeping the maximum incoming bandwidth, especially
useful for home offices with different upstream and downstream rates, typically ADSL.
151
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.4.6 Video Quality
The different video sources need different Video Quality Settings. Main Camera, VCR, AUX and
Split Screen have Motion as default. PC, Document Camera and VNC have Sharpness as
default.
Motion Optimized for smooth motion video (CIF/SIF for low bandwidths, iCIF/iSIF for
high bandwidths).
Sharpness Optimized for sharp video (4CIF/4SIF, SVGA, XGA).
Auto The system chooses the best of Motion or Sharpness depending on picture
layout and bandwidth.
4.4.6.1 Intelligent Video Management (IVM)
It is possible to configure the picture sent from the system depending upon specific requirements
and applications adding an additional level of flexibility and adaptability.
Generally, the IVM will always try to transmit the format closest to the video input format. Each
video input can be configured to either motion or sharpness:
Motion: When there is a need for higher frame rates, typically when a large number of
participants are present or when there is a lot of motion in the picture.
At low bit rate:
CIF will be used from a PAL video input
SIF from NTSC
VGA/SVGA/XGA from PC, Digital Clarity
At high bit rate:
iCIF will be used from a PAL video input, Natural Video
iSIF from NTSC, Natural Video
VGA/SVGA/XGA from PC, Digital Clarity
Sharpness: Improved quality of detailed images and graphics, lower frame rate, ideal for
enhancing quality at lower bandwidths.
4xCIF will be used from a PAL video input, Digital Clarity
4xSIF from NTSC, Digital Clarity
VGA/SVGA/XGA from PC, Digital Clarity
IVM Resolution
The following table shows relationship between Transmission modes selected by the system
when Motion or Sharpness is set in the Call Quality menu. IVM will use this table to optimize the
Video quality, according to the capabilities of the remote system(s):
152
Administrator Settings
Basic Video Video Input Transmission mode selection rules
Quality
MOTION PAL iCIF@50 -> CIF -> QCIF
MOTION NTSC iSIF@60 -> iCIF@60 -> SIF@60 -> CIF ->
QCIF
MOTION VGA CIF -> QCIF
MOTION SVGA CIF -> QCIF
MOTION XGA CIF -> QCIF
SHARPNESS PAL 4xCIF -> VGA -> CIF -> QCIF
SHARPNESS NTSC 4xSIF -> 4xCIF -> VGA -> SIF -> CIF ->
QCIF
SHARPNESS VGA VGA -> 4xCIF -> CIF -> QCIF
SHARPNESS SVGA SVGA -> 4xCIF -> VGA -> CIF -> QCIF
SHARPNESS XGA XGA -> SVGA -> 4xCIF -> VGA -> CIF ->
QCIF
Transmission mode with Motion or Sharpness selections.
4.4.6.2 Native Resolutions
The following live video resolutions are supported on the system:
Native NTSC:
4xSIF (704 x 480 pixels), Digital Clarity
Interlaced SIF (352 x 480 pixels), Natural Video
SIF (352 x 240 pixels)
Native PAL:
4xCIF (704 x 576 pixels), Digital Clarity
Interlaced CIF (352 x 576 pixels), Natural Video
CIF (352 x 288 pixels)
QCIF (176 x 144 pixels)
SQCIF (128 x 96 pixels)
Native PC Resolutions:
XGA (1024 x 768 pixels), Digital Clarity
SVGA (800 x 600 pixels), Digital Clarity
VGA (640 x 480 pixels), Digital Clarity
153
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.4.7 Default Call Settings
Default Call Settings are connected with Call Settings in the call menu. If you leave Call Settings
unchanged when making a call, the system will use the Default Call Settings in the call.
In addition to the Call Settings Call Type, Net, Bandwidth and Restrict (56k), you also find settings
for H.320 Auto bandwidth and H.323 Auto bandwidth in Default Call Settings.
Call Type Call Type can be set to:
Video Call
Telephone Call
If either the Call Type is set to Telephone Call or the Place Telephone Call
icon is selected when making a call, the call will be set up as a telephone call.
In all other cases the call will be set up as a video call.
Some network configurations may cause the setup of a video call to fail. The
call will then be set up as a telephone call instead if Fallback to Telephony is
enabled.
For MultiSite calls, Call Type enables you to specify both telephone calls and
video calls in the same conference.
Network The Network alternatives are:
Auto
ISDN
H.323
SIP
If Auto is selected, the system will select the right network depending on the
entered number:
If an IP-address (e.g. 10.12.34.56 ) is entered, H.323 is selected.
If the first digits in the number match those set in H.323 Prefix, H.323
is selected.
In other cases, ISDN (H.320) is selected.
ISDN indicates:
ISDN-BRI
ISDN-PRI
Leased E1/T1
External Networks
If a gatekeeper is present, it is possible to place IP-calls using “telephone-
style” numbers, e.g. an E.164 alias, according to the numbering plan
implemented in the gatekeeper. The gatekeeper will then translate the dialed
154
Administrator Settings
number into an IP-address, see H.323 Settings for more information about
gatekeepers.
Select ISDN to ensure that the call is set up as an ISDN call.
Select H.323 to ensure that the call is set up as an H.323 call.
Select SIP to ensure that the call is set up as an SIP call.
Bandwidth Bandwidth decides the quality of the video picture.
When set to Auto the system will establish a connection using a proper
bandwidth for the call, typically 384kbps for ISDN calls and 768kbps for IP
calls.
When set to Max the system will set up the call with maximum bandwidth
depending on the selected network.
Overview*
Auto: 384 kbps on ISDN/768 kbps on LAN
Max: 768 kbps on ISDN-BRI
1472/1920 kbps (23/30Ch) on ISDN-PRI (T1/E1)
4Mbps(4096 kbps, IP only)
4096 kbps = 4 Mbps, IP only
3072 kbps = 3 Mbps, IP only
2560 kbps = 2,5 Mbps, IP only
1920 kbps = 2 Mbps, 30B
1472 kbps = 23B
1152 kbps = 18B
768 kbps = 12B
512 kbps = 8B
384 kbps = 6B
320 kbps = 5B
256 kbps = 4B
192 kbps = 3B
128 kbps = 2B, Bonding/H.221
64 kbps = 1B, H.221
H0 = 1xH0, 384 kbps, PRI only
* Note that some software versions and networks do not support all channel selections.
Restrict A restricted call uses 56kbps channels rather then the default unrestricted
(56k) 64kbps channels.
Some older networks (primarily in the USA) do not support 64kbps channels
and require the use of restricted 56kbps calls. By default the system will dial
an unrestricted call and downspeed to 56kbps if necessary.
To force a restricted call, choose Restrict (56k) On.
H.221 or 2x64 (2x56) Calling
155
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Some older or low end video systems do not have the ability to make bonded ISDN calls. In these
cases it is necessary to dial both ISDN numbers separately to call those systems.
These types of calls are often referred to as
H.221 calls
2x64 calls
2x56 calls
- as making 2 x 64 kbps or 2 x 56 kbps calls to the same system.
Place this type of call by:
Set Network to ISDN
Set Bandwidth to 128 kbps
A field for the 2nd number pops up in Call Settings.
Enter the second number in the Call Settings field. For 128 kbps calls that use bonding,
ignore the second number field and just enter one number to be dialed.
Using sub-address / extension address / MCU password
Sub-address is used to address different systems on the same ISDN line and is primarily used in
European Countries. LAN equivalent extension address or TCS-4 is used to address different
systems on a LAN, when dialing via a gateway.
To specify an ISDN sub-address or its LAN equivalent extension address (TCS-4), add a star (*)
after the number and then enter the sub-address/extension address.
Example:
12345678*10 ( <number>*<Sub-address/extension address/MCU password>)
When dialing IP via a gateway, the number behind the star (*) on IP might be interpreted as an
extension address.
When calling to external MCU’s requiring a password (TSC-1), this password can be added after
the star (*). If no password is specified, the user will be asked to enter the password (after
connecting to the MCU).
156
Administrator Settings
4.5 Audio
Audio contains the settings:
Inputs
Outputs
Echo Control
Stereo Settings
Audio Levelling (AGC)
Alert Tones and Volume
157
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.5.1 Inputs
Mic 1- 3 and Audio input 4-6
By default, all inputs are enabled. Just plug in an audio source and it is active. Audio inputs that
are On will automatically be mixed. Unconnected inputs will automatically be muted. Select Off to
prevent audio/noise from connected but unused inputs. The activated audio sources are stored
on camera presets.
Mic 1, 2 and 3 are intended for electret type microphones. The microphone inputs are balanced
with 24V phantom power.
Audio input 4 is intended for connection to an external microphone amplifier or an external fixed
mixer. It is crucial that the external mixer is a fixed mixer. Automatic, smart and other types of
adaptive mixers might cause the echo canceller to malfunction.
Audio input 5 is intended for connection to external playback devices or to telephone add-on
hybrids. As there is no acoustic echo canceller on this input it should not be connected to any
microphones. The audio source connected to this input will be heard from the local speaker as
well.
Audio input 6 is intended for connection to a VCR or DVD player. It can also be connected to
other external playback devices. As there is no acoustic echo canceller on this input it should not
be connected to any microphones. The audio entering this input will be heard from the local
speaker as well. If Auto is selected, the audio from the VCR will only be heard when VCR is
selected as video source.
Mix Mode
Auto The adjustment of each microphone signal is done automatically to obtain the best
possible audio and minimize the background noise.
Fixed Fixed will maintain a constant weighting of all microphones.
VCR Ducking
If VCR Ducking is activated, the VCR audio level will be attenuated if someone talks into the
microphone or at the far end.
The VCR ducking is only valid for audio input 6. If input 5 and 6 is configured to one stereo input
pair, see Stereo Settings, then the VCR ducking will apply to both input 5 and 6.
Level Settings
It is possible to adjust the audio input levels according to which external audio equipment is
connected. The on-screen audio level indicator will make it easier to set the correct input level
158
Administrator Settings
settings. The input level should be adjusted so that the average level reaches the preferred level
marker. The audio inputs are adjustable in steps of 1.5 dB from 0 dB to 22.5 dB.
The default levels for Mic 1,2 and 3 are set for use with an Audio Technica AT871R or AT841R
microphone in an average videoconferencing room. The gain can be adjusted correctly for a wide
range of microphones.
A few examples of microphone levels are:
Audio Technica +3dB (default)
AT871R
Audio Technica +7dB
AT851R
TANDBERG Audio +19.5dB
Science
Audio inputs 4, 5 and 6 are set to a default level which is adhered to by most manufacturers
of audio-visual equipment and is a level at which most audio-visual equipment (CD-players,
VCRs or DVDs) will work.
Please see Interfaces for details on the audio connectors.
159
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.5.2 Outputs
Audio out 1 - 3
Audio out 1 is intended for connection to TANDBERG Digital Natural Audio Module, televisions or
audio amplifiers.
Audio out 2 is intended for connection to audio recording equipment or to a telephone add-on
hybrid. The signal is a mix of audio from both the far end and local end (not from Audio in 5).
Audio out 3 is intended for connection to a VCR or other recording equipment. The signal is a mix
of audio from far end and local end (not from Audio in 6).
Note that audio out 2 or audio out 3 never should be connected to a loudspeaker placed in the
same room as the microphones connected to the system. This will cause “howling” and possible
damage to the speaker system. If an output is Off, no audio will be sent to that output.
Out 1 Mode
If Out 1 Mode is set to Auto, the system will select analog or digital (SPDIF) mode dependent on
the detected Audio Module. If a TANDBERG Digital NAM is detected, SPDIF mode will be
selected, otherwise analog mode will be selected.
Setting the Out 1 Mode to either Analog or SPDIF will override the auto-detected mode.
See Stereo Settings for more information.
Audio Module
Select Audio Module according to the type of Audio Module installed if this is not automatically
detected. The Audio Module setting is only available if the audio module of the system is
unidentified.
Level Settings
Adjust the audio output levels according to the parameters of the external audio equipment
connected. These levels should only be adjusted when installing new audio equipment. The
default settings are correct for the TANDBERG Digital Natural Audio module and for most
consumer electronics devices (televisions, VCRs, etc.). The volume keys on the remote control
adjust the level of output 1 (the speaker output). The volume control has no effect on other
outputs.
Please see Interfaces for details on the audio connectors.
160
Administrator Settings
4.5.3 Echo Control
Mic 1-3 and Audio 4
Each of the 3 microphone inputs and Audio input 4 has a separate acoustic echo canceller. One
echo canceller per input provides more sophisticated control than having one common canceller
for all microphones.
In addition to echo cancellation, the system has built-in noise reduction (NR). NR reduces
constant background noise (e.g. noise from air-conditioning systems, cooling fans etc.). In
addition, a high pass filter (Humfilter) reduces very low frequency noise.
On Echo control is normally set to On to prevent the far end from hearing their own
audio. Once selected, echo cancellation is active at all times. The echo canceller
continuously adjusts itself to the audio characteristics of the room and
compensates for any changes it detects in the audio environment. If the changes in
the audio conditions are very significant the echo canceller may take a second or
two to re-adjust.
Off You can choose to switch off the echo canceller for the available audio sources.
Echo Control should be switched Off if external echo cancellation or playback
equipment is used.
On+NR Activates both Echo Control and Noise Reduction.
Note that it is your echo canceller that improves the audio quality experienced by the other
site. When you hear an echo of your own audio it is most likely the far end’s echo canceller
that is malfunctioning.
Tips for improving the echo canceller performance:
Place all microphones as far as possible from the loudspeakers. Minimum loudspeaker-
microphone distance should be 2 meters (6.5 ft).
It is recommended to place the microphones between 1 and 2 meters away from the
persons speaking. By using several microphones, the ratio distance loudspeaker-to-
mic/mic-to-speaker can be increased. Increasing this ratio improves the echo canceller
performance.
Place the microphones as far as possible from noise sources.
Reduce the volume setting. Ensure that the loudspeakers do not distort the audio.
The echo canceller tries to estimate the echo path from the speaker system to the
microphones. Moving objects change this path; therefore try to avoid moving objects. Be
especially aware of large objects and objects placed close to either the microphone or the
speaker system as these objects will cause severe changes to the echo path.
Avoid putting paper sheets etc. on the microphone.
Avoid moving the microphone or loudspeaker.
In the presence of low frequency noise, enable the noise reduction (NR).
161
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.5.4 Stereo Settings
Settings Output response
Out 1 Stereo I/O Stereo Audio out 1 Audio out 2 Audio out
Mode* Mode Speakers 3
Analog Off Off Loudspeaker AUX VCR
mono
Analog Off On Loudspeaker Loudspeaker VCR
left right
Analog On Off Loudspeaker VCR-left VCR-right
mono
Analog On On Loudspeaker Loudspeaker VCR
left right
SPDIF Off Off Loudspeaker AUX VCR
mono
SPDIF Off On Loudspeaker AUX VCR
L+R**
SPDIF On Off Loudspeaker VCR-left VCR-right
mono
SPDIF On On Loudspeaker VCR-left VCR-right
L+R**
*Out 1 Mode: Auto/Analog/SPDIF is described in Outputs.
**L+R = Left + Right
When Stereo I/O Mode is Off and Stereo Speakers is Off, the output response will be a mono
loudspeaker signal on Audio out 1, AUX on Audio out 2 and VCR on Audio out 3 regardless on
the Out 1 Mode setting.
In analog mode the Stereo Speaker On will provide a stereo loudspeaker signal on Audio out 1
and 2.
If Stereo I/O Mode is On, audio input 5 and 6 and audio output 2 and 3 will behave as a stereo
input/output pair, VCR-left and right. The VCR Ducking and AGC setting for audio input 6 will in
this case apply to both audio input 5 and 6. The Audio out 2 (VCR-left stereo channel) will be a
mix of the microphones and the far end left channel. Audio out 3 (VCR-right stereo channel) will
be a mix of the microphones and the far end right channel. (Note that stereo speakers set to on in
analog mode will provide a different scheme, see table above for details).
If Stereo I/O Mode is Off, Audio out 2 will be a mix of audio input 6, microphones and the far end
(the received far end signal is either mono, or stereo that is summed left+right into mono in near
end codec). Audio out 3 will be a mix of audio input 5, microphones and the far end. (Note that
stereo speakers set to on in analog mode will provide a different scheme, see table above for
details).
Note that in SPDIF mode, you are able to receive stereo through Audio out 1 independent of the
Stereo I/O mode setting.
162
Administrator Settings
Note that if Stereo Speakers are enabled in the menu without having any stereo speakers
connected to the Digital NAM, it may cause the acoustic echo-canceller to malfunction.
If the system is connected to a Digital NAM, stereo sound on the loudspeakers shall be
present if a stereo input signal is connected to the inputs VCR-Left and VCR-Right or a stereo
signal is received from the Far End.
If the system is not connected to a Digital NAM, stereo sound on the loudspeaker outputs
will be present in the following situations:
If system is idle and a stereo input signal is connected to the inputs VCR-Left and
VCR-Right.
If system is in a call with mic off and a stereo input signal is connected to the inputs
VCR-Left and VCR-Right, or a stereo signal is received from the Far End.
Otherwise the Loudspeaker Left signal will be equal to Loudspeaker Right.
163
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.5.5 Audio Levelling (AGC)
On Select On to allow automatic adjustments (Automatic Gain Control) of audio levels.
When On, the AGC maintains the audio signal level at a fixed value by attenuating
strong signals and amplifying weak signals. Very weak signals, i.e. noise alone, will
not be amplified.
Off Audio levelling is not activated.
Note that to ensure correct behaviour of the AGC, it is crucial that the levels on the input
connectors are adjusted correctly using the audio input level settings. The AGC will not
compensate for severe maladjustment of input levels.
When applying a weak signal in the presence of strong background noise, the AGC might amplify
the background noise as well as the signal. Therefore, in noisy environments, it is advisable to
turn the AGC off.
Example:
In most conferences, the participants will speak at different levels, and be at different
distances from the microphones. As a result, some of the participants would be harder to hear
than others. The AGC corrects this problem by automatically increasing the microphone levels
when “quiet” or “distant” people speak, and by decreasing the microphone levels when
“louder” people speak.
164
Administrator Settings
4.5.6 Alert Tones and Volume
Video Call Alert Tone and Telephone Alert Tone
To help distinguish between incoming video calls and ordinary telephone calls, it is recommended
to use different ringing tones for video calls and telephone calls.
Alert Volume
You may change the volume level for the selected ringing tone.
Alert Speaker
The system also has an internal, call-alerting speaker.
On The internal speaker will warn you of an incoming call even though the monitor may
not be switched on.
Off The internal speaker is switched off.
Key Tones
On There will be a sound indicator when pressing keys on the remote control.
Off There will be no sound when pressing keys on the remote control.
165
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.6 Video
Video contains the settings:
Camera Tracking Mode
MCU Status Line
Floor to Full Screen
Web Snapshots
MultiSite Picture Mode
Video Name
166
Administrator Settings
4.6.1 Camera Tracking Mode
Slow The system waits a while before zooming in on a single person speaking.
Suitable when wide-angle images are preferred over close-up images.
Normal Should be used in regular meetings.
Fast The system quickly zooms in on a single person speaking. Suitable when close-
ups are preferred over wide-angle images.
Note that the Camera Tracking Mode entry will not be available if not using the TANDBERG
WAVE II Camera.
167
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.6.2 MCU Status Line
On The MultiSite / MCU / DuoVideo indicators will be displayed and provide information
about the conference.
Off The MultiSite / MCU / DuoVideo indicators will not be displayed.
Auto The MultiSite / MCU / DuoVideo indicators will be displayed for a few seconds and
then timed out. When grabbing the remote control, the indicators will be shown
again.
168
Administrator Settings
4.6.3 Floor to Full Screen
When "Floor to Full Screen" is enabled, someone who requests floor will be seen by all
participants as full screen. When "Floor to Full Screen" is "Off", someone who request floor in a
MultiSite conference using the 5+1 layout will be seen in the large square, rather than full screen.
On The participant that has floor is displayed in full screen regardless of what MultiSite
layout that is used.
Off The participant that has floor is displayed in the MultiSite layout that is used.
169
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.6.4 Web Snapshots
The system is able to generate JPEG snapshots and provide them to the world outside by
request (as ‘http get’ or via ftp). See Appendix 6 for descriptions of the possible snapshot files.
On Snapshots generation is enabled.
Off Snapshots generation is disabled.
Note that web snapshots are not generated if the conference is encrypted.
170
Administrator Settings
4.6.5 MultiSite Picture Mode
MultiSite* Picture Mode decides the default layout of a MultiSite call. Choose between the
layouts: Auto Split, 4 Split, 5+1 Split, and Voice Switched. You can change the layout during a
call using the layout option in MultiSite Services.
Auto Split Auto Split displays all participants on the screen simultaneously. A MultiSite
call with 3 or 4 video participants is displayed with 4 Split. A MultiSite call with
5 or 6 video participants is displayed with 5+1 Split.
Voice Voice Switched mode displays the participant that is speaking in full screen.
Switched
4 Split 4 Split displays the 4 last speaking Participants.
5+1 Split 5+1 Split displays the speaking participant in a big picture and the other
participants in small pictures.
Continuous Presence layout 4 split
Advanced Continuous Presence Layout (5+1) - In this mode the Intelligent Call Management will use 4*CIF resolution for
better clarity and H.263 video compression
171
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Voice Switched mode
172
Administrator Settings
4.6.6 Video Name
As a default, the video inputs are given the names Main Cam, PC, Doc Cam, VCR, AUX or VNC,
dependent on what video sources are available on your system. The video names cannot exceed
eight characters. The names correspond to the video names in the Presentation Menu (Choose
Presentation from the main menu and open the Main Video or Presentation Video pop up menu).
If video names are changed, you will see the changed name appear in the Main Video and
Presentation Video menus.
173
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.7 Security
Security contains the settings:
Encryption
Encryption Mode
Passwords
174
Administrator Settings
4.7.1 Encryption
(Country specific)
Auto The system will try to set up calls using encryption.
Point to point calls: If the far end system supports encryption (AES or DES), the call
will be encrypted. If not, the call will proceed without encryption.
MultiSite calls*: In order to have encrypted MultiSite calls, all sites must support
encryption. The padlock symbol will indicate encryption mode (AES or DES). If there
is a mix of AES and DES encryption, only the symbol for DES encryption (single
padlock) will be displayed. The 'closed padlock' will only be displayed on each site
when all links in the MultiSite conference are encrypted.
If the far end supports encryption, the systems will initiate encryption after the call is
connected (an ‘open padlock’ symbol will be displayed). When encryption has been
established, a ‘closed padlock’ symbol will be displayed.
On The system will only send and receive encrypted data. The call will not be
established if not all participants support encryption.
Off The system will not send or receive encrypted data.
Technical encryption information like encryption algorithm and encryption check code can be
found in the Call Status menu.
* Only available on systems with MultiSite option supported and installed.
175
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.7.2 Encryption Mode
Auto The system will try to use the most secure encryption - AES, dependent on the
capabilities of the other sites. For sites that do not support AES encryption, DES
encryption will be tried.
AES The system will try to use AES with 128 bits encryption when setting up calls. If AES
is not supported by the other site(s), no other type of encryption will be initiated.
DES The system will always try to set up the call using DES with 56 bits encryption on
ISDN and IP. If all other sites do not support DES, no other type of encryption will be
initiated.
Both AES and DES Encryption are supported for mixed ISDN/IP calls. In addition AES -and DES
Encrypted sites can be connected at the same time.
176
Administrator Settings
4.7.3 Passwords
Administrator Password, IP Access Password, Streaming Password, VNC Password, Access
Code and Remote Software Upgrade password are duplicated from their respective menus.
Using the Security menu gives you a quick way to change all passwords of the system.
177
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8 Network
The network menu contain:
ISDN/External/Leased E1/T1
LAN Settings
Network Profiles
Data Port
178
Administrator Settings
4.8.1 ISDN/External/Leased E1/T1
Network Before using the system it is necessary to specify which network to use and
Type define its settings.
ISDN- If you want to use your system via ISDN-BRI, you should select Network Type:
BRI ISDN-BRI and enter the ISDN BRI Settings menu to set the BRI parameters.
ISDN- If you want to use your system via ISDN-PRI, you should select Network Type:
PRI* ISDN-PRI and enter the ISDN PRI Settings menu to set the PRI parameters.
Leased If you want to use your system via Leased E1/T1, you should select Network
E1/T1* Type: Leased E1/T1 and enter the Leased E1/T1 Settings (see Leased E1/T1
Settings) menu to set the Leased E1/T1 parameters.
External If you want to use special networks and connect using RS449, V.35, X.21 or
connect to ISDN via an external IMUX, you should select Network Type: External
and enter the External Network Settings (see External Network Settings menu to
set the External Network parameters.
*Note that both Leased E1/T1 and ISDN-PRI uses the same interface on the codec marked
E1/T1.
179
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8.2 ISDN-BRI Settings
To make sure your system will work properly using ISDN-BRI, make the following settings:
1. Set ISDN switch type
2. Enter ISDN line numbers (+ SPIDs if required)
3. Disable unused lines
Some software versions do not support 6 ISDN lines, therefore some of the Line Setup entries
may be grayed out.
4.8.2.1 ISDN BRI switch type
Select the type of ISDN network connected to your unit. Note that 1TR6 should only be used if
you are operating the system behind a PABX.
4.8.2.2 Line setup
This menu allows you to program the numbers associated with your ISDN line. If you want to use
this ISDN line, you need to set Enabled On and enter the numbers of your ISDN line. If some of
the ISDN lines are not to be used, set Enabled Off. Line 1 should always be enabled. National
ISDN and AT&T Custom ISDN might require SPID numbers associated with your ISDN numbers.
If you have received two different SPID (Service Profile IDentifier) numbers for each ISDN line
from your network provider, you must program both.
Example:
Numbers SPIDS
ISDN BRI 1: 67838498 016783849800
67838498 016783849810
ISDN BRI 2: 23478060 012347806000
23478070 012347807000
ISDN BRI 3: 23478420 012347842000
23478430 012347843000
ISDN BRI 4: 23478520 012347852000
23478530 012347853000
ISDN BRI 5: 23478540 012347854000
23478550 012347855000
ISDN BRI 6: 23478560 012347856000
23478570 012347857000
180
Administrator Settings
4.8.2.3 Advanced ISDN Settings
Sub address
Using a sub address enables you to connect up to eight ISDN terminals to the same ISDN
telephone number and line. The terminals are addressed by using different sub addresses. To
call a terminal with a sub address, separate the ISDN telephone number and the sub address
with a ‘*’. Note that this service has limited access on some ISDN networks.
Example: 12345678*2 (up to four digit sub addresses are possible).
Validate Numbers / MSN (Multiple Subscriber Number)
The use of MSN (Multiple Subscriber Number) enables you to attach different ISDN terminals,
with different numbers, to the same physical ISDN telephone line. If Validate Numbers is set to
"On" only calls to those numbers specified in the Line Setup menus will be answered. This
service can be ordered from your telephone company.
Parallel dial
On Channels will be dialed and connected in parallel when setting up a BONDING call.
Off Channels will be dialed one by one, which may increase the dialing time.
Send Own Numbers
On The system will send its own numbers to the far end.
Off The system will not send its own numbers to the far end, but please note that the
network may still send your numbers to the far end.
Sending Complete
On The system will send the ISDN message information element Sending Complete.
The system will not send Sending Complete. Default is “Off”
Off
181
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8.3 ISDN-PRI Settings
To make sure your system will work properly using ISDN-PRI, configure the following
settings:
1. Set PRI switch type
2. Enter PRI line number
Note that the T1 format is predefined to ESF and the line code is B8ZS. This is not configurable.
4.8.3.1 Number Range
Enter the range of numbers for your PRI line. If this number is programmed and MSN: On (see
Validate numbers in Advanced ISDN Settings) only calls to this number will be answered.
4.8.3.2 ISDN PRI Switch Type
Select the type of PRI switch to which your system is connected.
Below is a list of common ISDN-PRI/T1 switches.
Manufacturer PRI Switch Type setting
Type
ATT 4 ESS AT&T AT&T ISDN
AT&T ISDN or National ISDN*
ATT 5 ESS AT&T/Lucent
DMS 100 Northern National ISDN
DMS 250 Telecom National ISDN
Telecom
Northern
* Settings will depend on configuration of the switch. PRI Switch Type is not changed when
Restoring Defaults.
4.8.3.3 Channel Hunting
Max Channels Maximum number of channels the system may use at any given time.
Low The lowest numbered B-channel that may be used by the system when
Channel selecting channels for outgoing calls.
High Channel The highest numbered B-channel that may be used by the system when
selecting channels for outgoing calls.
Search Specifies where the system will start searching for available B-channels
for outgoing calls.
182
Administrator Settings
Example:
Max Channels may be used for PRIs that are provisioned for a lower number of channels.
High Channel, Low Channel and Search may be used for PRIs provisioned with specific
requirements for B-channel usage.
In the example above, the system will start searching for available B-channels at channel 20,
since Search is set to High and High Channel is set to 20. The system will not search for
channels below 10, since Low Channel is set to 10. Furthermore if the user tries to make an 8
channel call, the call will be established with 6 channels, since Max Channels is set to 6.
4.8.3.4 Line Settings
T1 Cable T1 Cable Length 1 specifies the distance to the CSU connected to the
Length 1 E1/T1 port 1 on codec 1.
E1-CRC-4 is used for most E1-PRI configurations. You can turn it off if not
E1-CRC-4 supported by your E1 network equipment.
For further information see Appendix 8: Connecting the system to PRI/T1.
4.8.3.5 Advanced ISDN-PRI Settings
NSF is a non standard facility. Your network provider may require a service selection in your
ISDN configuration. Enter the Service code here. Valid NSF service codes are from 1 to 31. Enter
0 to disable NSF service codes.
Example:
AT&T offers several digital switched
services. These include SDN with service
code 1 and ACCUNET with service code 6.
Below is a list of common service profiles.
As these profiles may change, contact your
service provider to get the correct profile.
183
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Service profiles Service porfiles for
for AT&T: Sprint:
NSF Service NSF Service
Disable: 0 Reserved: 0
SDN (including Private: 1
GSDN): 1 Inwatts: 2
Megacom 800: 2 Outwatts:3
Megacom: 3 FX: 4
Accunet: 6 TieTrunk: 5
Long Distance: 7
Service profiles for
International 800:
MCI:
8
MultiQuest: 16 NSF Service
Call Redirection VNET/Vision: 1
Service: 23 800: 2
PRISM1, PRISMII,
WATS: 3
900: 4
DAL: 5
184
Administrator Settings
4.8.4 Leased E1/T1 Settings
Call Control
Auto When Auto is selected, the system will automatically initiate a connection as
soon as it detects that the far end tries to make a call. This mode is also
commonly known as "data triggered" mode, because the existence of certain
data patterns on the line triggers a connection.
Manual When manual is selected, the user has to explicitly issue a dial command to
make the system connect to the far end system. Receiving an incoming call is
not possible.
Network Interface
Indicates if the network is of type E1 (30 channels) or T1 (24 channels). E1 will be default for PAL
versions, T1 default for NTSC versions.
Max Channels
Indicates the maximum number of channels the codec is allowed to use on the E1/T1 interface.
When E1 is selected, maximum is 30 channels. When T1 is selected, maximum is 24 channels.
Start Channel
Indicates the first E1/T1 channel the codec is allowed to use. This setting might be used if the
E1/T1 line is shared with other equipment.
T1 Line Coding
Indicates how the signals on the line should be coded. If parts of the line between the systems
use restricted coding, this should be selected.
Note that all settings must be identical on both sides of the Leased E1/T1 connection.
Line Settings
This is the same menu as for ISDN-PRI. Please refer to ISDN-PRI Settings.
185
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8.5 External Network Settings
Before using the system together with external network equipment, you must specify the network
parameters on this page. The system has support for up to 2 Mbps (depending on the Bandwidth
key loaded) using the External Network (RS449/V.35/X.21) interface. Note that the physical
interface on External Networks is one non-standard 26 pin connector. Special cables are
required, see Interfaces for cable pinouts.
Call Control
RS366 RS366 Dialing is the only dialing protocol supported and would normally be
Dialing used together with network clocking RS449/V.35 Compatible when the external
equipment uses RS366 ports.
RS366 RS366 Adtran ISU 512 offers extra usability when dialing RS366 via an
Adtran ADTRAN ISU 512 IMUX. This dialing scheme will map the call type and
ISU 512 bandwidth selection to ADTRAN ISU 512 specific suffixes to the dialed number.
Should only be used when connected to an ADTRAN ISU 512.
The Adtran ISU512 uses the following suffixes <Number>#C#R
#C = Call Type
#2 = audio
#3 = 56kbps
#4 = 64kbps
#R = Channel Rate
#0 = 2xh221 (2x56\64kbps)
#1 to 8 = the Call Rate.
Leased Leased Line is a non-dialing protocol and should be used when two codecs are
Line connected in a point-to-point connection. Use Leased Line when the
handshaking signals DTR and CD are available. DTR and CD correspond to
the X.21 network’s C and I signals.
Manual Manual should be used when no handshake signals are available and the
external equipment requires a constantly connected line.
Network clocking
The network clock setting specifies the number of physical external clock signals.
RS449/V35 Use RS449/V35 Compatible when the external equipment provides two
Compatible clock signals, one for transmit and one for receive. The difference
between RS449 and V35 is only the cable.
X21 Use X21 Compatible when the external equipment provides a common
Compatible clock signal for both transmit and receive.
186
Administrator Settings
4.8.6 H.331 Settings
On Used when broadcasting a videoconference from one site to many others, e.g. via
satellite, where there is no possibility to negotiate quality between the receivers and
the originator due to one-way communication.
Off Standard two-way communication with quality negotiation between both sides.
187
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8.7 LAN Settings
LAN Settings contain:
IP Settings
H.323 Settings
SIP Settings
SNMP Settings
IP Services
Quality of Service
188
Administrator Settings
4.8.7.1 IP Settings
Remember to restart the system after making changes to IP Settings. This can be done by
selecting the “Save and Restart” at the bottom of the IP setting menu. Changes in IP Settings
menu will not have any effect before the system is restarted.
IP-assignment
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) can be selected when a DHCP server is present.
DHCP IP-address, IP-subnet mask and Gateway are not used because the DHCP server
assigns these parameters.
Static The system’s IP-address, IP-subnet mask and Gateway must be specified in the IP-
address field.
IP-address
IP-address defines the network address of the codec. This address is only used in static mode. In
DHCP-mode, the assigned IP-address can be found on the Welcome Menu.
IP-subnet mask
IP-subnet mask defines the type of network. This address is only used in static mode. Your LAN-
administrator will provide the correct value for this field.
Gateway
When using DHCP, the default gateway will be set automatically. If the LAN utilizes static IP
addresses, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway must be specified by the LAN
administrator.
Ethernet Speed
Auto The codec will auto-detect the speed/duplex on the LAN.
10/Half The codec will connect to the LAN using 10Mbps speed/Half Duplex.
10/Full 10 Mbps speed/Full Duplex.
100/Half 100 Mbps speed/Half Duplex.
100/Full 100 Mbps speed/Full Duplex.
IP Access Password
189
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
By setting an IP Access Password on the system, all access to the system using IP (Telnet, FTP
and WEB) requires a password. The default IP Access Password is “TANDBERG”.
DNS Settings
190
Administrator Settings
DNS Settings
DNS Server 1-5
DNS Server defines the network addresses for DNS servers. Up to 5 addresses may be
specified. If the network addresses are unknown, please contact your administrator or Internet
Service Provider.
DNS Domain Name
DNS Domain Name is the default domain name suffix which is added to unqualified names.
Example:
DNS Domain Name is “example.com”, and the name to lookup is “videosystem” will result in a
“videosystem.example.com” DNS lookup.
191
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8.7.2 H.323 Settings
H.323 Settings
E.164 alias
This is the E.164 address of the system. The E.164 address is equivalent to a telephone number,
sometimes combined with access codes. Valid characters are 0-9,* and #. When using a
gatekeeper, the system will send a message to the gatekeeper containing both the E.164 address
and the H.323 ID of the system.
H.323 ID
The H.323 ID of the system may be specified here. The System name is used if no H.323 ID is
entered.
H.323 Call Setup
Direct An IP-address must be used in order to make a H.323 call. The system will
not use a gatekeeper or CallManager
Gatekeeper The system will use a gatekeeper to make a H.323 call.
CallManager The system will use a CallManager to make a H.323 call.
H.323 Prefix
When dialing a number prefixed with digits specified by H.323 Prefix, and with Net: Auto, an
H.323 call will be placed.
Example:
H.323 Prefix is "555". Dialing "55582" with "Net:Auto" will select LAN.
Gatekeeper Settings
CallManager Settings
Advanced H.323 Settings
192
Administrator Settings
Gatekeeper Settings
Gatekeeper Discovery
Auto The system will automatically try to register on any available gatekeeper. If a
gatekeeper responds to the request sent from the codec within 30 seconds this
specific gatekeeper will be used. This requires auto discovery on the gatekeeper
as well. If no gatekeeper responds, the system will not use a gatekeeper for
making H.323 calls and hence an IP-address must be specified manually.
Manual The system will use a specific gatekeeper identified by Gatekeeper IP-address.
Gatekeeper IP Address
This is the gatekeeper IP-address that is used if you specify H.323 Call Setup: Gatekeeper and
Gatekeeper Discovery: Manual.
Note that if your system is part of a TANDBERG Expressway™ firewall traversal solution and
is placed outside the firewall, you should register the IP address of your Border Controller as
the Gatekeeper IP address and set H.323 Call Setup to Gatekeeper.
Authentication Mode
Auto If Authentication Mode is set to Auto and the gatekeeper indicates that it requires
authentication, the endpoint will automatically try to authenticate itself to the
Gatekeeper.
Off If Authentication Mode is set to Off the system will not try to authenticate itself to a
Gatekeeper, but will still try a normal registration.
Authentication ID / Authentication Password
The system sends the Authentication ID and Password to a Gatekeeper for authentication. The
authentication is a one way authentication from the endpoint system to a Gatekeeper, i.e. the
endpoint is authenticated to the Gatekeeper. If the Gatekeeper indicates that no authentication is
required, the endpoint will still try to register.
193
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
CallManager Settings
CallManager IP
This is the CallManager IP-address that is used if you specify H.323 Call Setup: CallManager.
194
Administrator Settings
Advanced H.323 Settings
The Advanced H.323 Settings only have an effect if they are supported by your IP infrastructure.
NAT
NAT, Network Address Translation, is used when a PC and a videoconferencing system are
connected to a router with NAT support. NAT support in the videoconferencing system enables
proper exchange of audio/video data when connected to an external videoconferencing system
(when the IP traffic goes through an NAT router). When NAT is On, the NAT Server Address will
be shown in the startup-menu: "My IP Address: 10.0.2.1".
On The system will signal the configured "NAT Address" in place of its own IP-address
within Q.931 and H.245.
Auto The system will try to determine if the "NAT Address" or the real IP-address should
be used within signalling. This is done to make it possible to place calls to endpoints
on the LAN as well as endpoints on the WAN.
NAT Address
This must be the external/global IP-address to the router with NAT support. Packets sent to the
router will then be routed to the system. In the router, the following ports must be routed to the
system’s IP-address:
Port 1720
Port 5555-
5560
Port 2326-
2365
Please contact your TANDBERG representative for further information.
RSVP
Auto Resource Reservation Protocol enables the systems to request the optimal amount
of bandwidth for the duration of an IP videoconference.
Off Resource Reservation Protocol is switched off.
H.323 Ports
195
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Static When selecting static H.323 ports for TCP connections the ports 5555 to 5565
will be used for Q.931 and H.245 respectively.
Dynamic The system will allocate which ports to use when opening a TCP connection.
The reason for doing this is to avoid using the same ports for subsequent calls
as some firewall consider this as a sign of attack.
196
Administrator Settings
4.8.7.3 SIP Settings
Mode
On Setting the SIP mode to on will enable the system for incoming and outgoing SIP
calls.
Off Setting the SIP mode to off will disable incoming and outgoing SIP calls from the
system.
Display Name
The Display name part of the SIP Address (URI) is usually a full name or system name.
Examples:
“Alice Wonderland”
“System 01”
SIP Address
The SIP Address is the SIP URI used to address the system.
SIP Address (URI): <text field>
Examples:
“alice@example.com”
“1234”
“1234@example.com”
Server Discovery
Auto When Auto is selected, the SIP Server address is obtained using Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
Manual When Manual is selected, the manually configured SIP Server address will be
used.
Server Address
197
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
The Server Address is the manually configured address for the outbound proxy and registrar. It is
possible to use a fully qualified domain name, or an IP address. The default port is 5060 for TCP
and UDP, but another one can be provided.
Server Address: <text field>
Examples:
“sipserver.example.com”
“sipserver.example.com:5060”
“10.0.0.2”
“10.0.0.2:5061”
Authentication
User Name
This is the user name part of the credentials used to authenticate toward the SIP Server.
User name: <text field>
Password
This is the password part of the credentials used to authenticate toward the SIP Server.
Password: <text field>
198
Administrator Settings
4.8.7.4 SNMP Settings
SNMP Settings
SNMP Trap Host identifies the IP-address of the SNMP manager. SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol, SNMP Ver 1) is used for monitoring and configuring of different entities in
a network. The system's SNMP Agent responds to requests from SNMP Managers (a PC
program etc.). SNMP traps are generated by the agent to inform the manager about important
events.
Traps can be sent to multiple SNMP Trap Hosts. Enter the IP address of up to three SNMP
managers. All traps will then be sent to the hosts listed.
SNMP Community names are used to authenticate SNMP requests. SNMP requests must have a
‘password’ in order to receive a response from the SNMP agent in the codec. Note that the
SNMP Community name is case sensitive. The default password is "public".
199
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8.7.5 IP Services
NTP IP
This is the NTP time server address from which the system can get updated time information.
The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used to synchronize the time of the system to a reference
time server. The NTP IP setting holds the IP address to a time source where the system can get
the exact time. The time server will subsequently be queried every 24th hour for time updates.
The system will use the time to timestamp messages transmitted to Gatekeepers or Border
Controllers requiring H.235 authentication.
200
Administrator Settings
4.8.7.6 Quality of Service
QoS Type
Off No QoS is used.
Diffserv Diffserv QoS method is used. Please see below for details.
IP IP Precedence QoS method is used. Please see below for details.
Precedence
IP Precedence Video
Used to define which priority audio, video, data and signaling should have in the network. The
higher the number, the higher the priority. The priority ranges from 0(off) - 7 for each type of
packets.
Auto will provide the following priority:
Audio 4
Video 4
Data 3
Signaling 6
IP Type of Service (TOS) helps a router select a routing path when multiple paths are available.
Delay Tells the router to minimize the delay.
Throughput Tells the router to maximize the throughput.
Reliability Tells the router to maximize the reliability.
Cost Tells the router to minimize the cost.
IP Precedence Telephony
Used to define which priority audio should have in the network for telephone calls. The higher the
number, the higher the priority. The priority ranges from 0(off) - 7 for each type of packets.
201
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Auto will provide the following priority:
Audio 4
Diffserv Video
Used to define which priority Audio, Video, Data and Signaling packets should have in an IP
network. The priority ranges from 0 to 63 for each type of packets.
Diffserv Telephony
Used to define which priority Audio packets should have in an IP network for telephone calls. The
priority ranges from 0 to 63 for each type of packets.
202
Administrator Settings
4.8.8 Network Profiles
This menu consists of 7 network profiles; a prefix can be added for each profile. If you add a
prefix to a profile, this prefix will automatically be added in front of the number being dialed.
Example:
0 is added as a Call Prefix to the 2nd profile, ISDN. If you enter 12345678 in the dial menu
and select ISDN, the number dialed will be 012345678.
Using the three last profiles you can enter the name of a profile, prefix and network selection.
This is useful if you have a fixed prefix for your service provider.
203
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8.9 Data Port
The system provides up to two standard RS232 serial ports to allow a computer to be connected
for data transfer and control purposes. Note that when connecting to a PC the connecting cable
must be a straight through RS232 cable.
Baud Rate, Parity, Databits and Stopbits
If you wish to connect a PC to Data port 1, you must ensure that the PC and the system are
identically configured. The available settings are:
Baud 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Rate None, Odd, Even
Parity 7, 8
Databits 1, 2
Stopbits
The control interface provided by the data port supports a subset of the Hayes command set as
well as a comprehensive set of system specific commands. It maintains communication with the
data port’s command interpreter at all times. All features available from the hand-held remote
control can be accessed through the data port.
Data Port 2
Data port 2 is dedicated to the main camera and will not be available in standard configuration.
The Data Port 2 menu contains the same items as the Data Port 1 menu; Baud rate, Parity,
Databits, Stopbits except for the Mode, which has VISCA and Auto selections.Mode.
The system will automatically detect WAVE cameras. If you are using a camera supporting the
VISCA protocol, select Mode: VISCA.
If Mode is Auto and no camera is connected to the Data port 2, the Baudrate, Parity, Databits and
Stopbits settings will be enabled.
204
Administrator Settings
4.9 Restore Default Settings
Restore Default Settings will restore all administrator settings. Note that this will not affect your
Call Directory information, Network Type, Line Setup numbers or your SPID numbers.
205
5 Peripheral Equipment
Using the optional peripheral devices outlined in this chapter and the many others available, you
will be able to build your own applications for use with the system, thereby better integrating the
system into your business environment. This chapter will explain how to connect peripheral
equipment to your system. First of all however, we recommend you examine Interfaces, with
details on the available connectors on the back of the system Codec.
Peripheral Equipment contains:
Interfaces
Document Camera
VCR / DVD
Additional Cameras
Additional Microphones
TANDBERG DNAM
Stereo Speaker Kit
Telephone Add-On
Dual Monitor
XGA Monitors and Projectors
VESA Display Power Management
Digital Monitor Power Management
Extended Display Identification
1
Peripheral Equipment
5.1 Interfaces
5.1.1 Video
5 Video Inputs:
2 video inputs supporting S-Video through Mini-DIN connectors.
2 video inputs supporting composite signals through RCA connectors.
1 VGA/DVI-I (DVI = Digital Video Interface, I = Integrated Digital & Analog) input
supporting resolutions SVGA (800x600), XGA (1024x768) and SXGA (1280x1024),
analog or digital.
(use VNC as a 6th video input).
The standard camera uses one of the S-Video inputs.
Levels:
Composite: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm
S-Video (Y/C):
Y: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm
C (PAL): 0.3 Vpp, 75 ohm
C (NTSC): 0.28 Vpp, 75 ohm
The system will automatically adapt to a PAL or NTSC input.
VGA formats supported on 'DVI-I in':
SVGA (800x600) 60Hz, 72Hz, 75Hz, 85Hz
XGA (1024x768) 60 Hz, 70Hz, 75Hz
SXGA (1280x1024) 60Hz
HD720p (1280x720) 50,60 Hz
6 Video Outputs:
2 S-Video outputs, Mini-DIN connectors.
2 composite video outputs, RCA connectors.
2 VGA/DVI-I (DVI = Digital Video Interface, I = Integrated Digital & Analog) output
supporting resolutions SVGA (800x600) and XGA (1024x768) analog or digital.
The first Mini-DIN connector and the first RCA connector provide main video (incoming/outgoing
video and menus). The two other connectors provide selfview/snapshot/Duo Video. The S-Video
outputs are used by default by the monitors. The outputs are always active. The format of the
output will be either PAL or NTSC depending on your country’s standard video format.
207
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Levels:
Composite: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm
S-Video (Y/C):
Y: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm
C (PAL): 0.3 Vpp, 75 ohm
C (NTSC): 0.28 Vpp, 75 ohm
VGA formats supported on 'DVI-I out':
SVGA (800x600) 75Hz
XGA (1024x768) 60Hz
WXGA (1280x768) 60Hz
HD720p (1280x720) 50,60 Hz
DVI and specifications:
DVI stands for Digital Video Interface, and is a form of video interface technology made to
maximize the quality of flat panel LCD monitors and high-end video graphics cards.
The TANDBERG codec contains a DVI-I plug that can transmit either digital DVI signals or
standard analog VGA signals, depending on what type of monitor is connected.
DVI Specifications
TANDBERG DVI-I follows the VESA Monitor Timing Standard v1.08, also knows as Display
Monitor Timing (DMT).
Analog Horizontal Vertical Pixel
Frequency frequency Clock
800x600 @ 46.875kHz 75.00Hz 49.50MHz
75Hz
1024x768 48.363kHz 60.004Hz 65.00MHz
@ 60Hz
Digital
800x600 @ 46.875kHz 75.00Hz 49.50MHz
75Hz
1024x768 48.363kHz 60.004Hz 65.00MHz
@ 60Hz
DVI-I Video resolution supported in F1 and above
The resolution used when showing a PAL image like the WAVE II is:
800x600 @ 75Hz.
The resolution used when showing a NTSC image like the WAVE II is:
1024x768 @ 60Hz.
Supported DVI cables:
TANDBERG supports DVI-D Single-Link, DVI-A and DVI-I Single-Link format cables.
208
Peripheral Equipment
DVI-D cables transmit digital T.M.D.S. signals, DVI-A cables transmit analog VGA signals and
DVI-I cables can transmit either digital or analog signals.
It is possible to extend existing DVI cables by the use of extension cables. The maximum cable
length however, is 5 meters. Going beyond that may result in quality loss.
DVI-I - Combined Analog and Digital Connector Pin Assignments:
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
Assignment Assignment Assignment
1 T.M.D.S. 9 T.M.D.S. 17 T.M.D.S. Data0-
Data2- Data1-
2 T.M.D.S. 10 T.M.D.S. 18 T.M.D.S. Data0+
Data2+ Data1+
3 T.M.D.S. 11 T.M.D.S. 19 T.M.D.S.
Data2/4 Shield Data1/3 Shield Data0/5 Shield
4 T.M.D.S. 12 T.M.D.S. 20 T.M.D.S. Data5-
Data4- Data3-
5 T.M.D.S. 13 T.M.D.S. 21 T.M.D.S. Data5+
Data4+ Data3+
6 DDC Clock 14 +5V Power 22 T.M.D.S. Clock
Shield
7 DDC Data 15 Ground (return 23 T.M.D.S. Clock+
for +5V, HSync
and VSync)
8 Analog Vertical 16 Hot Plug Detect 24 T.M.D.S. Clock-
Sync
C1 Analog Red C2 Analog Green C3 Analog Blue
C4 Analog C5 Analog Ground
Horizontal (analog, R, G &
Sync B return)
5.1.2 Audio
6 Audio Inputs:
3 microphone inputs (balanced, 24V phantom powered) via XLR connectors.
3 audio inputs (line level) via RCA connectors.
All audio inputs are active by default. For further information, refer to chapter Audio.
Audio input connector specification:
Connector label Microphone(s) Audio input(s)
Signal type Balanced Unbalanced
Connector (codec) XLR-F, pin 1-gnd, Female RCA/phono,
pin 2 hot, pin 3- sleeve-ground,
cold/neutral centre-signal
Input impedance 2400 ohms (pin 2 - 10K ohms
3)
Max input level when 83 mVpp 15.5 Vpp
209
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
set to maximum
input level
Max input level when 6.2 mVpp 1.17 Vpp
set to minimum input
level
Range, menu 22.5 dB (16 steps of 22.5 dB (16 steps of
adjustable input gain 1.5 dB) 1.5 dB)
Phantom power 24 V +/- 5% -
voltage
Phantom power 1200 ohms -
resistor, pin 2
Phantom power 1200 ohms -
resistor, pin 3
Max phantom power 12 mA -
current pr mic
3 Audio Outputs:
1 output (line level) via RCA connector providing audio from far end, in addition to dial
tones. This output also supports S/PDIF. S/PDIF (Sony/Philips Digital Interface) is used
by the Digital Natural Audio module.
1 AUX output (line level) via RCA connector providing a mixed signal between audio from
the local side (except from the AUX input) and audio from the far end. This output is
intended for connection to a telephone add-on system. When system is configured as
stereo, this output will provide the left stereo information.
1 VCR output (line level) via RCA connector providing a mixed signal between audio from
the local side (except from the VCR input) and audio from the far end. This output is
intended for connection to a VCR. When system is configured as stereo, this output will
provide the right stereo information.
Audio output connector specification:
Connector label Audio outputs
Signal type Unbalanced
Connector (codec) Female RCA/phono, sleeve-ground,
centre-signal
Output impedance 680 ohms
Max output level when set 15.3 Vpp
to maximum output level
Max output level when set 1.15 Vpp
to minimum output level
Range, menu adjustable 22.5 dB (16 steps of 1.5 dB)
output gain
Volume control attenuation 0 to 21 dB + mute (steps of 1.5 dB)
(audio out 1)
5.1.3 Network
Ethernet:
210
Peripheral Equipment
1 x Ethernet (RJ-45 Jack) LAN interface (10/100 Mb) up to 4 or 6 Mbps depending on the
bandwidth option installed.
To connect the system to a LAN, use the Ethernet cable provided by TANDBERG (or a standard
Ethernet cable).
The cable specification is:
1 ------------ 1
2 ------------ 2
3 ------------ 3
6 ------------ 6
If no LAN is available and the codec is connected directly to a computer, use a crossover cable.
The crossover cable specification is:
If such a connection is needed, the system and the PC must use ‘static’ TCP/IP settings because
no DHCP server is controlling the small “LAN”, which has been created between the computer
and the system. When configuring a back-to-back connection between the PC and the system,
make sure both static IP addresses exist on the same subnet.
ISDN BRI Interface:
ISDN I.420 (RJ-45 Jack) Basic Rate Interface S/T (2B+D), 128 kbps per ISDN I/F
To connect the system to BRI, use the ISDN cable provided by TANDBERG (or a standard BRI
cable).
The pinout of the S/T interface is:
BRI Pinout
Pin-3 TX+
RX+
Pin-4
RX-
Pin-5
TX-
Pin-6
ISDN PRI Interface:
1 x PRI (RJ-45 Jack) Primary Rate & Leased Line E1/T1 (G.703) Interface up to 2 Mbps
1 x PRI (RJ-45 Jack) Primary Rate (for future use).
To connect the system to PRI, use the ISDN cable provided by TANDBERG (or a standard PRI
cable).
The pinout of the E1/T1 interface is:
PRI Pinout Crossover PRI
cable
Pin-1 RX+ 4
211
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Pin-2 RX- 5
Pin-4 TX- 1
Pin-5 TX+ 2
Note! TANDBERG recommends always using category 5 cabling.
NET Interface:
1 x X.21 / V.35 / RS449 with 1 x RS366 Call Control up to 2 Mbps
V35:
V.10 (RS423).
For balanced signals a "0"=low voltage is defined as terminal A positive with respect to terminal
B.
For unbalanced signals a "0"= low voltage is defined as terminal positive with respect to GND.
Cable length max: Leased Line Control = 20 Meter
RS449:
212
Peripheral Equipment
RS366:
All balanced inputs and outputs (A and B) use balanced line signals according to V.11 (RS422)
and single ended signals in accordance with V.10 (RS423).
For balanced signals a "0"=low voltage is defined as terminal A positive with respect to terminal
B.
For unbalanced signals a "0"= low voltage is defined as terminal positive with respect to GND.
Cable length max: Leased Line Control = 20 Meter
213
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
All signals are electrically according to RS232.
Cable length max: 5 meter
X21:
214
Peripheral Equipment
All balanced inputs and outputs (A and B) use balanced line signals according to V.11 (RS422)
and single ended signals in accordance with V.10 (RS423).
For balanced signals a "0"=low voltage is defined as terminal A positive with respect to terminal
B.
For unbalanced signals a "0"= low voltage is defined as terminal positive with respect to GND.
Cable length max: 50 meter
5.1.4 Data port
The data port(s) are implemented as Digital Circuit Terminating Equipment (DCE). The connector
used are female 9-pin D-subs.
The TANDBERG main camera is normally connected to data port 2 and pin number 4 provides
12V DC / 1 Amps to the main camera. Otherwise the pin-outs for both data ports are the same.
Signal name Direction Pin
number
Carrier detect, CD From 1
DCE
Receive data, From 2
RXD DCE
Transmit data, To DCE 3
TXD
Data terminal From 4
ready, DTR DCE
Signal ground, 5
GND
Data set ready, From 6
DSR DCE
Ready to send, To DCE 7
RTS
Clear to send, From 8
CTS DCE
Ring indicator, RI From 9
DCE
215
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.2 Document Camera
A document camera can be used for showing text, diagrams and a variety of graphical material
as well as small three-dimensional objects.
How to use a document camera with your system:
1. Connect the document camera to the Doc Cam input, if available, on the system.
2. Open the Presentation menu from Main menu and choose Doc Cam.
3. You can also program the Presentation key on the remote to activate document camera.
See chapter Presentation Key for more information.
If you want to use S-Video from the document camera, you can connect the document camera to
the AUX input on the system.
Note that this requires a system with an additional video input.
216
Peripheral Equipment
5.3 DVD / VCR
DVD/VCR Playback
Mono
For playback, connect a cable between Video Out on the VCR and Video In (VCR) on the
system. Connect a cable between Audio Out on the VCR and the Audio In (VCR) on the system.
Choose VCR from the Presentation menu to activate the VCR input.
Make sure that Audio In (VCR) is On (see chapter Audio). If audio from VCR is too low, this level
can be adjusted in Audio Settings, Inputs, Level Settings. The audio from the VCR will be audible
in the local speaker system.
The audio from the VCR and your microphone(s) will be mixed and sent to the far end. When a
person talks on either local or far end, the VCR audio level will be reduced to make it easier to
comment on a video recording when Audio Settings, VCR Ducking: On.
DVD/VCR Recording
When recording a conference in stereo, the VCR will record the video as it appears on the main
monitor, the local audio and the remote audio. It will record the conference in stereo if stereo
audio is used in the conference.
When recording a videoconference, connect a cable between Video Out 2 on the system and
Video In on the VCR. Connect a cable between Audio Out 2 on the system and Audio In on the
VCR.
For stereo recording, connect:
Video cable between Video Out 2 on the system to Video In on the VCR
Audio cable between Audio Out 2 (VCR L) to VCR/DVD Audio In (L)
Audio cable between Audio Out 3 (VCR R) to VCR/DVD Audio In (R)
Make sure that:
That Stereo I/O Mode is set to On
128 AAC-LD is enabled
That AAC-LD is enabled
To enable VCR/DVD ducking (reduce volume when speaking), check that VCR Ducking
under Audio Settings is set to On.
When recording, the VCR will record the video as it appears on the main monitor, the local audio
and the audio from the far end.
Note that a system with one video output and one mixed (local and far end) audio output is
required for recording. For playback, a system with one video input and one audio input
without integrated echo cancellation is required.
217
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.4 Additional Cameras
Extra fixed Cameras
You can connect extra fixed cameras to your system, for example, a whiteboard camera. Connect
the video output of the additional camera to one of the available Video inputs on the system.
Multiple controllable Cameras
Attaching multiple cameras to one system expands visibility and is useful in large group
applications.
The system is able to control up to 4 WAVE II -cameras. Optional WAVE II cameras are supplied
with the necessary cabling. In addition, an external power supply for the camera is included.
WAVE II -camera number two must be connected to video input 2. Camera number three must be
connected to video input 3, and so forth.
The maximum length of the camera cable for multiple cameras supported by TANDBERG is 20 m
(65 ft).
218
Peripheral Equipment
Note that additional controllable cameras are only available for rollabout systems. Settops and
personal systems may be able to connect additional cameras.
219
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.5 Additional Microphones
If your environment is such that you require more than one microphone for your room, e.g. you
have a whiteboard at a distance from your table microphone, it is possible to connect additional
microphones to your system. See Appendix 4 for more information.
Note that this requires a system with more than one XLR input.
You can connect up to three additional microphones to your system for a total of 4 microphones.
The connectors are marked Mic1, Mic2, Mic3 (Mic 1-3 XLR) and 4 (RCA Input). The connected
microphones will by default be mixed.
When more than one microphone is connected, you have the option to use the Voice Activate
Camera Tracking feature.
Audio Science Microphone
TANDBERG's award-winning Audio Science microphone is a ceiling-mounted, wide coverage,
boundary microphone, which can eliminate the need for table microphones. It is designed to pick
up the audio from all conference participants seated within in its pick-up area, defined by a
quarter-sphere of approximately 14-foot (4.25m) radius extended in front of, and to the sides of
the microphone.
Please contact your TANDBERG representative for further information.
220
Peripheral Equipment
221
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.6 The TANDBERG DNAM
The TANDBERG Digital Natural Audio Module*:
Audio In: S/PDIF or Analog
Differential In: Differential Mono input (Analog).
Pinout: 1 GND, 2 and 3 signal
Loop out: Will always give a mono analog output of the input. Even with S/PDIF in, this
output will give an analog mono output.
5 x 40W continuous average output power, to the load specified by DNAM speakers.
Fuse 2A 250V Slow, 5 x 20mm, Littelfuse type 215002.
Stereo out:
222
Peripheral Equipment
*The TANDBERG Digital Natural Audio Module is integrated in some TANDBERG systems. Please contact your
TANDBERG representative for more information.
223
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.7 Stereo Speaker Kit
Note that the following applies only for systems with a stereo S/PDIF output.
The Stereo Speaker Kit provides an pair of floor-standing loudspeakers in addition to the built-in
DNAM. Using these speakers will enable stereo functionality in your system and thereby enhance
the sound experience.
To experience stereo sound, the stereo speakers have to be connected to the Digital Natural
Audio Module (DNAM) as well as confirming this under Stereo Settings in the main audio menu.
The stereo sound source may either be located at the far end, or locally as a sound source (CD,
DVD) connected to the codec audio AUX/VCR inputs. If using a local stereo sound source, you
also have to enable Stereo I/O mode (On) in the same audio menu, to be able to receive stereo
sound on your system, and to send stereo signals to the far end. See chapter 4.5.4 for more
information.
Check also that the full-range frequency audio coding AAC-LD is enabled (In Call Quality menu,
AAC-LD is checked, and AAC-LD 128 threshold is the same or lower than the call rate you are
planning to use). See chapter Audio Algorithm and AAC-LD 128kbps for more information.
An installation sheet is enclosed in the Stereo Loudspeaker Kit, which also describes
recommended physical speaker placement.
Note that if stereo speakers are enabled in the menu without having any stereo speakers
connected to the Digital NAM, or having other speakers than the TANDBERG stereo
speakers, it may cause the acoustic echo-canceller to malfunction.
224
Peripheral Equipment
5.8 Telephone Add-On
The system has a built in audio bridge* that can bring in Voice over IP (VoIP) telephony or normal
telephone sites using ISDN.
Note that this requires a system with mixed audio output (audio from local and far end) and
one audio input without integrated echo cancelling.
In addition to using ISDN and IP for your telephone sites, it is possible to connect a telephone
using normal POTS line** by
Connect the audio out from the conference telephone to the AUX input.
Connect the audio input from the conference telephone to the AUX output, which
provides a mixed signal between local and far end.
*optional MultiSite package available
** require a conference phone with external audio input and output
225
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.9 Dual Monitor
Note that this requires a system with dual monitor video output.
The Dual Monitor option consists of an additional monitor, bigger cabinet top-plate and
associated cabling. The Dual Monitor can be used to show full screen selfview, snapshots and
Duo Video.
To use the system in the Dual Monitor configuration:
1. Connect Video Out 2 (preferably) otherwise Video Out 4 on the system to a video input
on the dual monitor.
2. Set Dual Monitor to On in the General Settings menu.
226
Peripheral Equipment
5.10 XGA Monitors and Projectors
(Optional)
The system can be delivered with optional single or dual TV/XGA monitors. It can also be
connected to any DVI/VGA/PAL or NTSC display.
Note that this requires a system with minimum one DVI-I output.
227
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.11 VESA Display Power
Management
Because of the tremendous amount of energy consumed by monitors when operating, the system
will reduce power consumption and extend monitor lifecycle by suspending the (switch off)
monitors and projectors when the system goes into sleep/standby.
This applies for all VESA Display Power Management compliant displays that are connected to
the VGA/DVI output of the system. The display device need to comply with VESA display Power
Management system (DPMS).
Note that this requires a system supplied with a VGA/DVI output.
The VESA DPMS standard consists of four modes, Normal, Standby, Suspend and Off, and
applies to all Sync formats (e.g. VGA).
DPMS standard:
Normal Standby Suspend Off
H-sync On Off On Off
V-sync On On Off Off
Power savings None Minimal Substantial Maximum
Recovery time None 2-3 seconds 2-3 seconds 8-10 seconds
In Off mode some power may still be drawn in order to power indicator lights etc. EDID contains
the information on which mode a specific monitor supports.
TANDBERG supports all four modes. However, in F1 and above, all monitors not listed below are
automatically set to Off.
Monitor DPMS mode
Dell Off
T8000 - Pioneer Suspend
T6000 - SAMPO Suspend
Maestro - Projection Design Off
T7000 - Sharp Off
228
Peripheral Equipment
5.12 Digital Monitor Power
Management
DMPM is monitor power management applied over the digital DVI interface. TANDBERG
supports DMPM in software F2 and above. Six monitor power states are defined.
Monitor On Power state: Transmitter (TANDBERG codec) and receiver (Monitor) are powered
and active. This power state is equivalent with the DPMS normal mode.
Intermediate Power state: When the codec goes from active to standby, it turns off the DVI
transmitter and the monitor can go from Monitor On
Power state to Intermediate Power state.
Active-off Power state: The monitor can go from Intermediate Power state to Active-off Power
state when the monitor timer expires.
Non-Link Recoverable Off Power State: The monitor can enter Non-Link Recoverable Off
Power State when the codec is switched off or if the DVI cable is disconnected. This power state
is equivalent to the DPMS “Off (with no DPMS recovery)” state.
Monitor Power Switch Off Power state: This state can be entered when the power switch on
the monitor is toggled to its off position. This state has two sub-states dependent on if the codec
is switched on or off.
229
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.13 Extended Display Identification
Data (EDID)
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) is a VESA standard data format that will allow the
system to communicate its capabilities, including vendor information like the supported VGA-
formats and frequency range limits to a PC connected to the XGA/DVI input.
Note that this requires a system supplied with a XGA/DVI input.
This means that the PC always* will be able to output a valid VGA/DVI signal to the system with
no manual reconfiguration of the PC screen settings.
TANDBERG supports EDID structure v1.3, which adheres to the MS Plug & Play definition.
This standard contains information on product ID, basic display parameters, timing identifications
and detailed timing descriptions.
In F1 and above, TANDBERG will use the EDID information to decide which resolution to use,
800x600 @ 75Hz or 1024x768 @ 60Hz.
Example (1024x768@60Hz)
Detailed timing description:
PixelClockDiv10000: 6500
Horizontal Active: 1024
Horizontal Blanking: 320
Vertical Active: 768
Vertical Blanking: 38
Horizontal Sync 24
Offset:
Horizontal Sync Pulse 136
Width:
Vertical Sync Offset: 3
Vertical Sync Pulse 6
Width:
Horizontal Image Not available
Size:
Vertical Image Size: Not available
Horizontal Border: 0
Vertical Border: 0
230
Peripheral Equipment
Tested and verified monitors, EDID & Timing
Listed below are some of the monitors TANDBERG have tested and verified against:
ADI A715
Dell W1700
EIZO L367
EIZO F730
ErgoScan 400S
Hitachi CM640ET
Hitachi CM769ET
IBM 9494-HBO
IBM G97
IBM E74
IBM 6743-60N
JVC LT-23X475
Löewe TAA112747
MAG D700
MAG DJ707
Panasonic SL75
Pioneer PDP-502MXE
Pioneer PDP-50MXE1
Samsung 191T
*Need to comply with the VESA EDID standard.
231
6 Appendices
Appendices:
Appendix 1: Technical Specification
Appendix 2: Bandwidth Information
Appendix 3: Environmental considerations
Appendix 4: Guidelines for setting up videoconferencing rooms
Appendix 5: Security
Appendix 6: Using the file system
Appendix 7: Web Interface
Appendix 8: Connecting the system to PRI/T1
Appendix 9: Connecting the system to the Switched 56 network
Appendix 10: Connecting the system to ISDN using NT1 network adapters
Appendix 11: Wave II Camera Pinouts and Connectors
Appendix 12: Remote control
Appendix 13: CallManager registration
Appendix 14: Diagnostic Tools for IP
Appendix 15: System Upgrade
Appendix 16: Declaration of Conformity
Appendix 17: Dimensions
1
Appendices
Appendix 1
Technical Specification
SYSTEM COMPONENTS EMBEDDED ENCRYPTION
1 or 2 monitors, wireless remote control, Tracker, H.320 and H.323 point-to-point and multipoint calls
W.A.V.E. II camera, microphone, Audio ModuleTM, Standards-based: H.233, H.234, H.235 v2&v3,
integrated cabling, cart DES and AES
NIST-validated AES
MONITOR NIST-validated DES
32" NTSC or 33" PAL monitor Automatic key generation and exchange
Optional high-resolution monitors Suppor ted in DuoVideo,H.239 and Multisite
Other monitors supported
H.323 NETWORK FEATURES
BANDWIDTH Differentiated Services (DiffServ)
H.320 up to 2 Mbps Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)
H.323 up to 4 Mbps point-to-point IP precedence
SIP up to 4 Mbps IP type of service (ToS)
Up to 6 Mbps total MultiSite bandwidth IP adaptive bandwidth management (including flow
control)
VIDEO STANDARDS Auto gatekeeper discovery
H.261, H.263, H.263+, H.263++ (Natural Video), H.264 H.235 Authentication (Gatekeeper registration)
NTP Server
VIDEO FEATURES Dynamic playout and lip-sync buffering
Native 16:9 Widescreen Intelligent Packet Loss Recovery (IPLR)
Advanced Screen Layouts Automatic support for private and public IP addresses
Picture in Picture (PIP) using NAT
Picture outside Picture (POP) H.245 DTMF tones
Intelligent Video Management
SECURITY FEATURES
VIDEO INPUTS (5 INPUTS) Management via HTTPS
1 x MiniDin, S-video: main camera IP Administration Password
1 x MiniDin, S-video: auxiliary / document camera Menu Administration Password
1 x RCA / Phono, composite: document camera / aux Dialing Access code
1 x RCA / Phono, composite: VCR Streaming password
1 x DVI/SXGA: PC H.243 MCU Password
VNC password
VIDEO OUTPUTS (6 OUTPUTS) SNMP security alerts
1 x MiniDin, S-video: main monitor Disable IP services
1 x MiniDin, S-video: dual monitor
NETWORK INTERFACES
1 x RCA / Phono, composite: main monitor or VCR
1 x RCA / Phono, composite: dual monitor or VCR 6 x ISDN BRI (RJ-45), S-inter face
2 x DVI/XGA: main and dual monitor 1 x E1 / T1 G.703 (RJ-45) for ISDN PRI or Leased E1 /
T1
SXGA INPUT / XGA OUTPUT 1 x E1 / T1 G.703 (RJ-45) for future usage
Input: 640 x 480 – 1280 x 1024 1 x LAN / Ethernet (RJ-45) 10/100 Mbit (LAN / DSL /
Output: 640 x 480 – 1024 x 768 cable modem)
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) 1 x X.21 / V.35 / RS-449 with RS-366 dialing or Leased
VESA Monitor Power Management Line
1 x USB (for future use)
VIDEO FORMAT
ETHERNET / INTERNET / INTRANET CONNECTIVITY
NTSC, PAL, VGA, SVGA, XGA or SXGA
TCP / IP, DHCP, ARP, FTP, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS,
LIVE VIDEO RESOLUTIONS SOAP and XML
NATIVE NTSC: SNMP Enterprise Management
4SIF (704 x 480 pixels), Digital Clarity Internal web server
Interlaced SIF (352 x 480 pixels), Natural Video Internal streaming server
SIF (352 x 240 pixels) OTHER MAJOR ITU STANDARDS SUPPORTED
233
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
NATIVE PAL: H.231, H.233, H.234, H.235, H.235 v2&v3, H.239,
4CIF (704 x 576 pixels), Digital Clarity H.241,
Interlaced CIF (352 x 576 pixels), Natural Video H.243, H.281, BONDING (ISO 13871), H.320, H.323,
CIF (352 x 288 pixels) H.331, MPEG4 AAC-LD (20KHz audio)
QCIF (176 x 144 pixels)
W.A.V.E. (WIDE ANGLE VIEW) II CAMERA
SQCIF (128 x 96 pixels) decode only
NATIVE PC RESOLUTIONS: 10 x zoom 1/4" CCD +15° / -20° tilt
XGA (1024 x 768) + / -95°pan
SVGA (800 x 600 pixels) 61° vertical field of view
VGA (640 x 480 pixels) 96° total vertical field of view
77° horizontal field of view
STILL IMAGE TRANSFER 267° total horizontal field of view
CIF, SIF, 4CIF (H.261 Annex D), 4SIF, VGA, SVGA, 460 (PAL) / 470 (NTSC) TV lines
XGA Min. illumination 2 Lux (F1.8)
Auto or manual focus / brightness / white balance
AUDIO STANDARDS Far-end camera control
G.711, G.722, G.722.1, G.728 , MPEG4 AAC-LD 15 near and far-end camera pre-sets
Voice-activated camera positioning
AUDIO FEATURES Daisy chain support for up to 4 cameras VISCA
CD-Quality 20KHz Mono and Stereo camera support
Telephone add-on via MultiSite
PRESENTATIONS AND COLLABORATION
Four separate acoustic echo cancellers
Audio mixer Natural Presenter Package including:
Automatic Gain Control (AGC) PC Presenter
Automatic Noise Reduction PC SoftPresenter
Audio level meters Digital Clarity
VCR ducking DuoVideo and H.239
Advanced Video Layouts
AUDIO INPUTS (6 INPUTS) Streaming compatible with Cisco IP/TV,
3 x microphone, 24V phantom powered, XLR connector Apple QuickTime®, RealPlayer® v8 etc.
1 x RCA / Phono, Line Level: audio mixer
CLOSED CAPTIONING/TEXT CHAT
1 x RCA / Phono, Line Level: auxiliary (or VCR/DVD
Stereo L) T.140 standards-based
1 x RCA / Phono, Line Level: VCR/DVD (Stereo R)
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
AUDIO OUTPUTS (3 OUTPUTS) Support for the TANDBERG Management Suite
1 x RCA / Phono, S/PDIF (mono/stereo) or Total management via embedded web server, SNMP,
Analogue Line Level: main audio Telnet and FTP
1 x RCA / Phono, Line Level: auxiliary (or VCR Stereo L) Remote software upload: via webserver or via FTP
1 x RCA / Phono, Line Level: VCR (mono or Stereo R) server
2 x RS-232 for local software upgrades, local control
FRAME RATES – POINT-TO-POINT & MULTISITE and diagnostics
30 frames per second @ 168 kbps and above Onscreen Menu on TV and/or VGA monitors
60 fields per second @ 336 kbps and above (Point-to-
DIRECTORY SERVICES
point)
Support for Local, Global and Dynamic Server
MULTISITE FEATURES Directories
Audio and Video Transcoding Unlimited entries using Server directory* supporting
Video rate matching from 56 kbps - maximum LDAP and H.350
conference rate 400 number global directory
Continuos Presence CP5+1, CP4 and Voice Switched 200 number local directory
Best Impression 50 dedicated MultiSite entries
H.264, Encryption, Digital Clarity Last Number Dialed
DuoVideo and H.239 mixed and from any site Missed Calls
Telephony Call History
ISDN & IP Downspeeding and IPLR
15 SELECTABLE MENU LANGUAGES
MULTISITE (H.243) CASCADING ON ISDN AND IP English, German, French, Norwegian, Swedish, Italian,
Dial in / Dial out Spanish,
Chair control for host system Portuguese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese,
Snapshot of ongoing conference (JPEG) Japanese,
Snapshot of ongoing DuoVideo/H.239 presentation Russian, Korean, Finnish and Thai
(JPEG)
Separate welcome page for encrypted conferences CUSTOMIZED WELCOME SCREEN AND COMPANY
IP AND PRI/BRI/SERIAL INTERFACE (V.35) LOGO
Conference rates up to 6 Mbps
Up to 6 video and 5 audio sites POWER
4 sites @ 2 Mbps, 6 sites @ 768 (+telephone calls) Auto-sensing power supply
Mix IP with ISDN-PRI, ISDN-BRI or Serial Inter face up 100 - 250 VAC, 50 - 60 Hz
234
Appendices
to maximum conference rate 65 watts max. for codec and main camera
DUOVIDEO / H.239 OPERATING TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY
Available on all networks 0° C to 35° C (32° F to 95° F) ambient temperature.
10% to 90 % Relative Humidity (RH)
NETWORK FEATURES
STORAGE AND TRANSPORT TEMPERATURE
Auto H.320 / H.323 dialing
SIP -20° C to 60° C (-4° F to 140° F) at RH 10-90 % (non-
Downspeeding condensing)
Programmable network profiles
FOOTPRINT
Intelligent Call Management
HO on ISDN-PRI Facility Width: 41.3" / 105 cm
Maximum call length timer Depth: 24.6" / 62.5 cm
Automatic SPID and line number configuration
PRODUCT RELIABILITY / MTBF
(National ISDN, GR-2941-CORE)
Soft Mux The predicted reliability is expressed in the expected
NATO standard KG194 / KIV-7 encryptor support random Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) for the
H.331 Broadcast Mode electronic components based on the Power On Hours:
IP Address Conflict Warning Power On Hours (POH) > 69 000 hours
Useful Life Cycle > 6 years
ISO 9001 certificate is available upon request
* Requires TANDBERG Management Suite 9.0 or newer
System features vary depending on network selection and software package. All specifications subject to change without
notice. TANDBERG is a registered trademark or trademark of TANDBERG in the U.S. and other countries. RealPlayer is
a trademark or a registered trademark of RealNetworks, Inc. QuickTime is a registered trademark of Apple Computer,
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and NetMeeting are either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are proper ty of their respective
owners.
235
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 2
Bandwidth information for TANDBERG endpoints
Model 8000MXP, 7000MXP 6000MXP, Maestro
Bandwidth Standard: 1920 / Standard: 768 / 3072
Point to 4096 Option: 1920 / 4096
point
ISDN / IP
MultiSite Total: 6144kbps Total: 3072kbps 4x768
6x1152 video + 4 audio 3x1536
video + 5 audio video + no audio
5x1536
video + no audio Total: 6144kbps 6x1152
4x1920 video + 5 audio 5x1536
video + 5 audio video + no audio 4x1920
3x3072 video + 5 audio 3x3072
video + no audio video + no audio
Rate Yes Yes
Matching
Dual Yes Yes
Stream
(DuoVideo
/ H.239)
Secure All bandwidths All bandwidths
Conference
H.264 Up to 2Mbps Up to 2Mbps
Picture VS, CP4, CP5+1 VS, CP4, CP5+1
Mode
MultiSite
Model 3000MXP / 3000NET 2000MXP, 1500MXP
MXP
Bandwidth Standard: 384 / 1536 Standard: 1920 (IP only)
Point to Option: 512 / 1920 Options: 512 / 1920
point 3000NET: 384 / 1536
ISDN / IP
MultiSite Total: 1536kbps Total: 2304kbps 4x768
4x512 video + no video + no audio 4x512
audio video + 3 audio
4x384 video + 3 audio
Total: 2304kbps
4x768
video + no audio
236
Appendices
4x512
video + 3 audio
Rate Yes Yes
Matching
Dual Yes Yes
Stream
(DuoVideo
/ H.239)
Secure All bandwidths All bandwidths
Conference
H.264 Up to 2Mbps Up to 2Mbps
Picture VS, CP4, CP5+1 VS, CP4, CP5+1
Mode
MultiSite
Model 990MXP / 990NET 880MXP / 880NET MXP
MXP
Bandwidth Standard: 1920 (IP Standard: 1152 (IP only)
Point to only) Option: 384 / 1152
point Options: 512 / 1920
ISDN / IP 990NET: 768 / 1920
MultiSite Total: 2304kbps Total: 1152kbps 4x384
4x768 video + no audio 4x320
video + no audio video + 3 audio
4x512
video + 3 audio
Rate Yes Yes
Matching
Dual Yes Yes
Stream
(DuoVideo
/ H.239)
Secure All bandwidths All bandwidths
Conference
H.264 Up to 2Mbps Up to 768
Picture VS, CP4, CP5+1 VS, CP4, CP5+1
Mode
MultiSite
Model 770MXP 1000MXP
Bandwidth Standard: 768 (IP Standard: 768 (IP only)
Point to only) Options: 128 / 768, 384
point Option: 128 / 768 / 768
ISDN / IP
MultiSite Not Available Not Available
Rate Not Available Not Available
Matching
Dual Yes Yes
Stream
237
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
(DuoVideo
/ H.239)
Secure All bandwidths All bandwidths
Conference
H.264 Up to 768 Up to 768
Picture Not Available Not Available
Mode
MultiSite
Model 550MXP
Bandwidth Standard: 768 (IP only)
Point to Options: 128 / 768, 384
point / 768
ISDN / IP
MultiSite Not Available
Rate Not Available
Matching
Dual Not Available
Stream
(DuoVideo
/ H.239)
Secure All bandwidths
Conference
H.264 Up to 768
Picture Not Available
Mode
MultiSite
238
Appendices
Appendix 3
Environmental considerations
This section explains how to carry out basic adjustments and simple tests to ensure that you send
and receive the best possible image and audio quality when using your system.
Iris control and lighting
By default the system camera will use an automatic iris to compensate for changes in lighting. In
addition to this feature, you may further assist the system to maintain the best possible image
quality by paying special attention to environmental lighting and background colors as described
below. Remember the system will send live images of yourself and your immediate surroundings.
Avoid direct sunlight on the subject matter i.e. yourself, the background or onto the
camera lens as this will create harsh contrasts.
If light levels are too low you may need to consider using artificial lighting. As described
above, direct illumination of the subject matter and camera lens should be avoided.
When using artificial lighting, daylight type lamps will produce the most effective results.
Avoid colored lighting.
Indirect light from shaded sources or reflected light from pale walls often produces
excellent results.
Avoid harsh side lighting or strong light from above. Strong sunlight from a window or
skylight may put part or all of the subject matter in shadow or cause silhouetting.
If you still have problems with the iris and lighting, manual adjustment of the camera
parameters might help – see Video Settings menu.
Dim scenes can also be improved by manually adjusting the camera brightness setting.
Background
The appearance of the picture background is very important but easily overlooked. It is important
to remember that the camera also shows what is behind you when in a videoconference. To
ensure a suitable background we recommend you consider the following:
Use a neutrally colored background with a medium contrast and a soft texture, e.g. a
plain curtain with no heavy patterns or strong colors that may adversely tint the whole
scene.
Avoid moving backgrounds such as curtains blowing in a draught, moving objects, or
people walking behind as this may both reduce image quality and distract the attention of
the calling party.
Do not place the camera facing a doorway.
Loudspeaker volume
The audio system will use the Digital Natural Audio Module (DNAM) if available and supported by
the system. The volume of the audio system is controlled by the Volume Control keys on the
system remote control.
239
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 4
Guidelines for setting up videoconferencing rooms
The following are a set of guidelines to consider when either building a videoconferencing room,
or using an existing room for videoconferencing.
Lighting: Audio:
Low Contrast desired for light Noise Floor preferred less than
intensity. No dark spots. 44dBC.
Intensity @ table 800 - 1400 Lux as Reverb Time 0,3 to 0,5 sec.
measured with an Incident light
Ventilation:
Keep in mind Noise Floor.
meter.
Block sunlight from entering room.
Velocity = Noise. Therefore keep
velocity of air low.
Seating Area (Table):
Should allow all participants to see
Room:
Should be located away from noise.
Monitors.
Should allow camera to “see” all
Should not have windows.
Doors should be located off camera.
participants.
Non-shiny non-patterned preferably
light grey surface (if table used).
Walls:
Color: Generally high contrast color
desired. Light blue is commonly
used.
Acoustically reflective surfaces (such
as glass or concrete) should be
covered with curtains or sound
treatment.
How to prepare a typical room for videoconferencing:
The diagram below shows a typical room designed to obtain the best results when using the
system.
240
Appendices
The microphone should be placed at the front of the table to ensure that all speech will be
detected. The best position for the microphone is at least 2 meters (6.5 feet) in front of the system
on a plain, flat table with at least 0.3 meters (12 inches) of table in front of the microphone.
The document camera should be close to the chair person or a designated controller of the
document camera for ease of use (remember to arrange all the peripherals so that one participant
can reach each of them to point, change the display, tape, and so forth).
The camera supports up to 15 pre-stored camera positions.
The illustration shows three possible camera positions; one for all the participants, one for the
whiteboard and one for the main speaker. The remaining camera presets are then available for
other peripheral equipment, for example a VCR.
Position the system in such a way as to avoid the possibility of somebody inadvertently walking
into the camera’s field of view when entering the room. Other than the conference participants,
there should be no moving items in the sent image.
241
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 5
Security
The system has several features both to protect from unauthorized use and system access:
Access Code:
When Access Code is enabled, the user will be asked to enter an access code before he/she is
able to make a call. The system will verify if the entered access code is valid by checking the
code with the allowed codes listed in the access.txt file on the ftp-server in the system. If no
access.txt file is uploaded to the system, registration of the code will be done without validation.
E.g. you can enter whatever code you want and have access to the system.
The access.txt file is a plain text file with one line per access code as shown below:
1234
1250
A1
B2
ABC
To upload this file to the system, follow these steps:
Open a DOS-window and go to the folder where the ‘access.txt’ file is located.
Type ftp <IP-address of your local system).
User: press Enter or enter IP-password.
Type “bin” and press Enter.
Go to the user folder, type “cd user”.
Upload the ‘access.txt’ file, type ‘put access.txt’.
Exit from ftp, type "bye".
Administrator Password
Access to the administrator menu on the system unit can be controlled using password
protection. You can set the Administrator Password in Menu Settings, in Security or from the
dataport:
menupassword set <pin-code>. The pin-code should be maximum 5 - five digits. To erase the
password, enter an empty pin-code.
Streaming password
By setting a streaming password in the streaming menu on the system, a password has to be
entered on the streaming client to be able to see the video stream from the system.
IP Password
242
Appendices
By setting an IP Access Password on the system, all access to the system using IP (Telnet, FTP
and WEB) requires a password. This password can be enabled from telnet or dataport using the
command: ippassword <ip-password>. The default IP username and password is "TANDBERG".
To remove this password, use the command: "ippassword ”. From telnet, this is only possible by
first entering the correct password.
IP Services
The different IP services on the system - FTP, Telnet, Telnet Challenge, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP
and H.323 can be disabled to prevent access to the system. By using the commands below, the
services can be independently enabled/disabled:
xconfiguration Telnet/TelnetChallenge/FTP/HTTP/HTTPS/H323 Mode: <On/Off>
xconfiguration TelnetChallenge Mode: <On/Off> [port]
xconfiguration SNMP Mode: <On/Off/ReadOnly/TrapsOnly>
SNMP Security alert
This function will notify any Management Application (such as TMS - TANDBERG Management
Suite) if anyone tries to perform Remote Management on the system using an illegal password.
The Security alert that is sent to the Management Application will contain information about the IP
address and the service (WEB, Telnet, FTP) being used for the attempt. If TMS is used, email
notifications or alarms about the attempt can be sent to specified persons.
Encryption
All TANDBERG systems support both AES and DES encryption. By default this feature is
enabled such that when connecting with any other video system or MCU, a TANDBERG system
will attempt to establish a secure conference using AES or DES encryption. The TANDBERG
system will attempt this for both IP and ISDN connections. Where a remote system or MCU
supports encryption, the highest common encryption algorithm will be selected on a port-by-port
basis.
The type and status of the encryption negotiated is indicated by padlock symbols and on-screen
messages. Encryption on the TANDBERG systems is fully automatic, and provides clear security
status indicators;
An open padlock indicates that encryption is being initialized, but the conference is not
yet encrypted.
Single padlock indicates DES encryption.
Double padlock indicates AES encryption.
In addition to on-screen indicators the Call Status menu provides two information fields regarding
call encryption. The first field is the Encryption Code, which will identify either AES or DES. The
second field is the Encryption Check Code and is comprised of an alphanumeric string. This
string will be the same for systems on either side of an encrypted conference. If the Check Codes
do not match, this would indicate that the call has been exposed to a Man In The Middle attack.
When a system with MultiSite functionality hosts a conference, the highest possible encryption
algorithm will be negotiated on a site-by-site basis. MultiSite conferences can therefore support a
mix of AES and DES encrypted endpoints in the same conference. A conference will only be as
secure as its weakest link.
All systems supporting DES encryption can upgrade to AES encryption. Please contact your
TANDBERG representative for more information. The standards supporting the encryption
mechanisms employed by TANDBERG are: AES, DES, H.233, H234 and H.235 (H235v3 & v2 for
243
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
backwards compatibility) with extended Diffie Hellman key distribution via H.320, H.323 and
Leased Line connections.
The TANDBERG AES implementation is validated as conforming to the Advanced Encryption
Standard (AES) Algorithm, as specified in Federal Information Processing Standard Publication
197, Advanced Encryption Standard, by The National Institute of Standards and Technology
(NIST).
244
Appendices
Appendix 6
Using the file system
It is possible to access a file system within the TANDBERG system by using ftp:
DOS- ftp <IP-address of system>, or
window:
Web- ftp:// <IP-address of system>
browser:
Description of the different files:
all.prm all settings in the system (including directory)
dir.prm directory entries (up to 200 entries)
event.log logs fault situations etc.
sw.pkg the system software
globdir.prm file containing up to 400 entries. These entries can not be edited from the
system, but can be edited as a text-file.
Files accessible only by ‘ftp get /tmp/snapshots/xxx.jpg’ or ‘http://<IP-address of
system>/tmp/snapshots/xxx.jpg’:
site0.jpg Snapshot of current stream if MultiSite.
main.jpg Snapshot of selfview.
site1.jpg Snapshot of decoded stream if point-to-point.
duo.jpg Snapshot of the encoded stream if transmitting DuoVideo, the decoded stream if
receiving DuoVideo.
Custom logos
Go to the folder where your logo is located.
Type “ftp <IP-address of your local system>”.
Go to the user folder, type “cd user”.
Upload the logo, type "put <logo.jpg>".
The new logo will be displayed the next time you restart your system. Recommended maximum
size is: 704x576, file-format: jpg. If the file is too large, no logo will be displayed.
245
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 7
Web Interface
It is possible to access and maintain the system remotely via a local area network (LAN) using a
standard Web-browser. Connect your system to a LAN with a Network cable.
How to configure your system for web interface:
1. Open Administrator Settings and choose Network\LAN Settings
2. Specify IP-assignment DHCP or Static. If DHCP is selected, no other settings are
needed. If Static is selected, IP-address, IP-subnet mask and Gateway must be
specified.
3. Start your Web-browser. In the address field type the IP-address of the system. Enter the
password and the Web-page of the system will be shown. The default password is
TANDBERG.
4. Restart the system. Choose Restart from the Control Panel.
Example:
IP-assignment: Static
IP-address: 196.9.200.129
IP-subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway: 196.9.200.21
246
Appendices
Appendix 8
(Not available on all TANDBERG systems)
Connecting the system to PRI/T1
Using CSU adapter
Connecting the system to the ISDN network via the E1/T1-interface using an Adtran T1 ESF CSU
ACE or equivalent CSU, will allow up to 1.54 Mbps connection. The E1/T1-interface must be
connected to a CSU approved according to IEC 60950, UL 1950 or equivalent standard. The PRI-
line will run the AT&T 4ESS, 5ESS and National ISDN protocols in addition to Euro ISDN (E1).
Connecting to Adtran T1 ESF CSU ACE
Connect the PRI cable from the system to the input marked CPE (Customer Provided Equipment)
on the Adtran CSU (straight through category 5 cable is recommended). Connect to the network
via the NET connector on the Adtran CSU.
Configuration of the system
Open the Administrator Settings Menu from the Control Panel and select Network.
Choose Network Type: PRI and specify your PRI number, max. Channels, cable length (between
system and CSU) and switch type.
Configuration of Adtran T1 ESF CSU ACE
Enter 2)CONFIG menu using SCROLL and ENTER buttons.
Enter 3)TERMINAL menu. Check 1)FORMAT:ESF, 2)CODE: B8ZS , 3)SET LBO: 0-133
(corresponding to Cable Length setting on the system).
Go to main menu and enter 1)NETWORK menu. 7)SET LBO: 0.0 (according to
information from Telco).
Also, other network parameters should be set according to information from your Telco.
247
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 9
Connecting the system to the Switched 56 network
Using Telesync TS-256 SW56/ISDN adapter
Connecting the system to the SW56 network using a Telesync Adapter is described below. There
are different Telesync Adapters for different configurations of SW56 networks. The network types
tested with the system are SW56 2Wire and 4Wire.
Connecting
Connect the system ISDN1 cable to the BRI S/T interface on the Telesync Adapter. Connect the
two SW56 cables from the Telesync adapter Line 1 and Line 2 to the SW56 network.
Configuration of the system
Select network type to National ISDN.
LINE 1 SETUP
NUMBER1: program with number from the first SW56 line
NUMBER2: program with number from the second SW56 line
SPID1: program with number from the first SW56 line
SPID2: Leave blank
How to call
It is important to use Restrict (56k). Select Restrict (56k) in Call Settings in the Call menu (select
the field next to the phone book button in the call menu). A second number field will appear when
ISDN is selected for Net within Call Settings and you choose bandwidth 128 kbps. Enter the
second number in the call settings menu.
248
Appendices
Appendix 10
Connecting the system to ISDN using NT1 network
adapters
Connecting
Connect the first ISDN cable from ISDN 1 on the system to the S-interface on your first
NT1 network adapter. Connect the other ISDN cables to the appropriate NT1 network
adapters. Connect the U-interface of your NT1 adapter to the line provided from your
network provider.
For convenience the NT1 adapters could be placed inside the cabinet. If needed, use
the shorter ISDN cable (RJ45 connectors) delivered with the NT1 between the codec
and the NT1 and the longer ISDN cable between the NT1 and the connector (RJ45) at
the wall socket.
Configuring
The configuration of the system is performed in the same manner as described in
ISDN BRI Settings.
The NT1 should be powered up and you should check that the network is active.
Please check your NT1 User Manual.
249
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 11
(Not available with set top systems)
WAVE II Camera
Pinouts and Connectors
8-PIN RJ (shielded modular jack):
This connector is used for the power and control signals to the main camera.
Pin-8 +12V (presence when connected in
daisy chain)
Pin-7 GND
Pin-6 GND
Pin-5 RXD (in)
Pin-4 TXD (out)
Pin-3 +12V
Pin-2 GND
Pin-1 + 12V
Standard Phono:
Used for composite video signal
Power:
2.0 mm DC power jack (+12V, 1A required)
Standard Mini Din:
Used for S-Video signal
6-PIN RJ (modular jack):
250
Appendices
This connector is used when cascading cameras: Control (out) signal and external camera
detection. Note: It does not provide power for cascaded camera.
PRI Pinout
Pin-6 GND
Pin-5 GND
Pin-4 RXD (in)
Pin-3 TXD (out)
Pin-2 Presence (+12V in
daisy chain)
Pin-1 GND
Multiple Camera support:
The figure below is an example of how multiple cameras should be connected:
251
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 12
Remote Control (TRC 3)
The TANDBERG remote control transmits IR-signals using the following parameters:
Protocol Siemens SDA2208
Reference frequency 485kHz
Address 4&7
IR wavelenght 940nm
IR carrier ferquency 30kHz
Remote Control keycode map:
Button codes Remote control Button codes Remote Control
Decimal Hex Address Button name Decimal Hex Address Button
name
0 00 33 21 0 OK
1 01 0 NUMBER 1 34 22 0 CALL
2 02 0 NUMBER 2 35 23 0 END
CALL
3 03 0 NUMBER 3 36 24 0 PHONE
BOOK
4 04 0 NUMBER 4 37 25 0 MENU
5 05 0 NUMBER 5 38 26 0 CANCEL
6 06 0 NUMBER 6 39 27 0
7 07 0 NUMBER 7 40 28 0 PRESETS
8 08 0 NUMBER 8 41 29
9 09 0 NUMBER 9 42 2A
10 0A 0 NUMBER 0 43 2B
11 0B 0 * 44 2C
12 0C 0 # 45 2D
13 0D 46 2E
14 0E 47 2F
15 0F 48 30
16 10 49 31
17 11 PRESENTER 50 32
252
Appendices
18 12 0 51 33
19 13 52 34
20 14 53 35
21 15 54 36
22 16 0 ZOOM OUT 55 37
23 17 0 ZOOM IN 56 38
24 18 57 39
25 19 0 VOLUME 58 3A
DOWN
26 1A 0 VOLUME UP 59 3B
27 1B 0 MIC OFF 60 3C
28 1C 61 3D
29 1D 0 UP 62 3E
30 1E 0 DOWN 63 3F 0 WAKE UP
31 1F 0 LEFT 25 19 3 LOW
BATT
32 20 0 RIGHT XX 3 PROG
VER
253
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 13
Cisco CallManager registration
Configuring an H.323 client on the CallManager 4.0
The registration of a H.323 client in CallManager is supported on the CallManager (CCM) 4.0
software and forward.
1. To configure the CallManager with an H.323 client, log on to the administration web
interface and go to the phone configuration page.
2. The Phone configuration page is located on: device (top menu) -> Add a New device ->
Phone -> H.323 Client.
3. In the phone configuration page type the IP address of the TANDBERG system in the
Device name field, select device pool and push the insert button.
4. A pop-up box will now appear on the screen and ask you if you would like to configure
the directory number. Push the ok button.
5. You should now see the Directory Number Configuration WEB page. Enter the
E.164/phone number of your TANDBERG system in the Directory number field, and in
the “Forward and Pickup Settings” enter the time of “No Answer Ring Duration”. The time
selected has to have a value from 1 to 300 seconds.
6. Push the Add button to update the CallManager with the directory number settings.
You have now configured the CallManager with a H.323 client and should be able to register the
TANDBERG system to it.When the TANDBERG system is registered to a CallManager, it will be
possible to place and receive calls from this system to any other video and voice systems that are
registered on the same CallManager.
254
Appendices
Appendix 14
Diagnostic Tools for IP
To use these tools, will require using a PC and setting up a telnet session towards the system.
Q.931
To show Q.931 trace during a call you need to issue the command ‘syslog on’.One can get traces
for RAS, Q.931 and H.245 with this command. It is a complex trace and requires an extensive
knowledge in H.323 signalling to be understood.
Ping
Ping is used to see if the system is able to reach a specific IP-address, using a mechanism in IP
called ICMP. If the system is unable to register to its gatekeeper, or if it is unable to dial a specific
endpoint, one can use ping to see if there is at least an IP-route to the gatekeeper or to the
endpoint. In case you have problems, one would first ping the default gateway, then the
gatekeeper, and then the other endpoint.
Traceroute
Traceroute does exactly that; it traces the route an IP-packet takes to reach its destination and
displays all router hops. Traceroute is very useful for seeing exactly where there is a routing-
problem in the IP-network, and for checking where transport-delay is introduced.
Layer 4 Ports used in H.323 calls
The layer 4 ports used by the system in a H.323 call can be defined as follows:
Dynamic: The ports are allocated at random from 2048 to 65535.
Static: Will use the predefined layer 4 ports listed in the tables below.
Point-to-point + Duo Video
Function Port Type
Gatekeeper Discovery (RAS) 1719 UDP
Q.931 Call Setup 1720 TCP
H.245 Range 5555-5565 TCP
Video Range 2326-2341 UDP
Audio Range 2326-2341 UDP
Data/FECC Range 2326-2341 UDP
MultiSite + Duo Video
255
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Function Port Type
Gatekeeper Discovery (RAS) 1719 UDP
Q.931 Call Setup 1720 TCP
H.245* Range 5555-5565 TCP
Video Range 2326-2405 UDP
Audio Range 2326-2405 UDP
Data/FECC Range 2326-2405 UDP
(*) Note: While using MultiSite, if a site is disconnected and reconnected without terminating the
entire conference, the next site to be connected will have a H.245 port outside of the specified
range. If this functionality is required through a firewall, the range of TCP ports can be extended
past 5564. However, if a site is disconnected and reconnected, without ending the conference
enough times one can quickly end up outside of this range again.
256
Appendices
Appendix 15
System Upgrade
Before starting the software upgrade of the TANDBERG MXP system, please make sure to have
the new software file, (for instance s050000F30.pkg) and the Release Key for this software
available. Your TANDBERG Partner will provide this for you.
All options and settings will automatically be stored when upgrading, so no backup is necessary.
If the system upgrade process is aborted before it's complete, the system will work as normal with
the original software
The TANDBERG MXP systems can be upgraded in three different ways;
Using the web interface
Using FTP
Using ISDN
A) To upgrade using the the web interface, please do the following steps:
1. Type the IP address of the TANDBERG MXP system that shall be upgraded (for instance
10.0.8.77) in a standard browser, such as Internet Explorer 6.0.
2. The web interface of the codec will then be displayed. Select the ‘System Configuration’ tab on
top of the page, and then the sub-tab ‘Upgrade’.
The following page will now be displayed:
257
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Figure 1
3. Enter the Release key in the ‘Release Key’ field and press the ‘Install Software’ button.
A new page will now be displayed:
258
Appendices
Figure 2
4. Type in the path to where the new software file is stored, or select the file by using the ‘Browse’
button.
5. The progress for the sw upgrade can be tracked by pressing the ‘telnet’ link in the help text box
BEFORE pressing the install button. Please note that this is not a necessary action for a
successfull software upgrade. An indication of the software upgrade progress will also be shown
on the display of the system
6. Press the ‘Install’ button to start the software upgrade.
When the software upgrade is complete, you need to click on the restart button and press OK to
restart the system in order to activate the new software. Once verified, the system will reboot
once more to complete the upload of all systems parameters kept from the old software revision.
7. To verify that the new sw is installed, refresh the page shown in figure1 after restart. The
‘Software Version’ should now show the new software version uploaded to the system. The same
information can also be found in the menu on the system under ‘Control Panel/System
Information’.
B) Upgrading using FTP:
1. Copy the new software file to a folder on your harddisk, for instance c:\software.
2. Open a DOS window, and go to the folder where the new software is stored.
3. Type ftp <ip address of the TANDBERG MXP system>.
Type in the supplied ‘Release Key’ as user.
4.
Type in your IP password (defa
Software version F3
D13355.04
This document is not to be reproduced in whole or in part without permission in writing from:
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Trademarks and Copyright
All rights reserved. This document contains information that is proprietary to TANDBERG. No part
of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, electronically, mechanically, by photocopying, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of TANDBERG. Nationally and internationally recognized trademarks and
trade names are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.
Contains iType™ from Agfa Monotype Corporation.
Disclaimer
The information in this document is furnished for informational purposes only, is subject to
change without prior notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by TANDBERG. The
information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable; however TANDBERG
assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this
document, nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties resulting from its
use. No license is granted under any patents or patent rights of TANDBERG.
This document was written by the Research and Development Department of TANDBERG,
Norway. We are committed to maintain a high level of quality in all our documentation. Towards
this effort, we welcome you to Contact us with comments and suggestions regarding the content
and structure of this document.
COPYRIGHT © 2005, TANDBERG
ii
User Manual
Environmental Issues
Thank you for buying a product, which contributes to a reduction in pollution, and thereby helps
save the environment. Our products reduce the need for travel and transport and thereby reduce
pollution. Our products have either none or few consumable parts (chemicals, toner, gas, paper)
and low energy consuming products.
Battery handling
Batteries for the Remote Control are Long Life and Alkaline batteries saving the environment;
please follow guidelines on the packing material for handling and disposal of the batteries.
Waste handling
There is no need to send any products or material back to TANDBERG as there are no
consumables to take care of. Please contact your local dealer for information on local waste
handling and recycling of electronic products.
Production of products
Our factories employ the most efficient environmental methods for reducing waste and pollution
and ensuring the products are recyclable.
Digital User Manuals
TANDBERG is pleased to announce that it has replaced the printed versions of its User Manuals
with a digital CD version. Instead of a range of different user manuals, there is now one CD which
can be used with all TANDBERG products, in a variety of languages. The environmental benefits
of this are significant. The CDs are recyclable and the savings on paper are huge. A simple web-
based search feature helps users directly access the information they need. In addition, the
TANDBERG video systems now have an intuitive on-screen help function, which provides a
range of useful features and tips. If desired, the user manuals on the CD can still be printed
locally.
iii
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Operator Safety Summary
For your protection, please read these safety instructions completely before operating the
equipment and keep this manual for future reference. The information in this summary is intended
for operators. Carefully observe all warnings, precautions and instructions both on the apparatus
and in the operating instructions.
Equipment Markings
The lightning flash symbol within an
equilateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltages” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical
shock.
The exclamation mark within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions
accompanying the equipment.
Warnings
Water and moisture - Do not operate the equipment under or near water - for example
near a bathtub, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool
or in areas with high humidity.
Cleaning - Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet before cleaning or polishing. Do not
use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a lint-free cloth lightly moistened with water
for cleaning the exterior of the apparatus.
Ventilation - Do not block any of the ventilation openings of the apparatus. Install in
accordance with the installation instructions. Never cover the slots and openings with a
cloth or other material. Never install the apparatus near heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Grounding or Polarization - Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A
grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or third
prong is provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician.
Power-Cord Protection - Route the power cord so as to avoid it being walked on or
pinched by items placed upon or against it, paying particular attention to the plugs,
receptacles, and the point where the cord exits from the apparatus.
Attachments - Only use attachments as recommended by the manufacturer.
Accessories - Most systems should only be used with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Lightning - Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods
of time.
iv
User Manual
ISDN cables - CAUTION - To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger
telecommunication line cord.
Servicing - Do not attempt to service the apparatus yourself as opening or removing
covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other hazards, and will void the
warranty. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Damaged Equipment - Unplug the apparatus from the outlet and refer servicing to
qualified personnel under the following conditions:
When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed
If liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus
If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture
If the apparatus has been subjected to excessive shock by being dropped, or the
cabinet has been damaged
If the apparatus fails to operate in accordance with the operating instructions
v
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Contact us
If you have any questions, comments or suggestions, please see the Online Support service at
www.tandberg.net.
It is also possible to send a fax or mail to the attention of:
Product and Sales Support
TANDBERG
P.O. Box 92
1325 Lysaker
Norway
Tel: +47 67 125 125
Fax: +47 67 125 234
vi
User Manual
Table of Contents
1 Introduction............................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 At a Glance ............................................................................................................................ 4
1.2 Menu Structure ...................................................................................................................... 8
2 Installation .............................................................................................................................. 10
2.1 Unpacking and Mounting ..................................................................................................... 11
2.2 Connecting Cables............................................................................................................... 13
2.3 Monitor Configuration........................................................................................................... 15
2.4 System Configuration........................................................................................................... 16
3 General Use ........................................................................................................................... 19
3.1 The Welcome Screen .......................................................................................................... 20
3.2 Using the Remote Control.................................................................................................... 21
3.2.1 Navigation ................................................................................................................ 23
3.2.2 Selfview.................................................................................................................... 24
3.2.3 Layout ...................................................................................................................... 25
3.2.4 Mic Off...................................................................................................................... 26
3.2.5 Volume + and - ........................................................................................................ 27
3.2.6 Number and Letter keys........................................................................................... 28
3.2.7 Touch Tones ............................................................................................................ 29
3.3 On-screen Indicators............................................................................................................ 30
3.4 Using the Menu .................................................................................................................... 32
3.5 Make a Call .......................................................................................................................... 34
3.5.1 Place Video Call....................................................................................................... 35
3.5.2 Place Telephone Call............................................................................................... 36
3.5.3 Add Call ................................................................................................................... 37
3.5.4 Call Settings ............................................................................................................. 39
3.5.5 Streaming................................................................................................................. 40
3.6 Answer an incoming call ...................................................................................................... 42
3.7 End Call................................................................................................................................ 43
3.8 Standby ................................................................................................................................ 44
3.8.1 Delay Standby for 1 hour ......................................................................................... 45
3.8.2 Delay Standby for 3 hours ....................................................................................... 46
3.8.3 Do Not Disturb ......................................................................................................... 47
3.9 Phone Book.......................................................................................................................... 48
3.9.1 Call Log .................................................................................................................... 50
3.9.2 My Contacts ............................................................................................................. 51
3.9.3 Global Contacts ....................................................................................................... 58
3.10 Camera Control.................................................................................................................. 62
3.10.1 Move Camera .......................................................................................................... 63
3.10.2 Far End Control........................................................................................................ 64
3.10.3 Camera Presets ....................................................................................................... 65
3.10.4 TANDBERG Tracker................................................................................................ 66
3.10.5 Picture Control ......................................................................................................... 67
3.10.6 Camera Tracking ..................................................................................................... 68
3.11 Presentation ....................................................................................................................... 69
3.11.1 Presentation Key...................................................................................................... 70
3.11.2 Presentation Menu................................................................................................... 71
3.11.3 PC Presenter (DVI/XGA Input) ................................................................................ 72
3.11.4 PC Soft Presenter and VNC .................................................................................... 73
3.11.5 Dual Stream (DuoVideoTF/H.239)........................................................................... 74
3.11.6 Take New Snapshot................................................................................................. 75
3.11.7 Display Snapshot ..................................................................................................... 76
vii
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.12 Conference Services.......................................................................................................... 77
3.12.1 Request Floor and Release Floor............................................................................ 80
3.12.2 Conference Layout................................................................................................... 81
3.12.3 Terminal Names....................................................................................................... 82
3.12.4 Chair Control............................................................................................................ 83
3.12.5 Assign Floor and Release Floor from Participant .................................................... 84
3.12.6 View Site and End View........................................................................................... 85
3.12.7 Disconnect Participant ............................................................................................. 86
3.12.8 Terminate Meeting ................................................................................................... 87
3.12.9 More about MultiSite (embedded MCU) .................................................................. 88
3.13 Control Panel ..................................................................................................................... 90
3.13.1 Diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 91
3.13.2 Text Chat ............................................................................................................... 104
3.13.3 Audio Demo ........................................................................................................... 105
3.13.4 Administrator Settings............................................................................................ 106
3.13.5 Restart ................................................................................................................... 107
3.13.6 User Guide............................................................................................................. 108
4 Administrator Settings .......................................................................................................... 109
4.1 General Settings ................................................................................................................ 110
4.1.1 Language ............................................................................................................... 111
4.1.2 System Name ........................................................................................................ 112
4.1.3 Dual Monitor........................................................................................................... 113
4.1.4 Auto Answer........................................................................................................... 114
4.1.5 Max Call Length ..................................................................................................... 115
4.1.6 Phone Book Settings ............................................................................................. 116
4.1.7 Permissions ........................................................................................................... 117
4.1.8 Screen Settings...................................................................................................... 119
4.1.9 Software Options ................................................................................................... 124
4.2 Menu Settings .................................................................................................................... 125
4.2.1 Menu Timeout In Call............................................................................................. 126
4.2.2 Welcome Menu ...................................................................................................... 127
4.2.3 Welcome Picture.................................................................................................... 128
4.2.4 Logo ....................................................................................................................... 129
4.2.5 Menu on TV ........................................................................................................... 130
4.2.6 Menu on PC ........................................................................................................... 131
4.2.7 Balloon Help........................................................................................................... 132
4.2.8 Display Welcome Text ........................................................................................... 133
4.2.9 Welcome Text ........................................................................................................ 134
4.2.10 Administrator Password ......................................................................................... 135
4.3 Presentation Settings......................................................................................................... 136
4.3.1 Presentation Start .................................................................................................. 137
4.3.2 H.239...................................................................................................................... 138
4.3.3 Startup Video Source............................................................................................. 139
4.3.4 Presentation Source .............................................................................................. 140
4.3.5 Snapshot Source ................................................................................................... 141
4.3.6 Auto-Display Snapshot .......................................................................................... 142
4.3.7 PIP Appearance..................................................................................................... 143
4.3.8 PIP Placing ............................................................................................................ 144
4.3.9 VNC Settings ......................................................................................................... 145
4.4 Call Quality......................................................................................................................... 146
4.4.1 Video Algorithm...................................................................................................... 147
4.4.2 Audio Algorithm...................................................................................................... 148
4.4.3 AAC-LD 128kbps (stereo audio)............................................................................ 149
4.4.4 Natural Video ......................................................................................................... 150
4.4.5 Max Upstream Rate (kbps) .................................................................................... 151
4.4.6 Video Quality.......................................................................................................... 152
viii
User Manual
4.4.7 Default Call Settings .............................................................................................. 154
4.5 Audio .................................................................................................................................. 157
4.5.1 Inputs ..................................................................................................................... 158
4.5.2 Outputs .................................................................................................................. 160
4.5.3 Echo Control .......................................................................................................... 161
4.5.4 Stereo Settings ...................................................................................................... 162
4.5.5 Audio Levelling (AGC) ........................................................................................... 164
4.5.6 Alert Tones and Volume ........................................................................................ 165
4.6 Video .................................................................................................................................. 166
4.6.1 Camera Tracking Mode ......................................................................................... 167
4.6.2 MCU Status Line.................................................................................................... 168
4.6.3 Floor to Full Screen................................................................................................ 169
4.6.4 Web Snapshots...................................................................................................... 170
4.6.5 MultiSite Picture Mode ........................................................................................... 171
4.6.6 Video Name ........................................................................................................... 173
4.7 Security .............................................................................................................................. 174
4.7.1 Encryption .............................................................................................................. 175
4.7.2 Encryption Mode .................................................................................................... 176
4.7.3 Passwords ............................................................................................................. 177
4.8 Network .............................................................................................................................. 178
4.8.1 ISDN/External/Leased E1/T1................................................................................. 179
4.8.2 ISDN-BRI Settings ................................................................................................. 180
4.8.3 ISDN-PRI Settings ................................................................................................. 182
4.8.4 Leased E1/T1 Settings........................................................................................... 185
4.8.5 External Network Settings ..................................................................................... 186
4.8.6 H.331 Settings ....................................................................................................... 187
4.8.7 LAN Settings .......................................................................................................... 188
4.8.8 Network Profiles..................................................................................................... 203
4.8.9 Data Port ................................................................................................................ 204
4.9 Restore Default Settings .................................................................................................... 205
5 Peripheral Equipment........................................................................................................... 206
5.1 Interfaces ........................................................................................................................... 207
5.1.1 Video ...................................................................................................................... 207
5.1.2 Audio ...................................................................................................................... 209
5.1.3 Network .................................................................................................................. 210
5.1.4 Data port ................................................................................................................ 215
5.2 Document Camera............................................................................................................. 216
5.3 DVD / VCR ......................................................................................................................... 217
5.4 Additional Cameras............................................................................................................ 218
5.5 Additional Microphones...................................................................................................... 220
5.6 The TANDBERG DNAM .................................................................................................... 222
5.7 Stereo Speaker Kit............................................................................................................. 224
5.8 Telephone Add-On............................................................................................................. 225
5.9 Dual Monitor....................................................................................................................... 226
5.10 XGA Monitors and Projectors .......................................................................................... 227
5.11 VESA Display Power Management ................................................................................. 228
5.12 Digital Monitor Power Management................................................................................. 229
5.13 Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) ................................................................... 230
6 Appendices........................................................................................................................... 232
7 Index..................................................................................................................................... 267
8 Glossary ............................................................................................................................... 269
ix
1 Introduction
The TANDBERG 6000 MXP provides high-end performance features, large monitors and
precision audio. This creates a collaborative meeting environment for medium to large-sized
meeting rooms.
Audio Quality
High-performance audio provides a richer, more complete visual communication experience. The
MPEG4 AAC-LD standard is used to provide true standards-based CD-quality audio.
The Digital Natural Audio Module (DNAM), specifically designed for videoconferencing, provides
TM
higher fidelity sound for a natural sound image, featuring 250W of power.
Users can record and send stereo audio from presentation and playback sources using PCs,
DVDs and VCRs.
NEW Enhanced packet loss handling in the audio decoder
NEW Improved lip synchronization
Video Quality
Features which ensure high quality video includes:
Natural Video which provides 60 fields per second true interlaced picture.
TF
Support for H.264 in MultiSite, DuoVideo/H.239 and encryption.
SXGA input and 2 x XGA output through DVI-I (analog or digital).
WAVE II (Wide Angle View) Camera that delivers the widest angle of view in the industry.
H.264 video compression up to 2Mbps.
Support native 16:9 Wide XGA monitors by increasing the resolution to 1280x768
(WXGA).
Automatic use of WXGA format when ”VGA Monitor Format” is set to Wide.
Network
The system supports videoconferencing via both IP and ISDN networks. The bandwidth
capabilities are:
up to 4Mbps* on IP
up to 2Mbps* on ISDN
up to 6Mbps* IP in MultiSite.
SIP support, for both point-to-point and MultiSite*.
If channels are dropped during a videoconferencing session, downspeeding automatically
TF
maintains connections without interruption.
NEW Enhanced packet loss handling and downspeeding TF
NEW Remote software upgrade over ISDN
Security
Secure Conference provides embedded encryption for both Point-to-Point and MultiSite call and
TF
ensures both privacy and security.
1
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
The system is delivered with integrated Expressway™ firewall traversal technology. When used
together with a TANDBERG Border Controller it enables:
Secure and seamless traversal of ANY firewall.
No missing features when traversing the firewall – works with H.264, MPEG4 audio,
encryption.
Outside systems, such as home offices, to be part of the enterprise dial plan.
Dialing to systems by URI, e.g. user@company.com.
NEW Standards based H.235 authentication towards Border Controller / Gatekeeper
MultiSite*
TF
The embedded MultiSite functionality can cater for up to 6 video sites and 5 audio sites and
supports screen layouts such as VoiceSwitched, AutoSplit, 4 Split and 5+1 Split. The MultiSite
TF
functionality supports any combination of ISDN and IP participants in a conference.
A superior quality and reliability is ensured by:
Supporting DuoVideo/H.239, encryption and H.264.
Rate matching and Transcoding which supports different call rates for all sites in a
TF TF
MultiSite.
The TANDBERG videoconferencing system can also be used purely as an audio-bridge (with an
ISDN connection).
Presentations
The Natural Presenter Package* (NPP) makes it possible to run presentations and comprises:
Digital Clarity which provides presentations of exceptionally high quality resolution video.
TF
Duo Video /H.239 which allows participants at the far end to simultaneously watch a
TF
presenter on one screen and a live presentation on the adjoining screen.
PC Presenter which is an easily accessible PC connection over a wired VGA cable that
TF
supports up to SXGA resolution.
PC SoftPresenter which shows PC images via the LAN connection supporting XGA
TF
resolution.
Users can display video and presentations in the best layout based on the situation. Supported
screen layouts are:
Picture in Picture
Picture outside Picture
Side by Side
PC zoom:
The PC image is transferred in native resolution and may be controlled as a camera with
zoom and pan/tilt to get SXGA resolution.
NEW Auto Layout
The system will automatically choose the best layout for the call
NEW New large Picture outside Picture layout for wide monitors
User interfaces
A web-interface is provided to handle:
Text chat/closed captioning
2
Introduction
System management, diagnostics and software uploads
Streaming – which allows broadcasting of audio/video via an IP network
The On-Screen Menu:
Easy interface for first-time users with symbols and descriptions
Builds upon the familiar current interface
True Localization with enhanced language support and international customization:
Enabling Asian and non-Latin character text input on Web and API for local language in
Phone Book and System Names
NEW Usability upgrade and improved user feedback
Improved Phone Book
On-screen Warnings and Network Statistics information
NEW Including support for Thai and Finnish On-Screen menu language
The remote control has a simplified look and feel, auto system wake-up and large, easy-to-read
keys.
Interoperability
The TANDBERG 6000 MXP is worldwide compatible with other standards-based
videoconferencing systems.
* - optional feature. To check which options are installed, select Control Panel - System Information in the menu.
- TANDBERG First
TF
3
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
1.1 At a Glance
WAVE II Camera
The main camera is mounted on top of the product. The main camera includes a high quality
color camera with a fast pan/tilt/zoom action. The main camera is controlled by the system’s
infrared remote control and operates pan/tilt, focus and zoom. Up to fifteen camera positions can
be pre-stored using Camera Presets.
Monitors
4
Introduction
The main monitor displays the far-end and near-end videoconferencing sites in addition to the
menus and video from connected video sources. The second monitor displays selfview,
Snapshots and Duo Video.
Note that the TANDBERG 6000 MXP is shipped with different monitors depending on product
variants and which country the system is shipped to. Hence, the pictures/drawings used in this
manual might differ from the actual monitor model shipped with the system.
Codec
The codec is the heart of the system. Its main task is the compression of outgoing video, audio
and data, the transmission of this information to the far end and the decompression of the
incoming information - the name codec comes from a combination of the two words compression
and decompression.
Cabinet
The cabinet is easily movable with large wheels and handles. The codec is located inside the
cabinet. Below the codec is an accessories drawer for storing the remote control, the user manual
and other accessories. Push gently on the drawer and it will pop out. The Digital Natural Audio
Module (DNAM) is mounted above the codec. Below the codec there is room for additional
equipment, e.g. a VCR or DVD player.
5
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Remote Control
The remote control is used to control all functions of the system. If the screen saver is activated
(black monitor), touching the remote control will automatically wake up the system. The remote
control uses 4 AAA batteries. The system will tell you when batteries are running low. Change the
batteries at the back of the remote control.
The reach of the remote control signal is 20 meters (65 ft). For users sitting in an open plan office,
this can cause problems. Use the little, white switch placed in the batteries compartment to
change the reach of the signal from 20 meters to 2 meters (6.5 ft). This will prevent you from
unintentionally controlling another video system, when you control your own system.
Microphone
The high quality table microphone is designed to be placed on a table during a videoconference.
Up to three microphones can be connected. The ideal location for the microphone is on a flat
surface at least 2m (6.5 ft) from the front of the system. The microphone cable should always
point towards the system. The system will automatically equalize sound levels. Loud and soft
voices are picked up and transmitted to the far end at approximately the same level.
6
Introduction
Digital Natural Audio Module (DNAM)
The Digital Natural Audio Module (DNAM) is designed to enhance the audio quality during a
videoconference. The DNAM provides natural sounding audio, as if the person or another sound
source in the conference is present in the same room as you.
The DNAM is a frequency-compensated sound system optimized for voice and other sounds that
appears in modern videoconferencing. It is designed and dedicated specifically for
videoconferencing requirements. The use of the highest quality speaker elements as well as
proper amplifier- and software techniques minimizes signal distortion. The monitor- or television
speakers are disabled, and the sound is completely handled by the DNAM. The system will
automatically detect the DNAM and optimize the audio output. Once detected the audio output
will be in digital format (S/PDIF). The DNAM supports both analog and digital input.
The DNAM amplifier is mounted in the rear of the speaker cabinet.
TANDBERG Tracker
The tracker is a small infrared remote control device made
to steer the camera to any desired location within the
room. Typically, several trackers would be used with each
system.
Each tracker has two buttons:
One Single person button to point the camera at a
specific person/location.
One Group button to point the camera at all
participants.
Beneath the battery in the tracker, there is a switch, which
can be set to 16 different positions between 0 and F. For
camera preset 10 to 15, the numbers A to F should be
selected.
For more information, contact your local TANDBERG
representative.
7
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
1.2 Menu Structure
The menu structure is divided in two. The Main Menu is available for all users and contains all
functionality of the system. The Administrator Menu contains all the settings of the system. The
Administrator Settings are accessible from the Main Menu by selecting Control Panel and
Administrator Settings. Making changes to the Administrator Settings will change the behavior of
the system. The menu structure for Main Menu and Administrator Settings is shown below.
8
Introduction
9
2 Installation
Precautions:
Never install communication wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install jacks for communication cables in wet locations unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
Never touch uninstalled communication wires or terminals unless the telephone line has
been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying communication lines.
Avoid using communication equipment (other than a cordless type) during an electrical
storm. There may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning.
Do not use the communication equipment to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Always connect the product to an earthed socket outlet.
The socket outlet shall be installed near to the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Never install cables without first switching the power OFF.
1TR6 network type is not approved for connection directly to the telecommunications
network. This network type is only to be used behind a PABX.
X.21 network type is not approved for connection directly to the telecommunications
network. This network type is only to be used together with already approved equipment,
and is not meant for direct connections to the telecommunication networks.
V.35/RS-449/RS-366 network type is not approved for connection directly to the
telecommunications network. This network type is only to be used together with already
approved equipment, and is not intended for direct connection to the telecommunication
networks.
This product complies with directives: LVD 73/23/EC, EMC 89/366/EEC, R&TTE 99/5/EEC
1
Installation
2.1 Unpacking and Mounting
Unpacking the system
To avoid damage to the unit during transportation the system is delivered as separate
components:
Cabinet including DNAM speaker system
High quality monitor, one or two, depending on configuration. XGA monitors are optional.
Inside the cabinet you will find the accessories box, which will contain the following:
WAVE II Camera
Table Microphone
Remote Control and Tracker with batteries
Documentation
Mounting of the base
Place the top plate on top of the cabinet and secure it.
Place the monitor on the top plate.
Take the camera and remove the plastic backing from the double-sided tape-pads on the
base of the unit. Place the camera centrally, on top of the monitor close to the front. If the
system has two monitors, place the camera on the left monitor as this is where the
menus and incoming picture will be displayed.
11
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Note! The camera should be aligned with the front edge of the monitor to ensure that the IR-
sensor in the camera can pick up signals from the remote control.
12
Installation
2.2 Connecting Cables
All cables needed in standard configuration are already connected to the codec. Connect these
cables to their respective parts of the system as shown in the figure below.
1. Power cables
Connect the system power cable and monitor power cable to an electrical distribution socket.
2. Monitor cables
Connect the S-video cable to the input on your monitor as shown in the figure above.. For
Scart-monitors, use the Scart-adapter. Only a video connection cable is required, as the Digital
Natural Audio Module will provide the audio output.
3. Microphone cables
Connect the microphone cable to the microphones.
4. Camera cable
13
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Connect the camera cable labeled “Main Cam” from the S-Video output on the camera to the S-
Video input “Main Cam” on the codec. Connect also the control cable labeled “Camera Control”
between the RJ-45 on the camera, and the Dataport 2 on the codec.
5a. ISDN cables - using BRI interface
Connect the ISDN cables to the ISDN sockets (S/T interface) provided by the network provider.
The main ISDN number will be that number associated with the socket to which ISDN cable
number 1 has been connected.
Note! The system does not have a built-in network terminator. If wall socket provides an
ISDN U-interface, an NT1 between your system and the ISDN line is needed, see Appendix
10 for more information.
5b. ISDN cable - using the PRI interface
If using the PRI interface, the E1/T1 cable should be connected to a CSU (Channel Service
Unit). ). It is recommended that a CSU be used between the system and the PRI line from the
network provider, see Appendix 8.
5c. Other networks - using the External Network interface
If using other networks, see ISDN/External/Leased E1/T1 and Appendix 9.
6. LAN cable
To connect the system to a Local Area Network (LAN), connect the cable labelled "LAN
Ethernet" to a suitable Ethernet port on the LAN.
14
Installation
2.3 Monitor Configuration
Switch the system on by activating the power switch on the codec (located on the right hand side
at the rear of the codec). A green light is shown, located in the center on the front of the codec.
After the system has performed a self-test routine, the welcome menu will be displayed on the
monitor.
Monitor Configuration
Power on the monitor and use the monitor remote control to select the Audio/Video input used
(refer to your monitor manual). Remember to select S-video (S-VHS) input to avoid a black and
white picture.
15
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
2.4 System Configuration
The system must be configured for each installation. Configuration settings can be made via the
system menu. If an external IMUX or non-standard network is being used it may be necessary to
configure any associated external equipment.
Navigate through the menu system using the arrow keys and OK. Remember to press the Save
button on the bottom of each menu to save the changes. Press Cancel (x) to return to the
previous Menu. See General Use for more information about how to use the menus and the
remote control.
General configuration:
1. Open the General Settings menu
Press OK/Menu to open the Main Menu, if not already displayed. Select Control
Panel - Administrator Settings - General to open the General Settings menu.
2. Language
Press OK in the Language field and select the wanted language from the list.
3. System Name
Enter a name in the System Name field using the number keys on the remote control,
in the same way as with a mobile or cellular phone.
4. Dual Monitor
If using two monitors Dual Monitor should be set to "On". If using one monitor, set
Dual Monitor to "Off".
16
Installation
5. Auto Answer, Max Call Length, Phone Book Settings and Permissions
Leave Auto Answer, Max Call Length, Access code and Permissions unchanged if no
special needs are required. See chapter General Settings for more information.
6. Screen Settings
When using wide screen (16:9) monitors, set TV Monitor Format to Wide (16:9).
TANDBERG also recommends setting Picture Layout to Picture outside Picture when
using 16:9 monitors. Picture outside Picture provides a display layout optimized for
wide screen monitors. The display layout may be changed at any time using the
Layout button on the remote control.
7. Software Options
To activate all options for the system, a new option key must be entered in the
Software Options menu (see paperwork accompanying the system). The Presenter
option key should be entered under “New Option Key”. Any bandwidth option key
should be entered under “New Bandwidth Key”. For more information on these
options, please contact your TANDBERG representative.
8. Save changes
Remember to save any changes made in a menu by selecting the Save button on the
menu line and pressing OK.
Network configuration:
1. Open the Network menu
Press OK/Menu to open the Main Menu, if not already displayed. Select Control
Panel - Administrator Settings - Network to open the Network menu.
2. ISDN configuration
Set the Network type to the desired network. Specify the settings for the selected
network in the relevant menu. Enabled but unused ISDN lines (i.e. lines not active)
should be disabled. For details, follow the instructions in ISDN /External/Leased
E1/T1. See also the examples in Appendix 9: Connecting the system to the Switched
56 network and in Appendix 10: Connecting the system to ISDN using NT1 network
adapters.
3. LAN configuration
Select LAN Settings in the Network menu and specify the necessary LAN settings
according to the instructions from your LAN administrator. For details, follow the
instructions in LAN Settings. If there is an H.323 Gatekeeper present on your LAN,
refer to H.323 Settings as well.
17
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4. Network Profiles
Please refer to Network Profiles for details
5. Data Port
Please refer to Data Port for details
6. Save changes
Remember to save any changes made in the menu by selecting the Save button on
the Menu line and pressing OK.
18
3 General Use
Wake up the system
When the system is not in use, it is in standby mode and the screens are black. Wake up the
system by picking up the remote control. An incoming call or pressing any key on the remote
control will also wake up the system.
If the system does not respond:
Make sure that the system is switched on by using the On/Off switch located at the rear
of the Codec (see figure below).
Verify that your monitor is switched on. This is normally done by pushing the power
button on the front of the monitor depending on monitor type.
1
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.1 The Welcome Screen
When the system is switched on, the welcome screen will be displayed. The welcome screen
presents the menu and displays your main camera image in the background (main camera is
system default). The ISDN/IP numbers and the system name are displayed in the upper right
corner. The ISDN Number and IP Number are the dial-in numbers of the system.
The welcome screen provides you with the most important system information:
System Name
Your ISDN Number
Your IP Address or IP Number
Indications of Missed Calls or Warnings if any
It is possible to customize the text on the welcome screen. See Menu Settings for how to edit
welcome text.
20
General Use
3.2 Using the Remote Control
The system is controlled with a remote control. Think of the remote control as a mobile phone
with number keys and call keys. Use the arrow keys and OK to navigate the menu. The system’s
most commonly used functions are also accessible directly from the remote control.
The Infra Red (IR) sensor for the remote control is located in front of the WAVE II Camera. There
is also a second IR-sensor located in the front of the Codec itself, which will be automatically
enabled if the WAVE II Camera is not connected.
1. Mic Off turns your microphone on and
off, see Mic off.
2. Arrow keys are used for navigation in
the menu and for moving the camera*
when the menu is hidden, see
Navigation.
3. Volume + and – adjusts the Codec
volume only and not the monitor's
volume, see Volume + and -.
4. The Layout key toggles between full
screen and different display layouts, see
Layout.
5. Cancel takes you back one step in the
menu system. Use Cancel to delete
characters in an input field, see
Navigation.
6. Press the Call key to place a call, see
Make a Call.
7. Camera presets define specific camera
positions. Move the camera to the
desired position and press and hold a
number key for 1 second to save the
current camera position to that number
key. To activate a preset whilst in a call,
simply press and release that number
key, see Camera Presets.
8. Snapshot takes a snapshot of your video
only while you are in a call, see Take
New Snapshot.
9. The Presentation key switches to a
predefined presentation source. If the
Presentation key is held down for 1
second then the Presentation video
sources menu will appear, see
Presentation Key.
10. Press OK/Menu to show the menu and
to select menu items, see Navigation.
11. Use Zoom + and – to zoom the camera
in and out.*
21
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
12. Selfview displays your outgoing video.
Press Selfview again to turn selfview off,
see Selfview.
13. Use the Phone Book to store and recall
video contacts for easy placement of
calls, see Phone Book.
14. Use the red End Call key to end the
current call. Pressing this key when not
in a call will place the system in Standby
mode, see End Call and Standby.
15. Number/Letter keys function in the same
manner as with a mobile or cellular
phone, see Number and Letter keys.
16. Press Touch tones when you are in a
call and need to dial extension numbers
etc. (instead of presets). Press the
OK/Menu button to exit Touch Tones,
see Touch tones.
*This does not apply to all systems with small integrated cameras.
22
General Use
3.2.1 Navigation
Arrow keys and OK
Navigate in the menu with the arrow keys on the remote control. The
orange selector on screen shows the selected item. Press OK to select.
Cancel key
In the main menu, pressing Cancel (X) will hide the menu. If the menu is
hidden, bring it back with OK. In other menus, pressing Cancel (X) takes
you one step back. In an input field, pressing Cancel (X) will delete
characters/numbers to the left.
Back/Cancel button
The X button in the menu corresponds with the X key on the remote.
23
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.2.2 Selfview
The term “Selfview” means the outgoing image. In a normal call, using main camera, this is the
image of your self. The Selfview button toggles the images between Far End, Selfview and Dual
Video (if any).
How to use Selfview:
1. Outside a call, pressing the Selfview button will switch between the near end video and a
black screen on the main monitor.
2. In a point to point call, press the Selfview button once to switch from far end video to near
end video see a full screen picture of the outgoing video. Press Selfview again to go back
to normal.
3. In a point to point call with a dual video stream, the dual stream is displayed in the big
picture. Press the Selfview button to toggle to the Near End picture, then the Far End
picture, and finally back to the dual stream.
The above behaviour is similar for both single monitor systems and dual monitor systems.
Selfview applies for the main monitor.
24
General Use
3.2.3 Layout
The layout of the screen can either be shown as Picture in Picture (PIP) or Picture outside Picture
(POP) when displaying more than one video image. The behaviour of the Layout button is
dependent on the Picture Layout setting in Screen Settings.
3.2.3.1 Picture in Picture
When Picture Layout is set to PIP, the Layout button makes it possible to see a second image in
a smaller view in one of the corners of the screen. The second image will be placed on top of the
main image. The user can decide in which corner the second image is to be displayed.
3.2.3.2 Picture outside Picture
When Picture Layout is set to POP, the Layout button makes it possible to see up to three images
in a composition optimized for wide screens. The second image can be displayed either as a
side-by-side the main image (1+1) or smaller images next to the main image (1+2 and 1+3).
Press the Layout button once to get side-by-side view (1+1). Press again to get the layouts 1+2
and 1+3, and finally go back to full screen view. You can also go back to full screen directly by
pressing and holding Layout for 1 second. It is recommended to use Picture outside Picture for
wide screen monitor systems.
3.2.3.3 Auto Layout
The system will automatically choose the best layout for your call. The layouts vary depending on
how many participants there are and if you use a dual video source or not. You can however
always change layout manually with the Layout button. Auto Layout applies when you open or
close a dual stream, or add or disconnect participants.
Auto Layout also includes the former automatic PIP. That implies that PIP will automatically be
shown when suitable, e.g. to display selfview when you move your near end camera. The
automatic PIP times out after a couple of seconds.
If Auto Layout is Off you will get no automatic layout changes during a call and the user must
manually control the images with the Layout button. Auto Layout is default On. To turn Auto
Layout Off, go to Screen Settings.
25
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.2.4 Mic Off
To mute the microphone during a call, press the Mic off button. An on-screen indicator appears in
the upper right corner when the microphone is off. In a call, if audio is detected, the on-screen
symbol will start to flash. Pressing the Mic off button one more time will activate the microphone
again.
Note that Mic off will mute all microphone inputs and audio 4 input, but will not mute audio from
the AUX and VCR inputs.
When an incoming call is answered, the microphone may be in the off state because the Auto
Answer setting is On+Mic off, see Auto Answer. The icon will start to flash when you start
speaking. Remember to turn the microphone on before a meeting.
26
General Use
3.2.5 Volume + and -
Press the Volume key to adjust the volume level of the codec only and not the monitor. An on-
screen indicator will show the current level.
27
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.2.6 Number and Letter keys
Pressing a number key when outside a call will bring up the call menu. When in a call, the
number keys are used for Camera Presets. Press a number and go to the corresponding Camera
Preset (see Camera Presets). However, when having an input field where numbers are required,
the system automatically goes to number mode and numbers can be dialed with the number keys
as usual.
When in an input field where letters are required, the system automatically goes to letter mode.
Writing letters works like on a mobile phone. Press the key that corresponds to your desired
letter. Press the key as many times as needed to get the right letter. Change to lower or back to
upper case letters with the a/A key, and space with the 0 _ key.
To write numbers in a text input field, press the button through all the letters. Press once more
and the number will appear.
Example: How do I write "System 123" in the System Name input field (in General in
Administrator Settings)?
Press the 7-key four times to get an "S".
Press the #-key once to switch between upper case and lower case letters.
Press the 9-key three times to get a "y".
Press the 7-key four times to get an "s".
Press the 8-key once to get a "t".
Press the 3-key twice to get an "e".
Press the 6-key once to get an "m".
Press the 0-key once to get space.
Press the 1-key three times to get a "1".
Press the 2-key four times to get a "2".
Press the 3-key four times to get a "3".
28
General Use
3.2.7 Touch Tones
If wanting to dial extension numbers during a call, press the Touch tones button to activate the
number keys, otherwise the number keys will activate the corresponding camera presets. An
indicator will tell that Touch tones are enabled. Finish with OK to exit Touch tone mode.
29
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.3 On-screen Indicators
The system has a number of icons signaling different settings:
Microphone Off
This indicator is shown when the microphone is turned off. Press the Mic off
button again to turn the microphone back on, see Mic Off for details.
Volume Off
This indicator is shown when the volume is turned off. Press Volume + to turn the
volume back on, see Volume + and - for details.
Secure Conference, AES
This double padlock indicator is shown when AES encryption (Secure
Conference) is active, see Security for details.
Secure Conference, DES
This padlock indicator is shown when DES encryption (Secure Conference) is
active, see Security for details.
Not Secure Conference
This open padlock indicator is shown during the initialization phase for AES or
DES encryption. During this period the call is not secure, see Security for details.
Warning
This indicates that the system has detected a warning. Select the icon and press
OK to see details on the warning. Please see Warnings for a list of possible
warnings.
Bad Network
This indicator appears if the system detects network anomalies like packet loss,
jitter etc., during a call. Open the menu by pressing the OK/Menu button and
select the warnings icon too see details.
Floor
This indicator is shown when you are displayed in full screen in a multipoint
conference, see Request Floor and Release Floor for details.
30
General Use
Telephone
This indicates that there is a telephone participant in the conference. The
displayed number indicates how many telephone participants there are in the
conference.
31
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.4 Using the Menu
Main menu outside a call and in a call.
Press the Menu button on the remote control to display the menu. The menu contains all
functions needed in order to control the system.
The menu contains the following items:
32
General Use
Make a Call/Add Another Call
Standby/End Call
Camera Control
Presentation
Conference Services
Control Panel
Close
See Menu Structure for a full overview of the menu.
The functions of the menu are displayed as icons. The currently selected icon is marked by an
orange square, and the name of the corresponding function is displayed on the line above, see
the figure above.
Press the OK button to activate the current selected function.
The menu automatically times out after 15 seconds if not used, see Menu timeout. Press the
Menu button to bring it back. It is also possible to hide the menu manually by pressing the Cancel
button on the remote control or select the Close icon in the menu.
* Systems with no Camera Control icon available may have a Far End Control icon present when in a call and Far End
Control possible.
33
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.5 Make a Call
Display the call menu by either:
1. Select Make a Call from the menu, or
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control
The TANDBERG system can make both video calls and telephone calls.
Call Settings specifies the quality of the call. It is possible to alter the default call settings for the
current call if required. The Default Call Settings are defined in Control Panel - Administrator
Settings - Call Quality - Default Call Settings.
It is possible to start streaming from this menu.
For setting up a MultiSite conference, see Add Call for more details.
34
General Use
3.5.1 Place Video Call
In the Make a Call menu enter the Dial Number either:
1. Manually, or
2. Select the book symbol in order to display the Phone Book and select a conference
participant.
When dialing manually, toggle between ABC/abc by pressing the # button on the remote control
and between abc/123 by holding the # button for one second. Use a star as separator in IP
addresses. If a system is registered on a gatekeeper or border controller with DNS support, there
are several ways to call into the system:
<IP address>
<E.164>
<H.323 ID>
<H.323 ID>@<domain>
<E.164>@<domain>
See H.323 Settings for details.
Place the call by either:
1. Press OK on the remote control so that the Place Video Call icon is selected, and press
OK once again, or
2. Use the arrow button on the remote control to select the Place Video Call icon and press
OK, or
3. Press the green call button on the remote control.
Note that the call will be set up as a telephone call if the Call Type in Call Settings is set to
Telephone Call. See Default Call Settings for more details.
35
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.5.2 Place Telephone Call
In the Make a Call menu enter the Dial Number either:
1. Manually, or
2. Select the book symbol in order to display the Phone Book and select a conference
participant, see Phone Book for details.
When entering a Dial Number manually, toggle between abc/123 by pressing the # button on the
remote control for one second. Use a star as separator in IP addresses.
Place the call by either:
1. Press OK on the remote control, select the Place Telephone Call icon and press OK once
again, or
2. Use the arrow button on the remote control to select the Place Telephone Call icon and
press OK.
When dialing a telephone number and pressing the green Call button on the remote control, the
system will in most cases automatically interpret the number as a telephone number and not a
video number. The interpretation can sometimes take a little while and it is faster to use the Place
Telephone Call button in the menu.
See Default Call Settings for more details.
36
General Use
3.5.3 Add Call
(optional feature)
Conference systems with built-in MultiSite can handle up to 6 video calls and 5 telephone calls
simultaneously.
It is possible to both set up a conference with many participants and also add participants during
a conference.
Set up a conference with two or more participants
In the Make a Call menu enter the Dial Number either:
1. Manually, or
2. Select the book symbol in order to display the Phone Book and select a conference
participant, see Phone Book for details. It is also possible to select a predefined MultiSite
entry, see New MultiSite Contact.
3. Press OK on the remote control.
Add another participant to the conference by either:
1. Select the Add Video Call icon if the next participant is using a video system, and press
OK, or
2. Select the Add Telephone Call icon if the next participant is using a telephone system,
and press OK.
A new entry is now displayed in the call list. Enter the number as described above.
It is also possible to set up a list of all the wanted conference participants by selecting the Add
Video Calls and Add Telephone Calls the wanted number of times, and enter their numbers
afterwards.
Place a MultiSite call:
1. If the call is a mixed conference with both video and telephone participants, select the
Place Video Call icon, or
2. If the call is a conference with telephone participants only, select the Place Telephone
Call icon.
Add participant(s) during a conference
Display the call menu during a call by either:
1. Select Make a Call from the menu, or
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control
Enter the new participants in the same way as described above.
37
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
38
General Use
3.5.4 Call Settings
The Call Settings specifies the quality of the call. Each call will be set up with the Default Call
Settings if the settings are not altered. In this case the field is named Default Call Settings. If the
settings for some reason are altered for the current participant in the current call, the name of the
field will be changed to reflect this.
Usually it is not necessary for the user to alter the settings.
The Default Call Settings are defined in Control Panel - Administrator Settings - Call Quality -
Default Call Settings.
When setting up a call in the Make a Call menu:
1. Select the Default Call Settings field for the participant and press the OK button on the
remote control.
2. Make desired changes to Call Type, Network, Bandwidth and Restrict (56k). If this is to
be the new default call settings, select Set as Default in the menu.
3. Select the OK icon and press the OK button on the remote control. The name of the Call
Settings field will reflect the changes made.
It is possible to make the changes made to the Call Settings default by selecting Set as Default
and OK. These settings will now be the default settings for all future manually dialed calls.
These settings are also available in the menu Control Panel - Administrator Settings - Call Quality
- Default Call Settings.
39
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.5.5 Streaming
Streaming lets you broadcast your meeting to participants on web. The web participants can
listen to the meeting, see snapshots, but not participate themselves. Snapshots of current stream
(if MultiSite), selfview, far end and DuoVideo streams are accessible via http. See Appendix 6 for
descriptions of the possible snapshot files.
How to use Streaming:
1. Choose Streaming from the Call Menu to open the Streaming menu.
2. Press Start Streaming from the menu line. An indicator will appear on the screen when
streaming is activated.
3. Press Stop Streaming to end streaming. Streaming will also end when you disconnect the
call.
4. Press Streaming Settings if you want to change streaming settings (see Streaming
Settings below)
How to view streaming from a PC:
1. After streaming is started, an easy way to view the streamed audio/video is to start your
Web browser and enter the IP-address of the streaming system.
2. After the Web page of the system is shown, click on Streaming. Alternatively, enter
http://<codec ip-address>/stream.sdp
Streaming Settings
Address Address is defined as the IP-address of a streaming client, streaming
server or a multicast address. Giving an address in the range 224.0.0.1-
239.255.255.255 will broadcast the stream to any host that has joined
the specified multicast group. Specifying normal broadcast address
255.255.255.255 will broadcast to any members on the LAN.
Address Port If several codec’s are streaming to the same IP-address, different ports
have to be used in order for the client to know which stream to receive.
If the first codec streams on port 2240 and the second codec on port
2250, the client has to specify which port to listen to. Video is
transmitted on the specified port; audio is transmitted on the port
number 4 above the specified video port, in this case 2244 and 2254.
TTL/Router This is used for streaming data to limit how many routers the data
Hops should pass before it is rejected. If TTL is set to 2, data will not traverse
more than 2 router hops.
40
General Use
Streaming Auto: Enables streaming of both local and far end video.
Source* Selection of which site to be streamed is done using voice
switching (the site that speaks is streamed).
Local: Only the local video will be streamed.
Remote: Only the far end video will be streamed.
Local and far end audio is always streamed.
Allow Remote On: Streaming can be started from external user interfaces like
Start the Web-browser or Telnet session.
Off: Streaming can only be started from the Video Conferencing
System User Interface using the remote control, or by using the
Data port. This will prevent activation of streaming using Web
browser or Telnet sessions. See also Password section below
Announcements On: The codec will announce to the network that it is streaming.
This enables a streaming client (e.g. a PC) to connect to the
codec’s streaming session. Used by Cisco IP/TV.
Off: No announcement packets will be transmitted.
Video Rate Defines the Video streaming rate from the system. Range is 16 kbps -
320 kbps. In addition, audio (G.711) streaming rate is 64 kbps, providing
a maximum streaming rate of 384 kbps.
Streaming Set password so that only participants entering correct password will be
Password able to view the streaming session. Entering a password will prevent
unauthorized people from accessing the streaming session.
*The streaming source setting is not available when streaming only is supported outside a call.
41
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.6 Answer an incoming call
How to answer an incoming call:
To accept an incoming call, press the OK button or the green Call button on the remote
control.
How to reject an incoming call:
To reject an incoming call, select the Reject icon and press the OK button, or press the
End Call button on the remote control.
Incoming calls will connect automatically if Auto Answer is set to On, see Auto Answer for details.
When idle, the system will accept all incoming calls as long as Incoming MCU Calls and Incoming
Telephone Calls are set to On, see Permissions for details. Also, Do Not Disturb must not be
activated, see Do Not Disturb for more details.
42
General Use
3.7 End Call
How to end a call:
Press the red End Call button on the remote control, or
Press the Menu button on the remote control to display the menu and select End Call.
When the End Call dialog box is displayed either:
Press the red End Call button on the remote control again, or
Press the OK button to confirm that the call is to be ended.
How to end a MultiSite call:
In the list of participants:
Note that switching off the monitor(s), if they may be switched off individually, will not end a
call.
43
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.8 Standby
The system will automatically go to Standby mode when it is not in use. In standby mode, the
screen(s) are black. It is however still possible to receive incoming calls.
How to turn on the standby mode manually:
Select Standby from the menu and select Standby Now, or
Press the End Call button on the remote control twice.
How to turn off the standby mode:
When the system is in standby, pick up the remote control, or press any of its keys to
activate the system again.
The standby mode of the system should be used if the system is to be left idle.
Note! Standby is not activated by switching off the monitor(s) (if possible to switch off
individually).
It is possible to postpone the system from entering standby mode for 1 hour or 3 hours, see Delay
Standby for 1 hour and Delay Standby for 3 hours.
44
General Use
3.8.1 Delay Standby for 1 hour
Delay Standby for 1 hour postpones the system from entering standby mode for 1 hour.
This function is useful when using the monitors for a local presentation to prevent the system
from automatically blanking the monitors.
It is also possible to postpone the system from entering standby mode for 3 hours, see Delay
Standby for 3 hours.
45
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.8.2 Delay Standby for 3 hours
Delay Standby for 3 hours postpones the automatic standby mode for 3 hours.
This function is useful when using the monitors for a local presentation to prevent the system
from automatically blanking the monitors.
It is also possible to postpone the system from entering standby mode for 1 hour, see Delay
Standby for 1 hour.
46
General Use
3.8.3 Do Not Disturb
To prevent the system from accepting any incoming calls, the function Do Not Disturb has to be
activated. The caller will hear a busy tone when calling the system. The monitor will be black
when Do Not Disturb is active, see figure below.
End Do Not Disturb by pressing any key on the remote control.
47
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.9 Phone Book
The Phone Book is available via the Phone Book button on the remote control or from the Make a
Call menu.
Using the Phone Book is time saving and prevents the user from inadvertently calling the wrong
number. The contacts are sorted alphabetically. The contact names are displayed in the list and
the telephone or video numbers, bandwidth and net profiles of the selected contact is displayed at
the bottom line.
Navigate up and down in the Phone Book with the arrow keys on the remote control. Use the
letter keys to search through the contacts beginning with the typed letter.
The functions in the Phone Book are available when pressing the left arrow key on the remote
control, and then the up and down arrow keys. Note that the last selected contact will be marked.
When selecting Phone Book the phone book opens showing the folders Last Number Dialed,
Missed Calls, Call History and My Contacts. Global Contacts are listed below these folders.
The following information is available from the Phone Book:
Last Number Dialed
Missed Calls
48
General Use
Call History
My Contacts
Global Contacts
49
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.9.1 Call Log
The Call Log lists Last Number Dialed, Missed Calls and Call History allows the user to see which
calls that are made in the past. The lists contain a maximum of 30 numbers and the numbers are
stored in these lists until the system is restarted. If the contacts listed are available in the phone
book, the names will be displayed instead of the numbers.
Last Number Dialed lists all outgoing calls. Missed Calls lists the calls that are not accepted. Call
History lists all outgoing, incoming and missed calls. The calls in the lists are marked with these
icons:
outgoing calls
incoming calls
missed calls
The following buttons are available from these folders :
Call Now
Copy to My Contacts
Delete
Delete All
Cancel
How to make a call using the call lists:
1. Select a number from the list.
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control, or press the left arrow key to select the
Call Now icon, followed by OK. The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call
depending on the selected contact. Alternatively, press the OK button when the contact is
selected. The Make a Call menu will then be displayed with the name of the contact in
the Dial Number field, and the Call Settings field will reflect the call settings for this
contact. It is possible to alter the call settings before placing the call. The call will be set
up as a video call or a telephone call as described in Make a Call.
3. Wait for the call to connect.
How to delete numbers in the call lists do one of the following:
Choose the Delete button to delete a selected contact from the call list.
Choose the Delete All button to delete all contacts listed in the call list.
Note that you will not delete contacts from the Phone Book if you delete them from the call lists.
50
General Use
3.9.2 My Contacts
My Contacts are the locally stored contacts on the system. This means that it is possible to add
new contacts and edit or delete existing contacts. My Contacts can store up to 200 contacts.
How to make a call using My Contacts:
1. Find the desired contact using the arrow keys or searching on the first letter with the letter
keys.
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control, or press the left arrow key to select the
Call Now icon, followed by OK. The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call
depending on the settings made when storing the contact. Alternatively, press the OK
button when the contact is selected. The Make a Call menu will then be displayed with
the name of the contact in the Dial Number field, and the Call Settings field will reflect the
call settings for this contact. It is possible to alter the call settings before placing the call.
The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call as described in Make a Call.
3. Wait for the call to connect.
Note that the telephone or video number and profile of the selected contact is displayed at the
bottom line.
51
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
The following functions are available from My Contacts:
Call Now
New Contact
New MultiSite Contact
Edit Contact
Delete Contact
Close
52
General Use
3.9.2.1 Add New Contact
The New Contact function is available from My Contacts.
Add a new contact to My Contacts by:
1. Select the New Contacts button to open the New Contacts dialog box.
2. Enter Name by using the letter keys on the remote control. Input will automatically be
interpreted as letters. Toggle between capital letters and small letters by pressing the #
button on the remote control. The maximum name length is 30 characters. For numbers,
press the # button for one second.
3. Enter Number by using the number keys on the remote control. Input will automatically be
interpreted as numbers. The maximum number length is 60 numbers. Use a star as
separator in IP addresses. For letters, press the # button for one second.
4. Alter the default setting of Call Type if necessary.
5. Alter the default setting of Network if necessary.
6. Alter the default setting of Bandwidth if necessary. For bandwidth 2x64 kbps or 2x56
kbps, two numbers are required, see Default Call Settings for more details.
7. Alter the default setting of Restrict (56k) if necessary.
8. Press OK to save.
53
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.9.2.2 New MultiSite Contact
(Optional feature*)
The New MultiSite Contact function is available from My Contacts.
It is possible to pre-define the participants of a conference meeting as a MultiSite Contact. All
participants in the MultiSite Contact will then be connected automatically instead of having to call
the participants one by one.
My Contacts can hold up to 50 MultiSites Contacts. The MultiSite Contacts consist of participants
that are already stored in My Contacts.
It is possible to have up to totally 6 video participants and 5 telephone participants in a meeting.
How to define a New MultiSite Contact:
1. Open the Phone Book via the Phone Book button on the remote control or in the Make a
Call menu.
2. Select the New MultiSite Contact icon. The New MultiSite Contact dialogue box is
displayed.
3. Enter a name of the MultiSite Contact, and press OK on the remote control.
4. Select Add Participant. The contents of the Local Phone Book is displayed. Find the
desired contact and press the OK button on the remote control. Repeat until all the
desired participants are selected.
5. Press OK to save the MultiSite Contact.
54
General Use
Bandwidth for a MultiSite Contact call
When calling a MultiSite Contact, the system will try to call the participants with their specified
bandwidths. If the total bandwidth exceeds the systems maximum bandwidth, the system will
downspeed and distribute the available bandwidth equally for all the participants.
Example: In a MultiSite Contact there is one participant with bandwidth 256kbps and one
participant with bandwidth 384kbps. 512kbps is the maximum bandwidth of the system.
The two participants' bandwidth exceeds the maximum bandwidth. The system will then
downspeed so that each participant connects with equal bandwidth, i.e. 512kbps/2 = 256kbps.
* The MultiSIte option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP
55
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.9.2.3 Edit Contact
The Edit Contact function is available from My Contacts.
How to edit a contact in the Local Phone Book:
1. Select the contact that is to be edited.
2. Press the left arrow on the remote control, followed by the down arrow until the Edit
Contact icon is selected.
3. The current settings for this contact is displayed in a dialogue box. Alter the wanted
settings.
4. Press OK to save.
If the altered contact is part of a MultiSite Contact*, the contact will be updated in the MultiSite
Contact automatically.
* The MultiSite option is not available on all systems.
56
General Use
3.9.2.4 Delete Contact
The Delete Contact function is available from My Contacts.
How to delete a contact:
1. Select the contact that is to be deleted.
2. Press the left arrow on the remote control, followed by the down arrow until the Delete
Contact icon is selected. The Delete Contact dialogue box is displayed.
3. Confirm by pressing the OK button again.
57
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.9.3 Global Contacts
When selecting Phone Book the phone book opens showing the Global Contacts below the
folders Last Number Dialled, Missed Calls, Call History and My Contacts.
Global Contacts are available if the system is connected to an external management system like
the TANDBERG Management Suite (TMS). These contacts cannot be changed locally by the
system, only from the management system. If there is a need to modify the number or any
settings of a contact before making a call, select the contact and press OK on the remote control.
The Make a Call menu is displayed and the settings can be altered before placing the call. The
changes are not saved.
How to make a call using Global Contacts:
1. Find the desired contact using the arrow keys or searching on the first letter with the letter
keys or use the search function described in Search.
2. Press the green Call button on the remote control, or press the left arrow key to select the
Call Now icon, followed by OK. The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call
depending on the settings made when storing the contact. Alternatively, press the OK
button when the contact is selected. The Make a Call menu will then be displayed with
the name of the contact in the Dial Number field, and the Call Settings field will reflect the
call settings for this contact. It is possible to alter the call settings before placing the call.
The call will be set up as a video call or a telephone call as described in Make a Call.
3. Wait for the call to connect.
From Global Contacts the following functions are available:
Call Now
Up one Level
Search
Copy to My Contacts
Close
58
General Use
3.9.3.1 Up one Level
Global Contacts can be arranged in a tree structure with several sub folders. Use the Up one
Level button to navigate up in the tree structure.
When a search in the Global Phone Book is made, by using the Search function, only contacts
matching the search text are displayed. Select the Up one Level button to return back to the
alphabetical list.
59
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.9.3.2 Search
The phone book can contain an unlimited amount of global contacts. Using search makes it
easier to find the wanted contact.
How to search in the Global Phone Book:
1. Select the Search icon.
2. Enter search text in the dialogue box that appears and press the OK button on the
remote control. The system will list all entries that contain the entered letter combination.
3. It is also possible to search on first letter in the Phone Book with the letter keys on the
remote control.
60
General Use
3.9.3.3 Copy Contact to My Contacts
The Copy Contact to My Contacts function is available from the Last Number Dialed, Missed
Calls, Call History and Global Contacts folders, see Phone Book for details.
It may be wise to copy contacts that are often used to My Contacts. Note that the local copy will
not be updated if the Global Contacts are updated from the management system.
How to copy a contact from the Global Phone Book to the Local Phone Book:
1. Select the contact to be copied to My Contacts.
2. Press the left arrow on the remote control, followed by the down arrow until the Copy
Contact to My Contacts icon is selected.
A message box telling that the operation was successful will be displayed.
61
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.10 Camera Control
There are several ways to control the camera:
Control the camera directly with the arrow keys when the menu is closed or use the Move
Camera function in the menu to control both the near end and far end camera, see Move
Camera and Far End Control for details.
Use the zoom button on the remote control will zoom the picture in (+) and out (-).
Use Camera Presets, see Camera Presets for details.
Adjust focus, brightness and whitebalance, see Picture Control for details.
Use Automatic Camera Tracking, see Camera Tracking for details.
Use the TANDBERG Tracker, see separate instructions included with the TANDBERG
Tracker.
62
General Use
3.10.1 Move Camera
It is possible to move the camera with the remote control or via the menu.
Moving the camera directly with the remote control
When the menu is hidden, the arrow keys will work on the camera. If the menu is displayed, press
the Cancel button on the remote control to hide it. Use the left and right arrow keys to pan the
camera, and the up and down arrow keys to tilt the camera. Use zoom + and – to zoom in and
out.
Moving the Camera via the menu:
1. Select the Camera Control icon from the menu.
2. Select the Move Camera button in the Camera Control menu.
3. Use the arrow keys on the remote control to pan and tilt the camera.
4. Press OK when done.
63
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.10.2 Far End Control
Far End Control allows you to control your conference partner’s camera. Far End Camera Control
is useful if e.g. it is not possible to see what a participant at the far end is writing on their white
board. Use Far End Control to move the far end camera and zoom closer on the white board. Use
the left and right arrow keys to pan the camera, and the up and down arrow keys to tilt the
camera. Use zoom + and – to zoom in and out.
You can also control your conference partner’s video sources and presets and request a
snapshot from the far end side. Enabling Far End Control will put the system in Far End mode
and camera control, camera preset, presentation, and snapshot will work on the far end camera.
Far End Control only works when you are in call and if the far end side supports H.281 (Far End
Camera Control). You can prevent others from controlling your system by setting Allow Far End
Camera Control to Off in Control Panel - Administrator Setting - General - Permissions, see
Permissions for details.
How to use Far End control:
1. Select the Camera Control icon in the menu.
2. Select the Far End Control icon. When far end camera control is selected an indicator will
appear and it is possible to control the far end camera, camera preset, presentation and
snapshot for the far end.
3. Deselect the Far End Control button to deactivate far end control mode. This may also be
done by pressing the Cancel or the OK button.
Far End Camera Presets
Far End Camera Presets works just like your own camera presets. When Far End is on, use the
number keys to activate far end camera presets. You are however not allowed to save far end
camera presets.
Far End Presentation
Pressing the Presentation key or choosing a presentation from the presentation menu while Far
End is on, will result in opening a far end presentation. Be aware of that the far end video sources
may not correspond with the buttons in the presentation menu. If you press Document Camera,
the far end side might have another video source on this input.
Request snapshot from the Far End
You can request a snapshot from the far end side. Put the system in Far End mode and press
Snapshot on the remote control to take a snapshot of the current far end video (current is default
snapshot source).
64
General Use
3.10.3 Camera Presets
Use camera presets to easily vary between predefined near end camera angles. This is useful
when pictures from many different camera angles have to be sent to the far end. E.g. in a
meeting there is a white board, a PC and a small meeting table. Use camera presets to move
between these camera angles in order to present the correct information to the participants at the
far end without having to move the camera manually every time. A preset is deactivated when the
camera is moved manually with the arrow keys.
Presets are available from the menu. When you are in a call you can also activate presets directly
from the remote control. You can save up to 15 presets. Each camera preset is able to store
camera angle, video source and audio source selection.
How to use preset directly from the remote control:
When you are in a call you can activate presets with just one press on the number keys on
remote control. The number keys will however not work as presets when you are in an input field,
in order to write numbers or letters.
1. Press a number on the remote control. The camera will move to the corresponding angle,
or video source, stored on that number.
How to use presets via the menu:
1. Select Camera Control - Display Presets in the menu.
2. Select the wanted preset with the arrow keys on the remote control and
press OK.
How to save a new preset directly from the remote control:
1. Move the camera to the desired position or select the desired video source that you
would like to store as a preset.
2. Press a number on the remote control for 1 second to save the preset. It is possible to
store one camera preset on each of the number keys, 0-9, when storing camera presets
from the remote control. (Camera preset 10 is stored on the 0-key).
3. The new camera preset will overwrite any existing camera preset on that number.
How to save a new Preset via the menu:
1. Move the camera to the desired position or select the desired video
source that you would like to store as a preset.
2. Select Camera Control - Save New Camera Preset in the menu.
3. Enter a number between 1 and 15 and press OK.
4. Type a name for the preset to make it easier to separate the different
presets.
5. Press Save. The new Camera Preset will overwrite any existing camera
preset on that number.
65
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.10.4 TANDBERG Tracker
How to save presets for the TANDBERG Tracker:
1. Select which camera preset to be used on the TANDBERG Tracker.
2. Move the camera to the desired position to store on the tracker.
3. Select Move Camera - Save New Preset in the menu.
4. All camera presets are accessible from the TANDBERG Tracker.
For more information, see separate instructions included with the TANDBERG Tracker.
66
General Use
3.10.5 Picture Control
Focus, Brightness and White balance are set for auto focus, auto brightness and auto white
balance by default. If you need to set focus, brightness and white balance manually, go to Picture
Control in the Camera Control menu.
Focus
Auto Auto focus continuously updates the focus throughout the call. When moving
the camera, the system will use auto focus for 5 seconds to set the right focus
of the new camera position. After 5 seconds auto focus is turned off to prevent
continuous focus adjustments of the camera.
Temporary When Temporary is selected, the slide bar is enabled. Use the arrow keys to
adjust the focus. The temporary focus will last until you move the camera again
and auto focus will take effect.
Camera Brightness
Auto Auto brightness continuously updates the brightness of the camera picture.
Manual When Manual is selected, the slide bar is enabled. Use the arrow keys to manually
adjust the camera brightness. If brightness is set manually, the system will keep
this brightness level also when the camera is moved.
White balance
Auto Auto white balance continuously updates the white balance.
When Manual is selected, the “Set White balance” field is enabled. To update the
Manual
white balance manually, select Manual. A white object should be held in front of
the camera a few seconds before and after pressing “Set White balance”. If white
balance is set manually, the system will keep this white balance also when the
camera is moved.
67
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.10.6 Camera Tracking
Through Camera Tracking and the use of two or three microphones, the camera can
automatically position itself on the current speaker. Before using camera tracking, the camera
positions used must be stored at Preset 7 (Mic1), Preset 8 (Mic2) and/or Preset 9 (Mic3).
How to use Camera Tracking:
1. Select the Camera Control icon in the main menu.
2. Enable Camera Tracking by choosing Camera Tracking. An indicator will appear on the
screen.
3. End Camera Tracking by deselecting the Camera Tracking button. Camera Tracking will
also end if you activate a camera preset or move the camera manually with the arrow
keys.
Example: You have placed Microphone 1 on the table. Where should you position the camera
for Preset 7?
The camera position stored at Preset 7 must be related to Microphone 1. Therefore all
participants who are located closest to Mic1 should be included in the Preset 7 camera
position etc. When camera tracking is activated and a person close to Mic1 speaks, Preset 7
will be automatically selected.
When activating another video source (for instance document camera), camera tracking will be
temporarily disabled until you re-select Main Camera or a Main Camera preset.
The camera tracking speeds may be altered in the Video Settings menu in Administrator Settings,
see Camera Tracking Mode for further details.
A Voice Detector makes the system more tolerant of noise and ensures the camera not to be
moved by noise such as paper shuffling, etc.
Note that pressing Mic Off will temporarily disable camera tracking until you turn on the
microphone again.
Please also note that the camera tracking will not work properly if using an Audio Science
Microphone.
68
General Use
3.11 Presentation
The Presentation Functionality in the system enables you to show other available video sources
in addition to your Main Camera. This is perfect for meetings where you would like to show a
PowerPoint presentation for instance. You can even use arrow keys up and down on the remote
control to activate Page Up/Down on the PC (this only applies when using VNC).
Use Presentation outside a call to make a local presentation for the people in your own meeting
room. Use Presentation when you are in a call to make a presentation for the far end as well.
The quickest way to show a presentation is to use the Presentation Key on the remote control.
The presentation key shows a predefined video source, PC is default. It is possible to change the
presentation source in the Presentation menu. Choose Presentation from the main menu if you
want to select a video source manually. The Presentation Menu offers you all the available video
sources supported by your system.
69
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.11.1 Presentation Key
The quickest way to show a presentation is to use the presentation key on the remote control.
The presentation key is used to start and stop a presentation. The presentation key will display
PC (default*) or the last used presentation source.
When holding the presentation key for 1 second, the presentation menu will be displayed. This
menu allows you to choose other video sources. When choosing a source different from the
default presentation source, this source will be temporarily stored as presentation source until
next time the system goes to standby.
The default presentation source can be permanently changed in Presentation Settings.
When using the presentation key, your presentation will be displayed as a Dual Stream, if
possible. If the call does not support a dual video stream, the presentation will display as main
video stream.
How to start and end a Presentation using the Presentation key:
1. Press the Presentation key. The video source that is set as presentation source is
displayed in full screen (PC is default). Remember to connect your PC to the codec in
advance.
2. Press the Presentation key again to end the presentation and go back to main camera.
* If available on your system.
70
General Use
3.11.2 Presentation Menu
The Presentation menu offers you all available video sources; Main Camera, PC, Document
Camera, VCR, AUX and VNC. All these sources can be used as Main Video Stream or Dual
Video Stream (Duo Video / H.239). Not all systems has all video sources available, see Interfaces
for details.
Outside a call the presentation menu only contains Main Video Sources. In a call, the headers
Dual Video and Snapshot display in addition to Main Video (if the call supports Duo Video
/H.239). Use the up/down keys to change between video sources and headers. Start a Dual
Stream by selecting a Dual Video source. Close the Dual Stream by deselecting the video source
button.
Note that Dual Video Stream may not be available if option not installed, not supported on
your system or if already activated. Use the up/down keys to change between video source
and header.
For Snapshots, see Take New Snapshot and Display Snapshot.
How to change your main video source:
1. Choose the Main Video header from the Presentation menu.
2. Choose your desired video source and press OK.
How to show a presentation in addition to your main video (Dual Video Stream):
1. Select the Dual Video header.
2. Choose a dual video source and press OK.
3. Deselect the active video source button to end the presentation.
71
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.11.3 PC Presenter (DVI/XGA Input)
(Optional feature - not available on all systems)
Users often have their presentations on a laptop that is brought into the meeting room.
Remember to connect your PC to the codec before you press the Presentation button. Note that
the image will appear smoother on the system if your presentation is already displaying in full
screen on your PC prior to connecting your PC to the video system.
Plugging a PC into the system is made extremely simple through the PC Presenter, avoiding the
need for any additional hardware such as a projector, PC/Video converter or extra cables.
How to connect a PC to the codec with the DVI/VGA cable:
1. Connect the VGA-DVI cable to the PC Presenter (PC DVI-I in) connector on the codec.
2. Connect the VGA-DVI cable to your PC (VGA Output).
3. When the PC is connected to the codec, hit the Presentation key to display the PC image
on the system.
If no PC image is displayed on your monitor, make sure that your PC is set to activate your VGA
output. On most laptop PCs you must press a special key combination to switch the PC image
from the PC screen to the video screen.
Note that the DVI/VGA input is compliant with VESA Extended Display Identification Data (EDID)
and will be able to reconfigure the PC’s screen settings if it is currently configured to a VGA
format that the system doesn’t support.
Also note that you can use the DVI input to transmit high resolution images from document
cameras or other sources supporting the HD format 720p.
For details on formats supported on 'DVI-I in', please refer to Interfaces.
72
General Use
3.11.4 PC Soft Presenter and VNC
(Optional feature)
PC SoftPresenter is used to display PC images on your system without using a VGA cable (PC
Presenter). The system and your PC must be connected to the same LAN. In addition, VNC
(Virtual Network Computing) server software must be installed on the PC. Free software can be
downloaded from http://www.realvnc.com. Install the software by running the downloaded file.
How to configure the VNC Server software:
1. Select the following to setup VNC; Windows-Start\All Programs\Highlight
RealVNC\Hightlight VNC Server\Show User Properties
2. Select Accept Socket Connections.
3. Select Auto for Display Number. Display Number in the system must then have the value
0.
4. Enter a password in the Password-field. This must correspond with the VNC Settings on
your system.
How to show PC using the PC Soft Presenter and VNC:
1. Start the VNC software on your PC.
2. To use VNC, you must configure VNC Settings. Open VNC Settings in the Presentation
Settings menu in Administrator Settings.
3. Fill in the IP address of your PC, Display Number and Password.
4. Press Save.
5. When you now choose VNC as video source in the Presentation menu, you will see your
PC using VNC. If a PowerPoint presentation is being displayed then you can scroll
through the presentation by pressing the up and down arrows on the remote control. VNC
settings will go back to default when the system goes to standby.
73
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.11.5 Dual Stream (DuoVideoTF/H.239)
(Optional feature - not available on all systems)
With Dual Stream you have the opportunity to show two different live video streams
simultaneously, main video and one additional source. This is handy when showing a
presentation. You see the live presentation and the live video of the presenter simultaneously.
When you start a presentation, Dual Stream starts automatically if both local and remote system
supports Dual Stream. If one of the systems does not support Dual Stream, no second video
stream will be established and your presentation will be shown as your main video.
Dual Stream is available on all systems with Natural Presenter Package installed. H.239 is the
new ITU standard defining how to send two video sources simultaneously.
Example:
Start a meeting with main camera as video source. Press the presentation key on the remote
control to start a PC presentation.
PC will appear as a Dual Video Stream in addition to main camera. End the Dual Stream
presentation by pressing presentation key again.
In Presentation Settings, you can set Presentation Start to Manual. That means that Dual Stream
will not start automatically.
Example:
Start a meeting with main camera as video source. Press the presentation key on the remote
control to start a PC presentation.
A dialog box appears where you can choose to show PC as Dual Video Stream or not. This is
handy if you not always want to use Dual Stream.
Dual Stream and Bandwidth
Using Dual Stream, the quality will automatically downspeed to the optimal bandwidth. This
means that you need higher quality to allocate enough bandwidth for the two video streams. Dual
Stream borrows bandwidth from main video. When Dual Stream is closed, the bandwidth is
returned to the main video.
Note that when selecting the Document Camera or PC, the system will automatically request floor
when connected to a MCU conference as MultiSite host* or connected to an external MCU.
* Not available on all systems.
74
General Use
3.11.6 Take New Snapshot
The system can take a snapshot of your live video. Snapshot is handy when you are in a call with
a system that does not support Dual Stream. Use Snapshot to show a snapshot of your
presentation and continue the meeting with main camera.
How to use snapshot:
You find Take New Snapshot in the Presentation menu.
1. Select the Snapshot header.
2. Select Take New Snapshot and press OK to take a snapshot.
Snapshot is found on the Star key on the remote control.
1. Press Star and you take a snapshot of the current video source (current video is default
snapshot source). You can change the snapshot source in Control Panel - Administrator
Settings - Presentation Settings. Note that snapshot does not work when you are in an
input field in the menu (the star key is then used to write the star sign).
Note that Take New Snapshot is not possible when Dual Video Stream is activated and that
it is only available when you are in a call.
Note that the Snapshot feature uses H.261 Annex D and hence will not work when using
H.264 video compression
75
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.11.7 Display Snapshot
The system stores the last sent or received Snapshot. The snapshot is deleted automatically after
the call.
How to display snapshots:
1. To view a stored snapshot, first choose the Snapshot header.
2. Select Display Snapshot in the Presentation menu.
3. Press the Display Snapshot button again to deselect it. When disconnecting the call, the
stored snapshot will be erased.
Receiving snapshots:
1. When receiving a snapshot, the snapshot is displayed in full screen.
2. Press OK to escape from the snapshot. The last sent or received snapshot will be stored
in the graphics memory and erased once the call is disconnected.
Note that Display Snapshot is only available when you have a stored snapshot.
76
General Use
3.12 Conference Services
A Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) enables several sites to participate in the same conference.
During an MCU conference, the status line will provide information about the conference.
You can make a multipoint conference in different ways. The Conference Services vary
depending on how you make the call, see Add call for details.
Example of MultiSite for high end systems
77
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Example of MultiSite for mid- to low end systems
Using the system’s internal MCU, MultiSite TF *
Most TANDBERG MXP systems has an optional built-in MCU, which is called MultiSite*. It
supports up to 6 video calls and 5 telephone calls including yourself for high-end systems, and 4
video calls and 3 telephone calls including yourself for the mid- and lower end systems. The
MultiSite supports both Split Screen and Voice Switched mode. With MultiSite, you have the
following services:
Request/Release Floor
Assign Floor To Participant/Release Floor From Participant
Terminal Names
Layout (Auto/4 Split/5+1 Split/Voice Switched)
Using an external MCU that supports Chair Control (H.243)
With an external MCU that supports H.243, you have the following services:
Request/Release Floor
View Participant/End View
Chair Control
If you take Chair control, you get the following services:
Release Chair
Assign Floor To Participant/Release Floor From Participant
Disconnect Participant
Terminate Meeting
78
General Use
Using an external MCU with limited Chair Control Support you may have the following
services
With an external MCU that does not support H.243, you have the following services:
Request/Release Floor
Terminal Names
* The MultiSIte option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP
79
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.12.1 Request Floor and Release Floor
When requesting floor, your video will be broadcasted in full screen to all other participants in the
conference. Request Floor is useful when you want to speak or display something in front of all
participants.
Release Floor when you are done and make the floor available for other participants in the
conference. An indicator appears when you have floor and disappears when you release floor,
see floor indicator in On-screen Indicators.
How to use Request and Release Floor:
1. Open the Main Menu by pressing OK.
2. Choose Conference Services and press OK.
3. Choose Request Floor and press OK. A Floor indicator will appear when you have floor.
4. When done, press the same button again, which now means Release Floor. The Floor
indicator disappears.
80
General Use
3.12.2 Conference Layout
(Only supported by TANDBERG MultiSite*)
With a TANDBERG MultiSite you can choose between the layouts: Auto Split, 4 Split, 5+1 Split
and Voice Switched view. Auto Split displays all participants on the screen simultaneously. 4 Split
displays the 4 last speaking Participants including the MultiSite host. 5+1 Split displays the
speaking participant in a big picture and the other participants in small pictures. Voice Switched
mode displays the participant that is speaking in full screen. Switch between these picture modes
using the Conference Layout menu.
Continuous Presence layout 4 split
Voice Switched mode
* The MultiSite option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP
81
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.12.3 Terminal Names
Choose Terminal Names to see a list of the participants of the MultiSite conference. Press Cancel
to go back.
82
General Use
3.12.4 Chair Control
(Not supported by TANDBERG MCU, TANDBERG MPS or MultiSite)
As chairman, you have access to more MultiSite Services. Select Chair Control to assume the
role of chairman of the conference. Select Release Chair to end the role as chairman. A Chair
indicator appears when you have Chair and disappears when chair is released.
83
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.12.5 Assign Floor and Release Floor from
Participant
Assign Floor allows the chairman to select which of the conference participants that is to be
broadcasted to all other participants.
84
General Use
3.12.6 View Site and End View
(Not supported by TANDBERG MCU or MultiSite)
View Site allows you to view any participant in the conference regardless of whom having floor
and chair. Choose End View to go back to normal.
85
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.12.7 Disconnect Participant
Disconnect Participant allows the chairman to disconnect any participant in the conference. In a
multipoint call, this is equivalent to disconnecting a participant from the end call menu.
86
General Use
3.12.8 Terminate Meeting
Terminate Meeting allows the chairman to terminate the conference altogether. In a MultiSite call,
this is equivalent to pressing End All Calls from the end call menu.
87
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.12.9 More about MultiSite (embedded MCU)
(Optional Feature*)
Calling in to a MultiSite
Any system can be part of a MultiSite conference by calling in to a MultiSite. The dial-in numbers
to the MultiSite depends of the network that is used.
To dial in to the MultiSite on IP:
Dial the IP Number or the IP Address of the system. All sites can dial the same number.
To dial in to the MultiSite on ISDN-PRI:
Dial the ISDN number of the system. All sites can dial the same number.
To dial in to the MultiSite on ISDN-BRI:
The MultiSite has specific numbers for each call that participates in the conference. To
find the dial-in numbers for the MultiSite, choose Information from the main menu and
open System Information from the bottom menu line.
Site 2 must dial MultiSite Number 2.
Site 3 must dial MultiSite Number 3.
Site 4 must dial MultiSite Number 4.
And so forth
Receiving calls to a MultiSite
When the MultiSite receives incoming calls you can accept or reject it. Pressing the green key is
equivalent to pressing Accept. Pressing the red key is equivalent to pressing Reject.
End a MultiSite Call
Ending a MultiSite Call is not very different from ending a normal point-to-point call. Use the red
key on the remote control or End Call from the main menu. The end call menu lists all the calls
that participate in the conference. To end a single call, select the call, press OK or the red key on
the remote control. To end all calls, press the End All Calls button in the menu.
Duo Video in MultiSite calls
In a MultiSite call, the MultiSite can transmit the Duo Video and/or H.239 to the other participants
that support Duo Video and/or H.239. This means that any participant can send Dual Stream and
the MultiSite will transmit it to the other participants. The participants that do not support Duo
Video or H.239 will only receive Main Video or only the dual stream dependent on software
options installed.
Mix ISDN/IP
A conference can consist of any combination of ISDN/IP sites.
MultiSite cascading
88
General Use
By connecting MultiSite systems together, it is possible to connect even more sites in a cascaded
MultiSite (see example below). All connections can use any combination of ISDN/IP. The host
can connect up to 5 other video systems with MultiSite functionality. The cascaded systems can
connect to 4 other video sites. These systems will automatically run Voice Switched mode and
transmit a full screen image to the host. In this case you get 26 participants in the cascaded
MultiSite conference.
* The MultiSite option is not available on the TANDBERG 550 MXP, TANDBERG 770 MXP and TANDBERG 1000 MXP
89
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.13 Control Panel
The Control Panel contains the features:
Diagnostics
Text Chat
Audio Demonstration
Administrator Settings
Restart
User Guide
90
General Use
3.13.1 Diagnostics
Diagnostics allows testing of individual system components and displays the current system
settings.
Diagnostics contain:
System Information
Channel Status
Call Status
System Selftest
View Administrator Settings
IP Address Conflict Check
Warnings
91
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.13.1.1 System Information
Select System Information to view system numbers, line status, software version, hardware serial
number and other useful information. Press arrow key up and down to scroll in the System
Information list.
System Information contains:
System Name Software Network Hardware
Version Serial
My ISDN Number Lines active
Number
My IP Number Internal Test Lines not active
My IP Address Software MAC address
MultiSite number Options Ethernet
2 installed Speed
MultiSite number
3
Note that the serial number is also found on a sticker on the system. It is
essential for identifying the system when it comes to service contracts or
other support activities. The serial number format is xx.xxxxx.
92
General Use
3.13.1.2 Channel Status
Comprehensive information about the call progress is available through the Channel Status
window. This window indicates the various stages each B-channel goes through whilst
establishing a connection.
Status – Comments
BRI
Idle the channel is idle
when calling — the network has acknowledged the call
Calling
Connected when connection is established
Sync when the channels are synchronized
Active when all available channels are connected
Releasing waiting for the network to confirm a release of the call
Released when disconnected - the network has acknowledged the disconnection
Cause codes
The most common cause codes (for ISDN) are:
1 Unallocated (unassigned) number
2 No route to specified transit network (WAN)
16 Normal clearing
17 User busy
18 No user responding
21 Call rejected
28 Invalid number format (incomplete number)
29 Facility rejected
31 Normal, unspecified
34 No circuit/channel available
41 Temporary failure
58 Bearer capability not presently available
65 Bearer service not implemented
69 Requested facility not implemented
81 Invalid call reference value
88 Incompatible destination
100 Invalid information element contents
102 Recovery on timer expiry
127 Internetworking, unspecified
255 TANDBERG specific. undefined cause code
PRI Red Alarm
Red alarm or Loss of signal (LOS) means that there is no signal and thus no framing info
received (this has same effect as pulling out the PRI cable).
PRI Yellow Alarm
93
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Yellow alarm or Remote Alarm Indicator (RAI) means that the system is receiving framing info,
but in this framing info the other side tells the system that it is not reading the system’s
transmitted framing info. Typically, this may be a broken connector in the TX part of the system
PRI cable. This could also indicate weak or noisy signal in the TX part of the system PRI cable.
PRI Blue Alarm
Blue alarm means that network on the far side of the CSU is unavailable.
Example:
The system is connected via a CSU (i.e. a Channel Services Unit’) as follows: System–
cableA–CSU–cableB–Network
If a CSU loses framing/sync from the network (example: a bad cable B), it shall no longer
send valid framing out on cable A towards the system. Instead it transmits "Blue Alarm".
Seen from a system receiving blue alarm, this means that the network on the far side of the
CSU is unavailable.
94
General Use
3.13.1.3 Call Status
Comprehensive information about the call is available through the Call Status window. The menu
has two columns, one for transmitted and one for received audio/video/data information. If Dual
Stream or MultiSite is available on your system and in use, pressing the UP/DOWN keys will
show one page per connected site. Some of the information fields will vary dependent on if H.320
(ISDN calls) or H.323 (IP calls) are made.
95
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.13.1.4 System Selftest
The system performs a check to determine internal hardware integrity. System Selftest is useful
when you want to check if your network connection is active.
96
General Use
3.13.1.5 View Administrator Settings
This window displays all the system settings. Use the arrow key on the remote control to scroll
through the list.
View Administrator Settings may contain*:
General Settings System Name
Language
Dual Monitor
Auto answer
Max Call Length
Access Code
Incoming MCU calls
Incoming Telephone calls
Far End Control
Fallback to Telephony
Screen Settings TV Monitor Format
Picture Layout
VGA Monitor Format
VGA Out Quality
PC Picture Format
Allow VGA 50Hz
Software Options Options Installed
Serial Number
Current Option Key
Menu Settings Menu Timeout in Call
Welcome Menu
Welcome Picture
Logo
Balloon Help
Display Welcome Text
Welcome Text
Administrator Password
Presentation Settings Duo Video Mode
Start up Video Source
Presentation Source
Snapshot Source
Auto Display Snapshot
PIP Appearance
PIP Placing
VNC Settings Address
Display Number
Call Quality
Video Algorithm
Audio Algorithm
Interlaced
97
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Video Quality Main Camera
PC
Document Camera
VCR
AUX
VNC
Split Screen
Default Call Settings Call Type
Network
Bandwidth
Restrict (56k)
Auto H320 Bandwidth
Auto H323 Bandwidth
SIP
Audio Settings Mic1
Inputs Mic2
Mic3
Audio4
Audio5
Audio6
Mix Mode
VCR Ducking
Level Settings Mic1
Mic2
Mic3
Audio4
Audio5
Audio6
Outputs Out1
Out2 (AUX)
Out3 (VCR)
Out1 Mode
Level Settings Out1
Out2 (AUX)
Out3 (VCR)
Echo Control Mic1
Mic2
Mic3
Audio4
Audio Levelling (AGC) Mics
Audio5 (AUX)
Audio6 (VCR)
Received Audio
Alert Tones & Volume Video Call Alert Tone
Telephone Alert Tone
Alert Volume
Alert Speaker
Key Tones
Video Settings Camera Tracking Mode
MCU Status Line
Web Snapshot
MultiSite Picture Mode
98
General Use
Picture Control Focus
White balance
Brightness
Video Name Main Cam
AUX
Doc Cam
VCR
PC
VGA
VNC
Network Type ISDN-BRI\PRI\Leased E1\T1\Enternal
H331
ISDN Switch Type ETSI (Euro ISDN),…
Line1 Setup On
Number1
Number2
SPID1
SPID2
Line2 Setup On
Number1
Number2
SPID1
SPID2
Line3 Setup On
Number1
Number2
SPID1
SPID2
Advanced ISDN Settings Subaddress
Validate Numbers (MSN)
Parallel Dial
Send Own Numbers
Sending Complete
ISDN-PRI Settings Number Range
ISDN-PRI Switch Type
Channel Hunting Max Channels
Low Channel
High Channel
Search High, Low
Line Settings:
T1 Cable Length 1
T2 Cable Length 2
E1 CRC-4
Advanced ISDN PRI Settings NSF Code Video
NSF Code Telephone Call
Leased E1/T1 Settings Call Control
Network Interface
Max Channels
Start Channels
T1 Line Coding
Line Settings
External network configuration Call Control RS66
RS449/V.35 Compatible
99
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
IP Settings IP assignment
IP address
IP subnet mask
Gateway
Ethernet Speed
H.323 Settings E.164 Alias
Use Gatekeeper
Gatekeeper IP
H.323 Prefix
Advanced H.323 Settings RSVP
NAT
NAT Address
QoS
IP Precedence Audio
Video
Data
Signaling
IP Type of Service (TOS)
Diffserv Audio
Video
Data
Signaling
SNMP Settings SNMP Trap Host1
SNMP Trap Host2
SNMP Trap Host3
SNMP Community
Streaming Settings Address
Address Port
TTL/Router Hops
Streaming Source
Allow Remote Start
Announcements
Video rate (kbps)
Network Profiles Auto
H.320
H.323
Network Profile 4
Network Profile 5
Network Profile 6
Security Encryption
Encryption mode
Data Port 1 Baud rate
Parity
Databits
Stopbits
Mode
Data Port 2 Baud rate
Parity
Databits
Stopbits
Mode
* The administrator settings available will vary within the MXP system range depending on system and what software
options installed.
100
General Use
3.13.1.6 IP Address Conflict Check
The system will give a warning if there is an IP conflict. The user may initiate this check by
selecting IP Address Conflict Check.
101
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.13.1.7 Warnings
If any warnings registered by the system it will be displayed in the Warnings menu. Open a
warning in the list to get more information about the warning.
The following warnings are displayed if detected by the system:
ISDN BRI warnings
ISDN is enabled on BRI line x, but the line is not connected. Please check your network
connection or disable the line. (101)
There is something wrong with ISDN BRI line x. Please check your network connection.
(102)
IP network quality warnings
The system is experiencing packet loss in the IP network. This may affect the quality of
the call.
The system is experiencing high jitter in the IP network. This may affect the quality of the
call.
The system is dropping IP packets due to latency in the network. This may affect the
quality of the call.
ISDN PRI warnings
ISDN PRI is configured for this system, but the line is not connected. Please check your
network connection or disable the network. (131)
There is something wrong with the ISDN PRI line (Blue alarm). Please check your
network connection. (132)
There is something wrong with the ISDN PRI line (Yellow alarm). Please check your
network connection. (133)
There is something wrong with the ISDN PRI line (D-Channel not active). Please check
your network connection. (134)
External Network warnings
External Network is configured for this system, but the line is not connected. Please
check your network connection or disable the network. (161)
Leased E1/T1 warnings
Leased E1/T1 is configured for this system, but the line is not connected. Please check
your network connection or disable the network. (191)
There is something wrong with the Leased E1/T1 line (Blue alarm). Please check your
network connection. (192)
There is something wrong with the Leased E1/T1 line (Yellow alarm). Please check your
network connection. (193)
102
General Use
H323 gatekeeper warnings
Could not register to the gatekeeper.
The gatekeeper rejected to register the system. Another system is already registered with
the same alias or H.323 ID.
The max capacity on the gatekeeper is reached. Registration failed.
Tried to register to the gatekeeper without a valid alias. Registration failed.
The system is not allowed to register with this gatekeeper.
Can not find the gatekeeper. Check the gatekeeper configurations on the system.
103
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.13.2 Text Chat
While in an ISDN or IP call to another system supporting Text Chat (T.140), select Text Chat from
the Control Panel. Enter text in the displayed window.
How to use Text Chat:
1. Choose Text Chat from the Control Panel to open the Text Chat window.
2. Enter text with the number keys like on a mobile phone. The text is sent to the far end
continuously letter by letter.
3. Press OK to end Text Chat and escape from the text chat window.
Note that Text Chat is supported in point to point calls only.
104
General Use
3.13.3 Audio Demo
Note that the Audio demo will only appear in the User Guide if a Digital Natural Audio Module
is connected to the codec.
105
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.13.4 Administrator Settings
Administrator Settings contains the configuration of the whole system. It is recommended to
password protect Administrator Settings to prevent occasional users to make changes to the
system. See Administrator Settings for further details.
106
General Use
3.13.5 Restart
Restart the system by pressing the Restart button. You are prompted with a dialog box saying:
Do you want to restart the system? Press OK to restart, press Cancel (X) to abort.
107
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
3.13.6 User Guide
The on screen user guide takes you through a quick step-by-step introduction to
videoconferencing. It gives the user basic skills in how to use the system.
108
4 Administrator Settings
Administrator Settings contain all the settings of the system. Making changes to Administrator
Settings will change the behavior of the system. It is recommended to password protect the
access to Administrator Settings to prevent occasional users from making crucial changes to the
system, see Administrator Password.
Administrator Settings contain:
General
Menu Settings
Presentation Settings
Call Quality
Audio
Video
Security
Network
Restore Default Settings
1
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.1 General Settings
When installing the system, go through the General Settings menu to ensure that you have the
right settings for your system, see System Configuration.
General Settings contain:
Language
System Name
Dual Monitor
Autoanswer
Max Call Length
Phone Book Settings
Permissions
Screen Settings
Software Options
110
Administrator Settings
4.1.1 Language
The system supports 15 different languages for its on-screen menus; English, German, French,
Norwegian, Swedish, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional,
Japanese, Russian, Korean, Finnish and Thai. Select the preferred language and press OK to
save.
111
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.1.2 System Name
System Name identifies the system:
On the welcome page.
During an MCU conference call.
When using the Web-interface.
When the codec is acting as an SNMP Agent.
Towards a DHCP server.
H323 ID. Other systems can call in using this name instead of IP-number/IP-address.
System Name is blank by default. System name can be alphanumeric and up to 50 characters
long. Follow the installation procedure to enter a System Name.
112
Administrator Settings
4.1.3 Dual Monitor
TANDBERG systems can be used with both one and two monitors. If you use two monitors, make
sure that Dual Monitor is set to "On".
On Selfview, snapshots and Dual Stream will be displayed on the second monitor.
Off The second monitor shows selfview only.
113
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.1.4 Auto Answer
The auto answer setting decides whether an incoming call is put through automatically or
manually.
On The system will automatically answer all incoming calls.
On+Mic The system will automatically answer all incoming calls and switch the
Off microphone off when the call is connected. Press Mic Off to switch the
microphone on.
Off You must manually answer all incoming calls by pressing OK or the Call key.
114
Administrator Settings
4.1.5 Max Call Length
This feature will automatically end both incoming and outgoing calls when the call time exceeds
the specified Max Call Length. Max Call Length can have the following values: 0-999 (minutes),
where 0 means off.
115
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.1.6 Phone Book Settings
Phone Book
On Phone Book is available in the menu.
Off Phone Book is hidden from the menu and is unavailable for users.
IP address
Enter the IP address of the management system that provides the Phone Book.
Path
The Path indicates the function of the management system.
116
Administrator Settings
4.1.7 Permissions
Permissions contains settings for incoming MCU Calls, incoming telephone Calls, Far End
Control, Remote Software Upgrade and Fallback to Telephony.
Access Code
An access code will help you control the use of the system. All users must enter a code to identify
themselves and the call will be charged on their account. Access Codes are handy for group
systems where there are more users or divisions that share the costs of using the system. Access
Code can be set to "On" and "Off". Please refer to section Appendix 5 for more information on
Access codes.
On When making a call, an Access Code dialog box will be shown. The user must enter
the correct password in order to put the call through.
Off No password is necessary to make a call.
Incoming MCU Calls
On When you are in a call, the system will provide visual and audible indications of an
incoming call and ask you to accept/reject the call.
Off The system will not accept incoming calls when you are in a call.
Incoming Telephone Calls
On The system will accept incoming telephone calls.
Off The system will not accept incoming telephone calls. This is useful to prevent
incoming calls from systems other than videoconferencing systems.
Far End Camera Control
On The far end will be able to:
• Control your camera
• Select your video sources
• Activate your camera presets
• Request snapshots
Off The far end can access none of the four features above on the local system. You will
however still be able to control the camera on the far end.
117
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Remote Software Upgrade
It is possible to upgrade software remotely, i.e. a far end system may upgrade software on a local
system via http on ISDN. The system to be upgraded must be configured to allow remote
software upgrade. It is possible to set a password which is needed for the far end system to be
able to accomplish the software upgrade.
On The system will allow a remote system to upgrade local software.
Off The system will not allow a remote system to upgrade local software.
Note that the configuration can also be done via the telnet or the serial port.
Fallback to Telephony
When dialing a number and the system fails to place a video call to the number dialed, the
system will attempt to place a telephone call if Fallback to Telephony is enabled.
On Enables fallback from video calls to telephone calls.
Off Disables fallback.
118
Administrator Settings
4.1.8 Screen Settings
Auto Layout
On If Auto Layout is On the system will change layouts automatically depending on the
number of participants in a call and if you have a dual video stream or not. Please
refer to Layout for more information.
Off If Auto Layout is Off there will be no automatic layout changes during a call. All
desired layout changes must be done manually.
Note that when you receive low resolution images (176x144 pixels or less) the screen will
automatically adjust to a smaller view to give optimum quality experience.
Picture Layout
The Advanced Picture Layout is related to the Layout button on the remote control and it can be
used at any time to change the screen layout. For wide screen systems POP mode is
recommended. You will get optimized picture layouts for wide screen by pressing the Layout
button on the remote.
Picture in Pressing the Layout button on the remote will result in an extra picture in
Picture (PIP) smaller view (Picture in Picture). Press the Layout button to move it around
in the corners of the screen and finally hide it. Pressing and holding Layout
for 1 second will hide the small picture directly from any position.
Picture Press the Layout button to see the images side-by-side, e.g. 1+1 layout,
outside where the far end and near end are displayed as images of equal size, see
Picture figure below.
(POP)
Press the Layout button once more to change to 1+2 layout. The far end
image will be displayed as the main video, with the near end, usually the
user of the system, as a smaller image in the upper right corner. If Duo
Stream is used, the Dual Stream image is displayed as the main image and
the far end and near end as smaller images to the right, see figure below for
an example.
Press the Layout button again to get the 1+3 layout.
The next time the Layout button is pressed, the normal full screen view of
the far end is displayed. Pressing and holding Layout for 1 second will
always bring you back to full screen.
119
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Example of Picture in Picture.
Example of 1+1 Side-by-Side view (wide screen).
Example of 1+2 Picture outside Picture (wide screen).
Example of 1+3 Picture outside Picture (wide screen).
120
Administrator Settings
Note that if both TV monitor format and VGA format is set to Normal, the system will
skip the 1+3 layout, which is not beneficial for 4:3 monitors.
Note that the following menu settings do not apply for all TANDBERG MXP systems. Please
refer to the actual menu page on your system.
TV Monitor Format (wide screen monitors only)
To fully leverage your wide screen display, activate the Native 16:9 format by setting the TV
Monitor Format to Wide. Note that you should only change this setting if your TV monitor is a
wide screen (16:9) monitor or projector. All composite- and s-video output formats will then be
optimized for Wide Screen TV monitors.
Normal Output format is optimized for Normal TV monitors (4:3)
Wide Output format is optimized for Wide TV monitors (16:9)
VGA Monitor Format
To fully leverage your wide screen display, activate the Native 16:9 format by setting the VGA
Monitor Format to Wide. Note that you should only change this setting if your VGA monitor is a
wide screen (16:9) monitor or projector. The VGA and DVI output will then be optimized for Wide
Screen VGA and High Definition (HD) display.
Normal Output format is optimized for Normal VGA monitors (4:3)
Wide Output format is optimized for Wide VGA monitors (16:9)
Wide screen VGA or TV monitor in Normal (stretched) mode.
121
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Wide screen VGA or TV monitor In Wide (native) mode.
VGA Out Quality*
The supported range of VGA formats will be optimized for the VGA display monitor based on the
source image.
VGA Out Quality enables the user to change the preferred format for the DVI/VGA output. It is
recommended to keep this setting in Auto unless your screen doesn’t support some of the XGA
or SVGA formats the system is using. Note that the VGA Out port support VESA Power
Management.
Auto VGA output format will be optimized dependant of the video source format,
refresh and of the EDID information available.
Supported formats are:
SVGA (800x600) 75Hz
XGA (1024x768) 60Hz / 75Hz
WXGA (1280x768) 60Hz
SVGA 800x600 VGA output format is forced to SVGA format (800x600) 75Hz
75Hz
XGA 1024x768 VGA output format is forced to XGA format (1024x768) 60Hz
60Hz
VGA Out Quality for Wide XGA:
If VGA Monitor Format is set to Wide, PC Picture Format is set to Normal, VGA Out
Quality is set to Auto, the layout on the monitor is either fullscreen or POP, and the
input source to the largest window is PC with resolution 1024x768, the system will use
WideXGA (1280x768) instead of XGA, when the monitor supports this.
PC Picture Format (wide screen monitors only)
PC Picture Format setting only takes effect when TV or VGA Monitor Format is set to Wide. Use
this setting to determine if you want your PC presentations to be shown stretched in full screen,
or with correct aspect ratio using part of the widescreen display. With the VGA Out Quality set to
Auto the presentation will be of the best possible quality supported by the monitor.
122
Administrator Settings
Normal VGA output will have 4:3 aspect ratio on wide screen monitor.
Wide VGA output will utilize the wide screen monitor at full.
PC presentation shown in Normal (correct ratio) mode.
PC Presentation shown in Wide (stretched) mode.
123
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.1.9 Software Options
The system requires a valid option key to activate MultiSite and/or Presenter functionality. In
order to activate additional bandwidth, you need to enter a bandwidth key. A restart of the system
is required after entering a new option and/or bandwidth keys. If the key is invalid, the original key
will be used.
The following options are available:
1. No option
2. Presenter
3. MultiSite + Presenter
4. Bandwidth options
124
Administrator Settings
4.2 Menu Settings
Menu Settings contain the settings:
Menu Timeout In Call
Welcome Menu
Welcome Picture
Logo
Menu on TV
Menu on PC
Balloon Help
Display Welcome Text
Welcome Text
Administrator Password
125
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.2.1 Menu Timeout In Call
Main menu appears on the bottom line of the screen. Set Menu Timeout In Call to On if you want
the menu to time out automatically when you are in a call.
On The menu will time out automatically after 15 seconds if there is no activity on the
remote control. Menu timeout does only apply when you are in a call. Outside a call,
the menu will not time out.
Off The menu will not time out automatically. Press Cancel (X) to hide the main menu
manually.
126
Administrator Settings
4.2.2 Welcome Menu
The Welcome Menu contains the Main Menu, System Status, your System Name and dial in
numbers.
On The Welcome Menu is shown when the system wakes up from standby mode.
Off The Welcome Menu is not shown when the system wakes up from standby mode.
Press the OK button to open the welcome menu.
127
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.2.3 Welcome Picture
The Welcome Picture is what you see in the background of the welcome menu.
Selfview Selfview is shown in the background of the welcome menu. In most cases this
means that main camera is displayed and you can see the video image of
yourself.
Off No picture is shown in the background of the welcome menu.
128
Administrator Settings
4.2.4 Logo
It is possible to upload a company logo to the system. For more information about how to upload
a Logo, see Appendix 6. Set the Logo settings to On to display the logo.
On Choose On if you want the company logo to appear in the background of the
welcome menu.
Off The logo is not displayed.
Note: The TANDBERG Logo will be displayed if no other company logo is load and logo is
enabled.
129
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.2.5 Menu on TV
The Menu on TV setting decides if the menu shall be displayed on the TV screen or not. For
optimal layout of the menu, Menu on TV should be Off if Menu on PC is On and vice versa.
On The menu is available on the TV screen.
Off The menu is not available on the TV screen.
130
Administrator Settings
4.2.6 Menu on PC
The Menu on PC setting decides if the menu shall be displayed on the PC (VGA screen) screen
or not. For optimal layout of the menu, Menu on TV should be Off if Menu on PC is On and vice
versa.
On The menu is available on the PC screen.
Off The menu is not available on the PC screen.
131
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.2.7 Balloon Help
It is possible to enable / disable the balloon help window.
On Choose On if you want help text windows to appear.
Off There will be no help text window.
132
Administrator Settings
4.2.8 Display Welcome Text
The welcome text displays your system name and dial in numbers by default. It is possible to hide
this information by choosing Display Welcome Text Off.
On Welcome text is displayed on the welcome menu.
Off Welcome text is not displayed on the welcome menu.
133
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.2.9 Welcome Text
You can change the welcome text to any text you like, instead of the default text. Remember that
Display Welcome Text must be On to be able to edit the welcome text.
134
Administrator Settings
4.2.10 Administrator Password
It is recommended to put an Administrator Password on the system. The Administrator Password
can be maximum 5 digits long. The Administrator Password dialog box will pop up when you
choose Administrator Settings from the Control Panel. This will prevent occasional users from
going in to administrator settings. With an administrator password, you can ensure that your
system will behave in the same way every time and that only dedicated people are allowed to
make changes to the system.
135
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.3 Presentation Settings
Presentation Settings contain:
Presentation Start
H.239
Startup Video Source
Presentation Source
Snapshot Source
Auto-Display Snapshot
PIP Appearance
PIP Placing
VNC Settings
136
Administrator Settings
4.3.1 Presentation Start
If your system has Dual Stream capabilities, you can show two video streams at the same time
(see also Dual Stream). Presentation Start is Auto by default. This means that you will start Dual
Stream (a second video stream) automatically when starting a presentation. Dual Stream requires
the Presenter Option and H.263 video. To check which options are installed, see the System
Information menu in Control Panel.
Manual means that you manually choose if you want to start Duo Video or not every time you
start a presentation.
Auto Dual Stream starts automatically when you start a presentation (in other words,
when you choose a second video source). If your system or the far end system is
not capable of Duo Video/H.239, you will not use Dual Stream, but rather send the
presentation source as your Main Video
Manual When starting a presentation, select Presentation in the call menu and select Start
Presentation. Choose a video source from the list displayed on the screen.
137
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.3.2 H.239
H.239 supports transmission of two video streams. It combines elements of Duo Video and
People+Content. If H.239 is disabled you will still be able to start TANDBERG Dual Video
Stream*
Enabled Enables H.239
Disabled Disables H.239
* The TANDBERG 550 MXP can only receive Dual Video Stream.
138
Administrator Settings
4.3.3 Startup Video Source
The Startup Video Source is the video source on display when the system wakes up from
standby mode. If you use Main Camera as start up source, the system will start with Main
Camera every time the system wakes up from standby, regardless of what the previous user was
using.
You can change Startup Video Source to Main Camera, PC, Document Camera, VCR, AUX,
VNC or Current depending on what video sources you have available for your system. Choosing
Current will result in the last used video source before the system went to standby.
139
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.3.4 Presentation Source
The Presentation Source is connected to the Presentation button on the remote. Pressing the
Presentation button will put the Presentation Source on display. Presentation Source is PC by
default*. You can change the Presentation Source to any video source and none. Choosing none
results in opening the Presentation menu when pressing the Presentation key.
* Only for systems with the PC video input available.
140
Administrator Settings
4.3.5 Snapshot Source
When you take a Snapshot, you get a snapshot of the Snapshot Source. Current is the default
Snapshot Source. This means that you take a snapshot of the video source that is currently
active.
You can change the Snapshot Source to any video source. In this way you can program the
snapshot key to apply only for PC for instance. Press Snapshot and you will take a PC snapshot
regardless of what video source that is currently active.
141
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.3.6 Auto-Display Snapshot
Select Auto to automatically display a received snapshot. Turn Auto-Display Snapshot Manual if
you wish not to have them displayed on the screen when they are sent or received. The
snapshots will be sent and received, but not displayed. With Auto-Display Snapshot set for
Manual, you must enter the Presentation menu to display a snapshot.
Auto A sent or received snapshot will automatically be displayed on the screen.
Manual A sent or received snapshot will not be displayed on the screen. To see the
snapshot, choose Display Snapshot in the Presentation menu.
142
Administrator Settings
4.3.7 PIP Appearance
A Picture in Picture (PIP) is a smaller picture placed in one of the corners of the screen. The PIP
enables you to see an extra picture in your video conference.
Auto PIP Auto means that Picture In Picture will appear automatically when it is suitable.
A picture in picture is nice when you use Duo Video and you need an extra window
to see all the pictures. You can of course show or hide the PIP with the Layout
button on the remote anytime.
On PIP On means that a Picture in Picture will always be displayed.
Off PIP Off means that PIP is not displayed automatically.
143
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.3.8 PIP Placing
PIP Placing lets you decide where the PIP shall appear. You can of course move the PIP with the
Layout button on the remote anytime.
Top Right PIP is placed in the Top Right corner.
Bottom PIP is placed in the Bottom Right corner.
Right
Bottom PIP is placed in the Bottom Left corner.
Left
Top Left PIP is placed in the Top Left corner.
144
Administrator Settings
4.3.9 VNC Settings
VNC Settings is necessary when using a VNC presentation. See chapter PC Soft Presenter and
VNC for more information on how to use VNC.
Address The IP-address of the PC with the VNC software installed. To find the IP-
address of the PC, place the mouse pointer on the VNC program icon in the
lower right corner of the Windows taskbar. You can also select Command
Prompt from the Startup-menu\Run and type cmd then enter. This will open a
command window and from here. Type “ipconfig” and press enter.
Display The display number for VNC is 0 and upwards. If you are using WinVNC,
Number double-click on the icon on the taskbar to view WinVNC properties. This
number should correspond with Display Number in this menu.
Password Enter the same password as specified in WinVNC properties. The password
will be shown as asterisk signs (*) the next time you enter the menu.
145
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.4 Call Quality
Call Quality contains the settings:
Video Algorithm
Audio Algorithm
AAC-LD 128kbps
Natural Video
Max Upstream Rate
Video Quality
Default Call Settings
146
Administrator Settings
4.4.1 Video Algorithm
The system will automatically select the best video algorithm based on the video source and the
capabilities of the remote system. Use this menu to disable video algorithms in case you have
interoperability issues calling other systems.
H.264 Bandwidth efficient video compression and decompression.
H.263 Normal video compression and decompression.
H.261 Legacy video compression and decompression. The system will always have H.261
enabled. Therefore it is impossible to uncheck H.261.
147
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.4.2 Audio Algorithm
The system will automatically select the best audio algorithm based on the call rate and the
capabilities of the remote system. Use this menu to disable audio algorithms in case you want to
remove “low quality” audio, or if you have interoperability issues calling other systems.
G.722 High quality audio (7 kHz at 48kbps, 56kbps or 64kbps)
G.728 Compressed normal quality audio (telephone quality, 3.1 kHz at 16kbps)
G.711 Normal quality audio (telephone quality 3.1kHz at 64kbps). This audio algorithm is
mandatory for video conferencing equipment and is impossible to uncheck.
G.722.1 Compressed high quality audio (7 kHz at 24kbps, 32kbps and 48kbps).
AAC- CD-quality audio, MPEG-4 Advanced Audio Coding Low Delay (20 kHz, stereo at
LD 128kbps, mono at 64kbps).
Call Rate vs Audio algorithms selected
Modify/remove algorithms used by unchecking the different audio algorithms.
Automatically preferred audio algorithms on call rates up to and including 192kbps
1. G.722.1 (24kbps or 32kbps)
2. G.728 (16kbps)
3. AAC-LD (64kbps or 56kbps)
4. G.722 (56kbps, 64kbps or 48kbps)*
5. G.711 (64kbps, 56kbps or 48kbps)**
6. AAC-LD (48kbps or 128kbps)
Automatically preferred audio algorithms on call rates above 192kbps
1. AAC-LD (128kbps)***
2. AAC-LD (64kbps or 56kbps)
3. G.722 (64kbps, 56kbps or 48kbps)*
4. G.722.1 (32kbps or 24kbps)
5. G.728 (16kbps)
6. G.711 (64kbps, 56kbps, 48kbps)**
7. AAC-LD (48kbps or 128kbps)
* G.722 at 64kbps is used in H.323 (IP) calls only.
** G.711 at 64kbps is used in SIP and H.323 (IP) calls only.
*** Dependent on a call rate above the AAC-LD 128 threshold. Note that this is not available on all TANDBERG systems.
148
Administrator Settings
4.4.3 AAC-LD 128kbps (stereo audio)
Specify a call rate for 128kbps AAC-LD. From this call rate and above, "128kbps AAC-LD" is
available. On lower call rates "64kbps AAC-LD" is available.
Stereo audio requires twice the bandwidth as mono CD-quality audio. Therefore we recommend
to enable stereo audio on high call rates only. To enable stereo CD-quality audio you need to
specify a call rate for when stereo automatically should be enabled. On lower call rates, mono
CD-quality audio "64kbps AAC-LD" will be enabled. Stereo I/O mode needs to be enabled to get
stereo audio, see Stereo Settings for details.
149
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.4.4 Natural Video
Choosing Natural Video will enable 60 fields* per second true interlaced picture for high motion
video. The use of Natural Video requires the H.263+ and H.263++ video protocols. Natural video
will be disabled in H.323 MultiSite calls and in H.320 Continuous Presence MultiSite calls.
Auto Natural Video Auto will enable transmission of Natural Video from 768 kbps and
above. Reception of Natural Video is in this case always enabled.
Off Natural Video Off will disable both transmission and reception of Natural Video.
Custom 384 kbps and above to 1920 kbps and above.
* 50 fields per second on PAL systems.
150
Administrator Settings
4.4.5 Max Upstream Rate (kbps)
The Max Upstream Rate (kbps) defines the desired maximum transmitted call rate. This is to be
able to limit the outgoing bandwidth whilst keeping the maximum incoming bandwidth, especially
useful for home offices with different upstream and downstream rates, typically ADSL.
151
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.4.6 Video Quality
The different video sources need different Video Quality Settings. Main Camera, VCR, AUX and
Split Screen have Motion as default. PC, Document Camera and VNC have Sharpness as
default.
Motion Optimized for smooth motion video (CIF/SIF for low bandwidths, iCIF/iSIF for
high bandwidths).
Sharpness Optimized for sharp video (4CIF/4SIF, SVGA, XGA).
Auto The system chooses the best of Motion or Sharpness depending on picture
layout and bandwidth.
4.4.6.1 Intelligent Video Management (IVM)
It is possible to configure the picture sent from the system depending upon specific requirements
and applications adding an additional level of flexibility and adaptability.
Generally, the IVM will always try to transmit the format closest to the video input format. Each
video input can be configured to either motion or sharpness:
Motion: When there is a need for higher frame rates, typically when a large number of
participants are present or when there is a lot of motion in the picture.
At low bit rate:
CIF will be used from a PAL video input
SIF from NTSC
VGA/SVGA/XGA from PC, Digital Clarity
At high bit rate:
iCIF will be used from a PAL video input, Natural Video
iSIF from NTSC, Natural Video
VGA/SVGA/XGA from PC, Digital Clarity
Sharpness: Improved quality of detailed images and graphics, lower frame rate, ideal for
enhancing quality at lower bandwidths.
4xCIF will be used from a PAL video input, Digital Clarity
4xSIF from NTSC, Digital Clarity
VGA/SVGA/XGA from PC, Digital Clarity
IVM Resolution
The following table shows relationship between Transmission modes selected by the system
when Motion or Sharpness is set in the Call Quality menu. IVM will use this table to optimize the
Video quality, according to the capabilities of the remote system(s):
152
Administrator Settings
Basic Video Video Input Transmission mode selection rules
Quality
MOTION PAL iCIF@50 -> CIF -> QCIF
MOTION NTSC iSIF@60 -> iCIF@60 -> SIF@60 -> CIF ->
QCIF
MOTION VGA CIF -> QCIF
MOTION SVGA CIF -> QCIF
MOTION XGA CIF -> QCIF
SHARPNESS PAL 4xCIF -> VGA -> CIF -> QCIF
SHARPNESS NTSC 4xSIF -> 4xCIF -> VGA -> SIF -> CIF ->
QCIF
SHARPNESS VGA VGA -> 4xCIF -> CIF -> QCIF
SHARPNESS SVGA SVGA -> 4xCIF -> VGA -> CIF -> QCIF
SHARPNESS XGA XGA -> SVGA -> 4xCIF -> VGA -> CIF ->
QCIF
Transmission mode with Motion or Sharpness selections.
4.4.6.2 Native Resolutions
The following live video resolutions are supported on the system:
Native NTSC:
4xSIF (704 x 480 pixels), Digital Clarity
Interlaced SIF (352 x 480 pixels), Natural Video
SIF (352 x 240 pixels)
Native PAL:
4xCIF (704 x 576 pixels), Digital Clarity
Interlaced CIF (352 x 576 pixels), Natural Video
CIF (352 x 288 pixels)
QCIF (176 x 144 pixels)
SQCIF (128 x 96 pixels)
Native PC Resolutions:
XGA (1024 x 768 pixels), Digital Clarity
SVGA (800 x 600 pixels), Digital Clarity
VGA (640 x 480 pixels), Digital Clarity
153
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.4.7 Default Call Settings
Default Call Settings are connected with Call Settings in the call menu. If you leave Call Settings
unchanged when making a call, the system will use the Default Call Settings in the call.
In addition to the Call Settings Call Type, Net, Bandwidth and Restrict (56k), you also find settings
for H.320 Auto bandwidth and H.323 Auto bandwidth in Default Call Settings.
Call Type Call Type can be set to:
Video Call
Telephone Call
If either the Call Type is set to Telephone Call or the Place Telephone Call
icon is selected when making a call, the call will be set up as a telephone call.
In all other cases the call will be set up as a video call.
Some network configurations may cause the setup of a video call to fail. The
call will then be set up as a telephone call instead if Fallback to Telephony is
enabled.
For MultiSite calls, Call Type enables you to specify both telephone calls and
video calls in the same conference.
Network The Network alternatives are:
Auto
ISDN
H.323
SIP
If Auto is selected, the system will select the right network depending on the
entered number:
If an IP-address (e.g. 10.12.34.56 ) is entered, H.323 is selected.
If the first digits in the number match those set in H.323 Prefix, H.323
is selected.
In other cases, ISDN (H.320) is selected.
ISDN indicates:
ISDN-BRI
ISDN-PRI
Leased E1/T1
External Networks
If a gatekeeper is present, it is possible to place IP-calls using “telephone-
style” numbers, e.g. an E.164 alias, according to the numbering plan
implemented in the gatekeeper. The gatekeeper will then translate the dialed
154
Administrator Settings
number into an IP-address, see H.323 Settings for more information about
gatekeepers.
Select ISDN to ensure that the call is set up as an ISDN call.
Select H.323 to ensure that the call is set up as an H.323 call.
Select SIP to ensure that the call is set up as an SIP call.
Bandwidth Bandwidth decides the quality of the video picture.
When set to Auto the system will establish a connection using a proper
bandwidth for the call, typically 384kbps for ISDN calls and 768kbps for IP
calls.
When set to Max the system will set up the call with maximum bandwidth
depending on the selected network.
Overview*
Auto: 384 kbps on ISDN/768 kbps on LAN
Max: 768 kbps on ISDN-BRI
1472/1920 kbps (23/30Ch) on ISDN-PRI (T1/E1)
4Mbps(4096 kbps, IP only)
4096 kbps = 4 Mbps, IP only
3072 kbps = 3 Mbps, IP only
2560 kbps = 2,5 Mbps, IP only
1920 kbps = 2 Mbps, 30B
1472 kbps = 23B
1152 kbps = 18B
768 kbps = 12B
512 kbps = 8B
384 kbps = 6B
320 kbps = 5B
256 kbps = 4B
192 kbps = 3B
128 kbps = 2B, Bonding/H.221
64 kbps = 1B, H.221
H0 = 1xH0, 384 kbps, PRI only
* Note that some software versions and networks do not support all channel selections.
Restrict A restricted call uses 56kbps channels rather then the default unrestricted
(56k) 64kbps channels.
Some older networks (primarily in the USA) do not support 64kbps channels
and require the use of restricted 56kbps calls. By default the system will dial
an unrestricted call and downspeed to 56kbps if necessary.
To force a restricted call, choose Restrict (56k) On.
H.221 or 2x64 (2x56) Calling
155
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Some older or low end video systems do not have the ability to make bonded ISDN calls. In these
cases it is necessary to dial both ISDN numbers separately to call those systems.
These types of calls are often referred to as
H.221 calls
2x64 calls
2x56 calls
- as making 2 x 64 kbps or 2 x 56 kbps calls to the same system.
Place this type of call by:
Set Network to ISDN
Set Bandwidth to 128 kbps
A field for the 2nd number pops up in Call Settings.
Enter the second number in the Call Settings field. For 128 kbps calls that use bonding,
ignore the second number field and just enter one number to be dialed.
Using sub-address / extension address / MCU password
Sub-address is used to address different systems on the same ISDN line and is primarily used in
European Countries. LAN equivalent extension address or TCS-4 is used to address different
systems on a LAN, when dialing via a gateway.
To specify an ISDN sub-address or its LAN equivalent extension address (TCS-4), add a star (*)
after the number and then enter the sub-address/extension address.
Example:
12345678*10 ( <number>*<Sub-address/extension address/MCU password>)
When dialing IP via a gateway, the number behind the star (*) on IP might be interpreted as an
extension address.
When calling to external MCU’s requiring a password (TSC-1), this password can be added after
the star (*). If no password is specified, the user will be asked to enter the password (after
connecting to the MCU).
156
Administrator Settings
4.5 Audio
Audio contains the settings:
Inputs
Outputs
Echo Control
Stereo Settings
Audio Levelling (AGC)
Alert Tones and Volume
157
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.5.1 Inputs
Mic 1- 3 and Audio input 4-6
By default, all inputs are enabled. Just plug in an audio source and it is active. Audio inputs that
are On will automatically be mixed. Unconnected inputs will automatically be muted. Select Off to
prevent audio/noise from connected but unused inputs. The activated audio sources are stored
on camera presets.
Mic 1, 2 and 3 are intended for electret type microphones. The microphone inputs are balanced
with 24V phantom power.
Audio input 4 is intended for connection to an external microphone amplifier or an external fixed
mixer. It is crucial that the external mixer is a fixed mixer. Automatic, smart and other types of
adaptive mixers might cause the echo canceller to malfunction.
Audio input 5 is intended for connection to external playback devices or to telephone add-on
hybrids. As there is no acoustic echo canceller on this input it should not be connected to any
microphones. The audio source connected to this input will be heard from the local speaker as
well.
Audio input 6 is intended for connection to a VCR or DVD player. It can also be connected to
other external playback devices. As there is no acoustic echo canceller on this input it should not
be connected to any microphones. The audio entering this input will be heard from the local
speaker as well. If Auto is selected, the audio from the VCR will only be heard when VCR is
selected as video source.
Mix Mode
Auto The adjustment of each microphone signal is done automatically to obtain the best
possible audio and minimize the background noise.
Fixed Fixed will maintain a constant weighting of all microphones.
VCR Ducking
If VCR Ducking is activated, the VCR audio level will be attenuated if someone talks into the
microphone or at the far end.
The VCR ducking is only valid for audio input 6. If input 5 and 6 is configured to one stereo input
pair, see Stereo Settings, then the VCR ducking will apply to both input 5 and 6.
Level Settings
It is possible to adjust the audio input levels according to which external audio equipment is
connected. The on-screen audio level indicator will make it easier to set the correct input level
158
Administrator Settings
settings. The input level should be adjusted so that the average level reaches the preferred level
marker. The audio inputs are adjustable in steps of 1.5 dB from 0 dB to 22.5 dB.
The default levels for Mic 1,2 and 3 are set for use with an Audio Technica AT871R or AT841R
microphone in an average videoconferencing room. The gain can be adjusted correctly for a wide
range of microphones.
A few examples of microphone levels are:
Audio Technica +3dB (default)
AT871R
Audio Technica +7dB
AT851R
TANDBERG Audio +19.5dB
Science
Audio inputs 4, 5 and 6 are set to a default level which is adhered to by most manufacturers
of audio-visual equipment and is a level at which most audio-visual equipment (CD-players,
VCRs or DVDs) will work.
Please see Interfaces for details on the audio connectors.
159
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.5.2 Outputs
Audio out 1 - 3
Audio out 1 is intended for connection to TANDBERG Digital Natural Audio Module, televisions or
audio amplifiers.
Audio out 2 is intended for connection to audio recording equipment or to a telephone add-on
hybrid. The signal is a mix of audio from both the far end and local end (not from Audio in 5).
Audio out 3 is intended for connection to a VCR or other recording equipment. The signal is a mix
of audio from far end and local end (not from Audio in 6).
Note that audio out 2 or audio out 3 never should be connected to a loudspeaker placed in the
same room as the microphones connected to the system. This will cause “howling” and possible
damage to the speaker system. If an output is Off, no audio will be sent to that output.
Out 1 Mode
If Out 1 Mode is set to Auto, the system will select analog or digital (SPDIF) mode dependent on
the detected Audio Module. If a TANDBERG Digital NAM is detected, SPDIF mode will be
selected, otherwise analog mode will be selected.
Setting the Out 1 Mode to either Analog or SPDIF will override the auto-detected mode.
See Stereo Settings for more information.
Audio Module
Select Audio Module according to the type of Audio Module installed if this is not automatically
detected. The Audio Module setting is only available if the audio module of the system is
unidentified.
Level Settings
Adjust the audio output levels according to the parameters of the external audio equipment
connected. These levels should only be adjusted when installing new audio equipment. The
default settings are correct for the TANDBERG Digital Natural Audio module and for most
consumer electronics devices (televisions, VCRs, etc.). The volume keys on the remote control
adjust the level of output 1 (the speaker output). The volume control has no effect on other
outputs.
Please see Interfaces for details on the audio connectors.
160
Administrator Settings
4.5.3 Echo Control
Mic 1-3 and Audio 4
Each of the 3 microphone inputs and Audio input 4 has a separate acoustic echo canceller. One
echo canceller per input provides more sophisticated control than having one common canceller
for all microphones.
In addition to echo cancellation, the system has built-in noise reduction (NR). NR reduces
constant background noise (e.g. noise from air-conditioning systems, cooling fans etc.). In
addition, a high pass filter (Humfilter) reduces very low frequency noise.
On Echo control is normally set to On to prevent the far end from hearing their own
audio. Once selected, echo cancellation is active at all times. The echo canceller
continuously adjusts itself to the audio characteristics of the room and
compensates for any changes it detects in the audio environment. If the changes in
the audio conditions are very significant the echo canceller may take a second or
two to re-adjust.
Off You can choose to switch off the echo canceller for the available audio sources.
Echo Control should be switched Off if external echo cancellation or playback
equipment is used.
On+NR Activates both Echo Control and Noise Reduction.
Note that it is your echo canceller that improves the audio quality experienced by the other
site. When you hear an echo of your own audio it is most likely the far end’s echo canceller
that is malfunctioning.
Tips for improving the echo canceller performance:
Place all microphones as far as possible from the loudspeakers. Minimum loudspeaker-
microphone distance should be 2 meters (6.5 ft).
It is recommended to place the microphones between 1 and 2 meters away from the
persons speaking. By using several microphones, the ratio distance loudspeaker-to-
mic/mic-to-speaker can be increased. Increasing this ratio improves the echo canceller
performance.
Place the microphones as far as possible from noise sources.
Reduce the volume setting. Ensure that the loudspeakers do not distort the audio.
The echo canceller tries to estimate the echo path from the speaker system to the
microphones. Moving objects change this path; therefore try to avoid moving objects. Be
especially aware of large objects and objects placed close to either the microphone or the
speaker system as these objects will cause severe changes to the echo path.
Avoid putting paper sheets etc. on the microphone.
Avoid moving the microphone or loudspeaker.
In the presence of low frequency noise, enable the noise reduction (NR).
161
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.5.4 Stereo Settings
Settings Output response
Out 1 Stereo I/O Stereo Audio out 1 Audio out 2 Audio out
Mode* Mode Speakers 3
Analog Off Off Loudspeaker AUX VCR
mono
Analog Off On Loudspeaker Loudspeaker VCR
left right
Analog On Off Loudspeaker VCR-left VCR-right
mono
Analog On On Loudspeaker Loudspeaker VCR
left right
SPDIF Off Off Loudspeaker AUX VCR
mono
SPDIF Off On Loudspeaker AUX VCR
L+R**
SPDIF On Off Loudspeaker VCR-left VCR-right
mono
SPDIF On On Loudspeaker VCR-left VCR-right
L+R**
*Out 1 Mode: Auto/Analog/SPDIF is described in Outputs.
**L+R = Left + Right
When Stereo I/O Mode is Off and Stereo Speakers is Off, the output response will be a mono
loudspeaker signal on Audio out 1, AUX on Audio out 2 and VCR on Audio out 3 regardless on
the Out 1 Mode setting.
In analog mode the Stereo Speaker On will provide a stereo loudspeaker signal on Audio out 1
and 2.
If Stereo I/O Mode is On, audio input 5 and 6 and audio output 2 and 3 will behave as a stereo
input/output pair, VCR-left and right. The VCR Ducking and AGC setting for audio input 6 will in
this case apply to both audio input 5 and 6. The Audio out 2 (VCR-left stereo channel) will be a
mix of the microphones and the far end left channel. Audio out 3 (VCR-right stereo channel) will
be a mix of the microphones and the far end right channel. (Note that stereo speakers set to on in
analog mode will provide a different scheme, see table above for details).
If Stereo I/O Mode is Off, Audio out 2 will be a mix of audio input 6, microphones and the far end
(the received far end signal is either mono, or stereo that is summed left+right into mono in near
end codec). Audio out 3 will be a mix of audio input 5, microphones and the far end. (Note that
stereo speakers set to on in analog mode will provide a different scheme, see table above for
details).
Note that in SPDIF mode, you are able to receive stereo through Audio out 1 independent of the
Stereo I/O mode setting.
162
Administrator Settings
Note that if Stereo Speakers are enabled in the menu without having any stereo speakers
connected to the Digital NAM, it may cause the acoustic echo-canceller to malfunction.
If the system is connected to a Digital NAM, stereo sound on the loudspeakers shall be
present if a stereo input signal is connected to the inputs VCR-Left and VCR-Right or a stereo
signal is received from the Far End.
If the system is not connected to a Digital NAM, stereo sound on the loudspeaker outputs
will be present in the following situations:
If system is idle and a stereo input signal is connected to the inputs VCR-Left and
VCR-Right.
If system is in a call with mic off and a stereo input signal is connected to the inputs
VCR-Left and VCR-Right, or a stereo signal is received from the Far End.
Otherwise the Loudspeaker Left signal will be equal to Loudspeaker Right.
163
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.5.5 Audio Levelling (AGC)
On Select On to allow automatic adjustments (Automatic Gain Control) of audio levels.
When On, the AGC maintains the audio signal level at a fixed value by attenuating
strong signals and amplifying weak signals. Very weak signals, i.e. noise alone, will
not be amplified.
Off Audio levelling is not activated.
Note that to ensure correct behaviour of the AGC, it is crucial that the levels on the input
connectors are adjusted correctly using the audio input level settings. The AGC will not
compensate for severe maladjustment of input levels.
When applying a weak signal in the presence of strong background noise, the AGC might amplify
the background noise as well as the signal. Therefore, in noisy environments, it is advisable to
turn the AGC off.
Example:
In most conferences, the participants will speak at different levels, and be at different
distances from the microphones. As a result, some of the participants would be harder to hear
than others. The AGC corrects this problem by automatically increasing the microphone levels
when “quiet” or “distant” people speak, and by decreasing the microphone levels when
“louder” people speak.
164
Administrator Settings
4.5.6 Alert Tones and Volume
Video Call Alert Tone and Telephone Alert Tone
To help distinguish between incoming video calls and ordinary telephone calls, it is recommended
to use different ringing tones for video calls and telephone calls.
Alert Volume
You may change the volume level for the selected ringing tone.
Alert Speaker
The system also has an internal, call-alerting speaker.
On The internal speaker will warn you of an incoming call even though the monitor may
not be switched on.
Off The internal speaker is switched off.
Key Tones
On There will be a sound indicator when pressing keys on the remote control.
Off There will be no sound when pressing keys on the remote control.
165
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.6 Video
Video contains the settings:
Camera Tracking Mode
MCU Status Line
Floor to Full Screen
Web Snapshots
MultiSite Picture Mode
Video Name
166
Administrator Settings
4.6.1 Camera Tracking Mode
Slow The system waits a while before zooming in on a single person speaking.
Suitable when wide-angle images are preferred over close-up images.
Normal Should be used in regular meetings.
Fast The system quickly zooms in on a single person speaking. Suitable when close-
ups are preferred over wide-angle images.
Note that the Camera Tracking Mode entry will not be available if not using the TANDBERG
WAVE II Camera.
167
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.6.2 MCU Status Line
On The MultiSite / MCU / DuoVideo indicators will be displayed and provide information
about the conference.
Off The MultiSite / MCU / DuoVideo indicators will not be displayed.
Auto The MultiSite / MCU / DuoVideo indicators will be displayed for a few seconds and
then timed out. When grabbing the remote control, the indicators will be shown
again.
168
Administrator Settings
4.6.3 Floor to Full Screen
When "Floor to Full Screen" is enabled, someone who requests floor will be seen by all
participants as full screen. When "Floor to Full Screen" is "Off", someone who request floor in a
MultiSite conference using the 5+1 layout will be seen in the large square, rather than full screen.
On The participant that has floor is displayed in full screen regardless of what MultiSite
layout that is used.
Off The participant that has floor is displayed in the MultiSite layout that is used.
169
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.6.4 Web Snapshots
The system is able to generate JPEG snapshots and provide them to the world outside by
request (as ‘http get’ or via ftp). See Appendix 6 for descriptions of the possible snapshot files.
On Snapshots generation is enabled.
Off Snapshots generation is disabled.
Note that web snapshots are not generated if the conference is encrypted.
170
Administrator Settings
4.6.5 MultiSite Picture Mode
MultiSite* Picture Mode decides the default layout of a MultiSite call. Choose between the
layouts: Auto Split, 4 Split, 5+1 Split, and Voice Switched. You can change the layout during a
call using the layout option in MultiSite Services.
Auto Split Auto Split displays all participants on the screen simultaneously. A MultiSite
call with 3 or 4 video participants is displayed with 4 Split. A MultiSite call with
5 or 6 video participants is displayed with 5+1 Split.
Voice Voice Switched mode displays the participant that is speaking in full screen.
Switched
4 Split 4 Split displays the 4 last speaking Participants.
5+1 Split 5+1 Split displays the speaking participant in a big picture and the other
participants in small pictures.
Continuous Presence layout 4 split
Advanced Continuous Presence Layout (5+1) - In this mode the Intelligent Call Management will use 4*CIF resolution for
better clarity and H.263 video compression
171
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Voice Switched mode
172
Administrator Settings
4.6.6 Video Name
As a default, the video inputs are given the names Main Cam, PC, Doc Cam, VCR, AUX or VNC,
dependent on what video sources are available on your system. The video names cannot exceed
eight characters. The names correspond to the video names in the Presentation Menu (Choose
Presentation from the main menu and open the Main Video or Presentation Video pop up menu).
If video names are changed, you will see the changed name appear in the Main Video and
Presentation Video menus.
173
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.7 Security
Security contains the settings:
Encryption
Encryption Mode
Passwords
174
Administrator Settings
4.7.1 Encryption
(Country specific)
Auto The system will try to set up calls using encryption.
Point to point calls: If the far end system supports encryption (AES or DES), the call
will be encrypted. If not, the call will proceed without encryption.
MultiSite calls*: In order to have encrypted MultiSite calls, all sites must support
encryption. The padlock symbol will indicate encryption mode (AES or DES). If there
is a mix of AES and DES encryption, only the symbol for DES encryption (single
padlock) will be displayed. The 'closed padlock' will only be displayed on each site
when all links in the MultiSite conference are encrypted.
If the far end supports encryption, the systems will initiate encryption after the call is
connected (an ‘open padlock’ symbol will be displayed). When encryption has been
established, a ‘closed padlock’ symbol will be displayed.
On The system will only send and receive encrypted data. The call will not be
established if not all participants support encryption.
Off The system will not send or receive encrypted data.
Technical encryption information like encryption algorithm and encryption check code can be
found in the Call Status menu.
* Only available on systems with MultiSite option supported and installed.
175
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.7.2 Encryption Mode
Auto The system will try to use the most secure encryption - AES, dependent on the
capabilities of the other sites. For sites that do not support AES encryption, DES
encryption will be tried.
AES The system will try to use AES with 128 bits encryption when setting up calls. If AES
is not supported by the other site(s), no other type of encryption will be initiated.
DES The system will always try to set up the call using DES with 56 bits encryption on
ISDN and IP. If all other sites do not support DES, no other type of encryption will be
initiated.
Both AES and DES Encryption are supported for mixed ISDN/IP calls. In addition AES -and DES
Encrypted sites can be connected at the same time.
176
Administrator Settings
4.7.3 Passwords
Administrator Password, IP Access Password, Streaming Password, VNC Password, Access
Code and Remote Software Upgrade password are duplicated from their respective menus.
Using the Security menu gives you a quick way to change all passwords of the system.
177
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8 Network
The network menu contain:
ISDN/External/Leased E1/T1
LAN Settings
Network Profiles
Data Port
178
Administrator Settings
4.8.1 ISDN/External/Leased E1/T1
Network Before using the system it is necessary to specify which network to use and
Type define its settings.
ISDN- If you want to use your system via ISDN-BRI, you should select Network Type:
BRI ISDN-BRI and enter the ISDN BRI Settings menu to set the BRI parameters.
ISDN- If you want to use your system via ISDN-PRI, you should select Network Type:
PRI* ISDN-PRI and enter the ISDN PRI Settings menu to set the PRI parameters.
Leased If you want to use your system via Leased E1/T1, you should select Network
E1/T1* Type: Leased E1/T1 and enter the Leased E1/T1 Settings (see Leased E1/T1
Settings) menu to set the Leased E1/T1 parameters.
External If you want to use special networks and connect using RS449, V.35, X.21 or
connect to ISDN via an external IMUX, you should select Network Type: External
and enter the External Network Settings (see External Network Settings menu to
set the External Network parameters.
*Note that both Leased E1/T1 and ISDN-PRI uses the same interface on the codec marked
E1/T1.
179
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8.2 ISDN-BRI Settings
To make sure your system will work properly using ISDN-BRI, make the following settings:
1. Set ISDN switch type
2. Enter ISDN line numbers (+ SPIDs if required)
3. Disable unused lines
Some software versions do not support 6 ISDN lines, therefore some of the Line Setup entries
may be grayed out.
4.8.2.1 ISDN BRI switch type
Select the type of ISDN network connected to your unit. Note that 1TR6 should only be used if
you are operating the system behind a PABX.
4.8.2.2 Line setup
This menu allows you to program the numbers associated with your ISDN line. If you want to use
this ISDN line, you need to set Enabled On and enter the numbers of your ISDN line. If some of
the ISDN lines are not to be used, set Enabled Off. Line 1 should always be enabled. National
ISDN and AT&T Custom ISDN might require SPID numbers associated with your ISDN numbers.
If you have received two different SPID (Service Profile IDentifier) numbers for each ISDN line
from your network provider, you must program both.
Example:
Numbers SPIDS
ISDN BRI 1: 67838498 016783849800
67838498 016783849810
ISDN BRI 2: 23478060 012347806000
23478070 012347807000
ISDN BRI 3: 23478420 012347842000
23478430 012347843000
ISDN BRI 4: 23478520 012347852000
23478530 012347853000
ISDN BRI 5: 23478540 012347854000
23478550 012347855000
ISDN BRI 6: 23478560 012347856000
23478570 012347857000
180
Administrator Settings
4.8.2.3 Advanced ISDN Settings
Sub address
Using a sub address enables you to connect up to eight ISDN terminals to the same ISDN
telephone number and line. The terminals are addressed by using different sub addresses. To
call a terminal with a sub address, separate the ISDN telephone number and the sub address
with a ‘*’. Note that this service has limited access on some ISDN networks.
Example: 12345678*2 (up to four digit sub addresses are possible).
Validate Numbers / MSN (Multiple Subscriber Number)
The use of MSN (Multiple Subscriber Number) enables you to attach different ISDN terminals,
with different numbers, to the same physical ISDN telephone line. If Validate Numbers is set to
"On" only calls to those numbers specified in the Line Setup menus will be answered. This
service can be ordered from your telephone company.
Parallel dial
On Channels will be dialed and connected in parallel when setting up a BONDING call.
Off Channels will be dialed one by one, which may increase the dialing time.
Send Own Numbers
On The system will send its own numbers to the far end.
Off The system will not send its own numbers to the far end, but please note that the
network may still send your numbers to the far end.
Sending Complete
On The system will send the ISDN message information element Sending Complete.
The system will not send Sending Complete. Default is “Off”
Off
181
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8.3 ISDN-PRI Settings
To make sure your system will work properly using ISDN-PRI, configure the following
settings:
1. Set PRI switch type
2. Enter PRI line number
Note that the T1 format is predefined to ESF and the line code is B8ZS. This is not configurable.
4.8.3.1 Number Range
Enter the range of numbers for your PRI line. If this number is programmed and MSN: On (see
Validate numbers in Advanced ISDN Settings) only calls to this number will be answered.
4.8.3.2 ISDN PRI Switch Type
Select the type of PRI switch to which your system is connected.
Below is a list of common ISDN-PRI/T1 switches.
Manufacturer PRI Switch Type setting
Type
ATT 4 ESS AT&T AT&T ISDN
AT&T ISDN or National ISDN*
ATT 5 ESS AT&T/Lucent
DMS 100 Northern National ISDN
DMS 250 Telecom National ISDN
Telecom
Northern
* Settings will depend on configuration of the switch. PRI Switch Type is not changed when
Restoring Defaults.
4.8.3.3 Channel Hunting
Max Channels Maximum number of channels the system may use at any given time.
Low The lowest numbered B-channel that may be used by the system when
Channel selecting channels for outgoing calls.
High Channel The highest numbered B-channel that may be used by the system when
selecting channels for outgoing calls.
Search Specifies where the system will start searching for available B-channels
for outgoing calls.
182
Administrator Settings
Example:
Max Channels may be used for PRIs that are provisioned for a lower number of channels.
High Channel, Low Channel and Search may be used for PRIs provisioned with specific
requirements for B-channel usage.
In the example above, the system will start searching for available B-channels at channel 20,
since Search is set to High and High Channel is set to 20. The system will not search for
channels below 10, since Low Channel is set to 10. Furthermore if the user tries to make an 8
channel call, the call will be established with 6 channels, since Max Channels is set to 6.
4.8.3.4 Line Settings
T1 Cable T1 Cable Length 1 specifies the distance to the CSU connected to the
Length 1 E1/T1 port 1 on codec 1.
E1-CRC-4 is used for most E1-PRI configurations. You can turn it off if not
E1-CRC-4 supported by your E1 network equipment.
For further information see Appendix 8: Connecting the system to PRI/T1.
4.8.3.5 Advanced ISDN-PRI Settings
NSF is a non standard facility. Your network provider may require a service selection in your
ISDN configuration. Enter the Service code here. Valid NSF service codes are from 1 to 31. Enter
0 to disable NSF service codes.
Example:
AT&T offers several digital switched
services. These include SDN with service
code 1 and ACCUNET with service code 6.
Below is a list of common service profiles.
As these profiles may change, contact your
service provider to get the correct profile.
183
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Service profiles Service porfiles for
for AT&T: Sprint:
NSF Service NSF Service
Disable: 0 Reserved: 0
SDN (including Private: 1
GSDN): 1 Inwatts: 2
Megacom 800: 2 Outwatts:3
Megacom: 3 FX: 4
Accunet: 6 TieTrunk: 5
Long Distance: 7
Service profiles for
International 800:
MCI:
8
MultiQuest: 16 NSF Service
Call Redirection VNET/Vision: 1
Service: 23 800: 2
PRISM1, PRISMII,
WATS: 3
900: 4
DAL: 5
184
Administrator Settings
4.8.4 Leased E1/T1 Settings
Call Control
Auto When Auto is selected, the system will automatically initiate a connection as
soon as it detects that the far end tries to make a call. This mode is also
commonly known as "data triggered" mode, because the existence of certain
data patterns on the line triggers a connection.
Manual When manual is selected, the user has to explicitly issue a dial command to
make the system connect to the far end system. Receiving an incoming call is
not possible.
Network Interface
Indicates if the network is of type E1 (30 channels) or T1 (24 channels). E1 will be default for PAL
versions, T1 default for NTSC versions.
Max Channels
Indicates the maximum number of channels the codec is allowed to use on the E1/T1 interface.
When E1 is selected, maximum is 30 channels. When T1 is selected, maximum is 24 channels.
Start Channel
Indicates the first E1/T1 channel the codec is allowed to use. This setting might be used if the
E1/T1 line is shared with other equipment.
T1 Line Coding
Indicates how the signals on the line should be coded. If parts of the line between the systems
use restricted coding, this should be selected.
Note that all settings must be identical on both sides of the Leased E1/T1 connection.
Line Settings
This is the same menu as for ISDN-PRI. Please refer to ISDN-PRI Settings.
185
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8.5 External Network Settings
Before using the system together with external network equipment, you must specify the network
parameters on this page. The system has support for up to 2 Mbps (depending on the Bandwidth
key loaded) using the External Network (RS449/V.35/X.21) interface. Note that the physical
interface on External Networks is one non-standard 26 pin connector. Special cables are
required, see Interfaces for cable pinouts.
Call Control
RS366 RS366 Dialing is the only dialing protocol supported and would normally be
Dialing used together with network clocking RS449/V.35 Compatible when the external
equipment uses RS366 ports.
RS366 RS366 Adtran ISU 512 offers extra usability when dialing RS366 via an
Adtran ADTRAN ISU 512 IMUX. This dialing scheme will map the call type and
ISU 512 bandwidth selection to ADTRAN ISU 512 specific suffixes to the dialed number.
Should only be used when connected to an ADTRAN ISU 512.
The Adtran ISU512 uses the following suffixes <Number>#C#R
#C = Call Type
#2 = audio
#3 = 56kbps
#4 = 64kbps
#R = Channel Rate
#0 = 2xh221 (2x56\64kbps)
#1 to 8 = the Call Rate.
Leased Leased Line is a non-dialing protocol and should be used when two codecs are
Line connected in a point-to-point connection. Use Leased Line when the
handshaking signals DTR and CD are available. DTR and CD correspond to
the X.21 network’s C and I signals.
Manual Manual should be used when no handshake signals are available and the
external equipment requires a constantly connected line.
Network clocking
The network clock setting specifies the number of physical external clock signals.
RS449/V35 Use RS449/V35 Compatible when the external equipment provides two
Compatible clock signals, one for transmit and one for receive. The difference
between RS449 and V35 is only the cable.
X21 Use X21 Compatible when the external equipment provides a common
Compatible clock signal for both transmit and receive.
186
Administrator Settings
4.8.6 H.331 Settings
On Used when broadcasting a videoconference from one site to many others, e.g. via
satellite, where there is no possibility to negotiate quality between the receivers and
the originator due to one-way communication.
Off Standard two-way communication with quality negotiation between both sides.
187
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8.7 LAN Settings
LAN Settings contain:
IP Settings
H.323 Settings
SIP Settings
SNMP Settings
IP Services
Quality of Service
188
Administrator Settings
4.8.7.1 IP Settings
Remember to restart the system after making changes to IP Settings. This can be done by
selecting the “Save and Restart” at the bottom of the IP setting menu. Changes in IP Settings
menu will not have any effect before the system is restarted.
IP-assignment
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) can be selected when a DHCP server is present.
DHCP IP-address, IP-subnet mask and Gateway are not used because the DHCP server
assigns these parameters.
Static The system’s IP-address, IP-subnet mask and Gateway must be specified in the IP-
address field.
IP-address
IP-address defines the network address of the codec. This address is only used in static mode. In
DHCP-mode, the assigned IP-address can be found on the Welcome Menu.
IP-subnet mask
IP-subnet mask defines the type of network. This address is only used in static mode. Your LAN-
administrator will provide the correct value for this field.
Gateway
When using DHCP, the default gateway will be set automatically. If the LAN utilizes static IP
addresses, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway must be specified by the LAN
administrator.
Ethernet Speed
Auto The codec will auto-detect the speed/duplex on the LAN.
10/Half The codec will connect to the LAN using 10Mbps speed/Half Duplex.
10/Full 10 Mbps speed/Full Duplex.
100/Half 100 Mbps speed/Half Duplex.
100/Full 100 Mbps speed/Full Duplex.
IP Access Password
189
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
By setting an IP Access Password on the system, all access to the system using IP (Telnet, FTP
and WEB) requires a password. The default IP Access Password is “TANDBERG”.
DNS Settings
190
Administrator Settings
DNS Settings
DNS Server 1-5
DNS Server defines the network addresses for DNS servers. Up to 5 addresses may be
specified. If the network addresses are unknown, please contact your administrator or Internet
Service Provider.
DNS Domain Name
DNS Domain Name is the default domain name suffix which is added to unqualified names.
Example:
DNS Domain Name is “example.com”, and the name to lookup is “videosystem” will result in a
“videosystem.example.com” DNS lookup.
191
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8.7.2 H.323 Settings
H.323 Settings
E.164 alias
This is the E.164 address of the system. The E.164 address is equivalent to a telephone number,
sometimes combined with access codes. Valid characters are 0-9,* and #. When using a
gatekeeper, the system will send a message to the gatekeeper containing both the E.164 address
and the H.323 ID of the system.
H.323 ID
The H.323 ID of the system may be specified here. The System name is used if no H.323 ID is
entered.
H.323 Call Setup
Direct An IP-address must be used in order to make a H.323 call. The system will
not use a gatekeeper or CallManager
Gatekeeper The system will use a gatekeeper to make a H.323 call.
CallManager The system will use a CallManager to make a H.323 call.
H.323 Prefix
When dialing a number prefixed with digits specified by H.323 Prefix, and with Net: Auto, an
H.323 call will be placed.
Example:
H.323 Prefix is "555". Dialing "55582" with "Net:Auto" will select LAN.
Gatekeeper Settings
CallManager Settings
Advanced H.323 Settings
192
Administrator Settings
Gatekeeper Settings
Gatekeeper Discovery
Auto The system will automatically try to register on any available gatekeeper. If a
gatekeeper responds to the request sent from the codec within 30 seconds this
specific gatekeeper will be used. This requires auto discovery on the gatekeeper
as well. If no gatekeeper responds, the system will not use a gatekeeper for
making H.323 calls and hence an IP-address must be specified manually.
Manual The system will use a specific gatekeeper identified by Gatekeeper IP-address.
Gatekeeper IP Address
This is the gatekeeper IP-address that is used if you specify H.323 Call Setup: Gatekeeper and
Gatekeeper Discovery: Manual.
Note that if your system is part of a TANDBERG Expressway™ firewall traversal solution and
is placed outside the firewall, you should register the IP address of your Border Controller as
the Gatekeeper IP address and set H.323 Call Setup to Gatekeeper.
Authentication Mode
Auto If Authentication Mode is set to Auto and the gatekeeper indicates that it requires
authentication, the endpoint will automatically try to authenticate itself to the
Gatekeeper.
Off If Authentication Mode is set to Off the system will not try to authenticate itself to a
Gatekeeper, but will still try a normal registration.
Authentication ID / Authentication Password
The system sends the Authentication ID and Password to a Gatekeeper for authentication. The
authentication is a one way authentication from the endpoint system to a Gatekeeper, i.e. the
endpoint is authenticated to the Gatekeeper. If the Gatekeeper indicates that no authentication is
required, the endpoint will still try to register.
193
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
CallManager Settings
CallManager IP
This is the CallManager IP-address that is used if you specify H.323 Call Setup: CallManager.
194
Administrator Settings
Advanced H.323 Settings
The Advanced H.323 Settings only have an effect if they are supported by your IP infrastructure.
NAT
NAT, Network Address Translation, is used when a PC and a videoconferencing system are
connected to a router with NAT support. NAT support in the videoconferencing system enables
proper exchange of audio/video data when connected to an external videoconferencing system
(when the IP traffic goes through an NAT router). When NAT is On, the NAT Server Address will
be shown in the startup-menu: "My IP Address: 10.0.2.1".
On The system will signal the configured "NAT Address" in place of its own IP-address
within Q.931 and H.245.
Auto The system will try to determine if the "NAT Address" or the real IP-address should
be used within signalling. This is done to make it possible to place calls to endpoints
on the LAN as well as endpoints on the WAN.
NAT Address
This must be the external/global IP-address to the router with NAT support. Packets sent to the
router will then be routed to the system. In the router, the following ports must be routed to the
system’s IP-address:
Port 1720
Port 5555-
5560
Port 2326-
2365
Please contact your TANDBERG representative for further information.
RSVP
Auto Resource Reservation Protocol enables the systems to request the optimal amount
of bandwidth for the duration of an IP videoconference.
Off Resource Reservation Protocol is switched off.
H.323 Ports
195
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Static When selecting static H.323 ports for TCP connections the ports 5555 to 5565
will be used for Q.931 and H.245 respectively.
Dynamic The system will allocate which ports to use when opening a TCP connection.
The reason for doing this is to avoid using the same ports for subsequent calls
as some firewall consider this as a sign of attack.
196
Administrator Settings
4.8.7.3 SIP Settings
Mode
On Setting the SIP mode to on will enable the system for incoming and outgoing SIP
calls.
Off Setting the SIP mode to off will disable incoming and outgoing SIP calls from the
system.
Display Name
The Display name part of the SIP Address (URI) is usually a full name or system name.
Examples:
“Alice Wonderland”
“System 01”
SIP Address
The SIP Address is the SIP URI used to address the system.
SIP Address (URI): <text field>
Examples:
“alice@example.com”
“1234”
“1234@example.com”
Server Discovery
Auto When Auto is selected, the SIP Server address is obtained using Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
Manual When Manual is selected, the manually configured SIP Server address will be
used.
Server Address
197
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
The Server Address is the manually configured address for the outbound proxy and registrar. It is
possible to use a fully qualified domain name, or an IP address. The default port is 5060 for TCP
and UDP, but another one can be provided.
Server Address: <text field>
Examples:
“sipserver.example.com”
“sipserver.example.com:5060”
“10.0.0.2”
“10.0.0.2:5061”
Authentication
User Name
This is the user name part of the credentials used to authenticate toward the SIP Server.
User name: <text field>
Password
This is the password part of the credentials used to authenticate toward the SIP Server.
Password: <text field>
198
Administrator Settings
4.8.7.4 SNMP Settings
SNMP Settings
SNMP Trap Host identifies the IP-address of the SNMP manager. SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol, SNMP Ver 1) is used for monitoring and configuring of different entities in
a network. The system's SNMP Agent responds to requests from SNMP Managers (a PC
program etc.). SNMP traps are generated by the agent to inform the manager about important
events.
Traps can be sent to multiple SNMP Trap Hosts. Enter the IP address of up to three SNMP
managers. All traps will then be sent to the hosts listed.
SNMP Community names are used to authenticate SNMP requests. SNMP requests must have a
‘password’ in order to receive a response from the SNMP agent in the codec. Note that the
SNMP Community name is case sensitive. The default password is "public".
199
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8.7.5 IP Services
NTP IP
This is the NTP time server address from which the system can get updated time information.
The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used to synchronize the time of the system to a reference
time server. The NTP IP setting holds the IP address to a time source where the system can get
the exact time. The time server will subsequently be queried every 24th hour for time updates.
The system will use the time to timestamp messages transmitted to Gatekeepers or Border
Controllers requiring H.235 authentication.
200
Administrator Settings
4.8.7.6 Quality of Service
QoS Type
Off No QoS is used.
Diffserv Diffserv QoS method is used. Please see below for details.
IP IP Precedence QoS method is used. Please see below for details.
Precedence
IP Precedence Video
Used to define which priority audio, video, data and signaling should have in the network. The
higher the number, the higher the priority. The priority ranges from 0(off) - 7 for each type of
packets.
Auto will provide the following priority:
Audio 4
Video 4
Data 3
Signaling 6
IP Type of Service (TOS) helps a router select a routing path when multiple paths are available.
Delay Tells the router to minimize the delay.
Throughput Tells the router to maximize the throughput.
Reliability Tells the router to maximize the reliability.
Cost Tells the router to minimize the cost.
IP Precedence Telephony
Used to define which priority audio should have in the network for telephone calls. The higher the
number, the higher the priority. The priority ranges from 0(off) - 7 for each type of packets.
201
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Auto will provide the following priority:
Audio 4
Diffserv Video
Used to define which priority Audio, Video, Data and Signaling packets should have in an IP
network. The priority ranges from 0 to 63 for each type of packets.
Diffserv Telephony
Used to define which priority Audio packets should have in an IP network for telephone calls. The
priority ranges from 0 to 63 for each type of packets.
202
Administrator Settings
4.8.8 Network Profiles
This menu consists of 7 network profiles; a prefix can be added for each profile. If you add a
prefix to a profile, this prefix will automatically be added in front of the number being dialed.
Example:
0 is added as a Call Prefix to the 2nd profile, ISDN. If you enter 12345678 in the dial menu
and select ISDN, the number dialed will be 012345678.
Using the three last profiles you can enter the name of a profile, prefix and network selection.
This is useful if you have a fixed prefix for your service provider.
203
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
4.8.9 Data Port
The system provides up to two standard RS232 serial ports to allow a computer to be connected
for data transfer and control purposes. Note that when connecting to a PC the connecting cable
must be a straight through RS232 cable.
Baud Rate, Parity, Databits and Stopbits
If you wish to connect a PC to Data port 1, you must ensure that the PC and the system are
identically configured. The available settings are:
Baud 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Rate None, Odd, Even
Parity 7, 8
Databits 1, 2
Stopbits
The control interface provided by the data port supports a subset of the Hayes command set as
well as a comprehensive set of system specific commands. It maintains communication with the
data port’s command interpreter at all times. All features available from the hand-held remote
control can be accessed through the data port.
Data Port 2
Data port 2 is dedicated to the main camera and will not be available in standard configuration.
The Data Port 2 menu contains the same items as the Data Port 1 menu; Baud rate, Parity,
Databits, Stopbits except for the Mode, which has VISCA and Auto selections.Mode.
The system will automatically detect WAVE cameras. If you are using a camera supporting the
VISCA protocol, select Mode: VISCA.
If Mode is Auto and no camera is connected to the Data port 2, the Baudrate, Parity, Databits and
Stopbits settings will be enabled.
204
Administrator Settings
4.9 Restore Default Settings
Restore Default Settings will restore all administrator settings. Note that this will not affect your
Call Directory information, Network Type, Line Setup numbers or your SPID numbers.
205
5 Peripheral Equipment
Using the optional peripheral devices outlined in this chapter and the many others available, you
will be able to build your own applications for use with the system, thereby better integrating the
system into your business environment. This chapter will explain how to connect peripheral
equipment to your system. First of all however, we recommend you examine Interfaces, with
details on the available connectors on the back of the system Codec.
Peripheral Equipment contains:
Interfaces
Document Camera
VCR / DVD
Additional Cameras
Additional Microphones
TANDBERG DNAM
Stereo Speaker Kit
Telephone Add-On
Dual Monitor
XGA Monitors and Projectors
VESA Display Power Management
Digital Monitor Power Management
Extended Display Identification
1
Peripheral Equipment
5.1 Interfaces
5.1.1 Video
5 Video Inputs:
2 video inputs supporting S-Video through Mini-DIN connectors.
2 video inputs supporting composite signals through RCA connectors.
1 VGA/DVI-I (DVI = Digital Video Interface, I = Integrated Digital & Analog) input
supporting resolutions SVGA (800x600), XGA (1024x768) and SXGA (1280x1024),
analog or digital.
(use VNC as a 6th video input).
The standard camera uses one of the S-Video inputs.
Levels:
Composite: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm
S-Video (Y/C):
Y: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm
C (PAL): 0.3 Vpp, 75 ohm
C (NTSC): 0.28 Vpp, 75 ohm
The system will automatically adapt to a PAL or NTSC input.
VGA formats supported on 'DVI-I in':
SVGA (800x600) 60Hz, 72Hz, 75Hz, 85Hz
XGA (1024x768) 60 Hz, 70Hz, 75Hz
SXGA (1280x1024) 60Hz
HD720p (1280x720) 50,60 Hz
6 Video Outputs:
2 S-Video outputs, Mini-DIN connectors.
2 composite video outputs, RCA connectors.
2 VGA/DVI-I (DVI = Digital Video Interface, I = Integrated Digital & Analog) output
supporting resolutions SVGA (800x600) and XGA (1024x768) analog or digital.
The first Mini-DIN connector and the first RCA connector provide main video (incoming/outgoing
video and menus). The two other connectors provide selfview/snapshot/Duo Video. The S-Video
outputs are used by default by the monitors. The outputs are always active. The format of the
output will be either PAL or NTSC depending on your country’s standard video format.
207
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Levels:
Composite: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm
S-Video (Y/C):
Y: 1 Vpp, 75 ohm
C (PAL): 0.3 Vpp, 75 ohm
C (NTSC): 0.28 Vpp, 75 ohm
VGA formats supported on 'DVI-I out':
SVGA (800x600) 75Hz
XGA (1024x768) 60Hz
WXGA (1280x768) 60Hz
HD720p (1280x720) 50,60 Hz
DVI and specifications:
DVI stands for Digital Video Interface, and is a form of video interface technology made to
maximize the quality of flat panel LCD monitors and high-end video graphics cards.
The TANDBERG codec contains a DVI-I plug that can transmit either digital DVI signals or
standard analog VGA signals, depending on what type of monitor is connected.
DVI Specifications
TANDBERG DVI-I follows the VESA Monitor Timing Standard v1.08, also knows as Display
Monitor Timing (DMT).
Analog Horizontal Vertical Pixel
Frequency frequency Clock
800x600 @ 46.875kHz 75.00Hz 49.50MHz
75Hz
1024x768 48.363kHz 60.004Hz 65.00MHz
@ 60Hz
Digital
800x600 @ 46.875kHz 75.00Hz 49.50MHz
75Hz
1024x768 48.363kHz 60.004Hz 65.00MHz
@ 60Hz
DVI-I Video resolution supported in F1 and above
The resolution used when showing a PAL image like the WAVE II is:
800x600 @ 75Hz.
The resolution used when showing a NTSC image like the WAVE II is:
1024x768 @ 60Hz.
Supported DVI cables:
TANDBERG supports DVI-D Single-Link, DVI-A and DVI-I Single-Link format cables.
208
Peripheral Equipment
DVI-D cables transmit digital T.M.D.S. signals, DVI-A cables transmit analog VGA signals and
DVI-I cables can transmit either digital or analog signals.
It is possible to extend existing DVI cables by the use of extension cables. The maximum cable
length however, is 5 meters. Going beyond that may result in quality loss.
DVI-I - Combined Analog and Digital Connector Pin Assignments:
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
Assignment Assignment Assignment
1 T.M.D.S. 9 T.M.D.S. 17 T.M.D.S. Data0-
Data2- Data1-
2 T.M.D.S. 10 T.M.D.S. 18 T.M.D.S. Data0+
Data2+ Data1+
3 T.M.D.S. 11 T.M.D.S. 19 T.M.D.S.
Data2/4 Shield Data1/3 Shield Data0/5 Shield
4 T.M.D.S. 12 T.M.D.S. 20 T.M.D.S. Data5-
Data4- Data3-
5 T.M.D.S. 13 T.M.D.S. 21 T.M.D.S. Data5+
Data4+ Data3+
6 DDC Clock 14 +5V Power 22 T.M.D.S. Clock
Shield
7 DDC Data 15 Ground (return 23 T.M.D.S. Clock+
for +5V, HSync
and VSync)
8 Analog Vertical 16 Hot Plug Detect 24 T.M.D.S. Clock-
Sync
C1 Analog Red C2 Analog Green C3 Analog Blue
C4 Analog C5 Analog Ground
Horizontal (analog, R, G &
Sync B return)
5.1.2 Audio
6 Audio Inputs:
3 microphone inputs (balanced, 24V phantom powered) via XLR connectors.
3 audio inputs (line level) via RCA connectors.
All audio inputs are active by default. For further information, refer to chapter Audio.
Audio input connector specification:
Connector label Microphone(s) Audio input(s)
Signal type Balanced Unbalanced
Connector (codec) XLR-F, pin 1-gnd, Female RCA/phono,
pin 2 hot, pin 3- sleeve-ground,
cold/neutral centre-signal
Input impedance 2400 ohms (pin 2 - 10K ohms
3)
Max input level when 83 mVpp 15.5 Vpp
209
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
set to maximum
input level
Max input level when 6.2 mVpp 1.17 Vpp
set to minimum input
level
Range, menu 22.5 dB (16 steps of 22.5 dB (16 steps of
adjustable input gain 1.5 dB) 1.5 dB)
Phantom power 24 V +/- 5% -
voltage
Phantom power 1200 ohms -
resistor, pin 2
Phantom power 1200 ohms -
resistor, pin 3
Max phantom power 12 mA -
current pr mic
3 Audio Outputs:
1 output (line level) via RCA connector providing audio from far end, in addition to dial
tones. This output also supports S/PDIF. S/PDIF (Sony/Philips Digital Interface) is used
by the Digital Natural Audio module.
1 AUX output (line level) via RCA connector providing a mixed signal between audio from
the local side (except from the AUX input) and audio from the far end. This output is
intended for connection to a telephone add-on system. When system is configured as
stereo, this output will provide the left stereo information.
1 VCR output (line level) via RCA connector providing a mixed signal between audio from
the local side (except from the VCR input) and audio from the far end. This output is
intended for connection to a VCR. When system is configured as stereo, this output will
provide the right stereo information.
Audio output connector specification:
Connector label Audio outputs
Signal type Unbalanced
Connector (codec) Female RCA/phono, sleeve-ground,
centre-signal
Output impedance 680 ohms
Max output level when set 15.3 Vpp
to maximum output level
Max output level when set 1.15 Vpp
to minimum output level
Range, menu adjustable 22.5 dB (16 steps of 1.5 dB)
output gain
Volume control attenuation 0 to 21 dB + mute (steps of 1.5 dB)
(audio out 1)
5.1.3 Network
Ethernet:
210
Peripheral Equipment
1 x Ethernet (RJ-45 Jack) LAN interface (10/100 Mb) up to 4 or 6 Mbps depending on the
bandwidth option installed.
To connect the system to a LAN, use the Ethernet cable provided by TANDBERG (or a standard
Ethernet cable).
The cable specification is:
1 ------------ 1
2 ------------ 2
3 ------------ 3
6 ------------ 6
If no LAN is available and the codec is connected directly to a computer, use a crossover cable.
The crossover cable specification is:
If such a connection is needed, the system and the PC must use ‘static’ TCP/IP settings because
no DHCP server is controlling the small “LAN”, which has been created between the computer
and the system. When configuring a back-to-back connection between the PC and the system,
make sure both static IP addresses exist on the same subnet.
ISDN BRI Interface:
ISDN I.420 (RJ-45 Jack) Basic Rate Interface S/T (2B+D), 128 kbps per ISDN I/F
To connect the system to BRI, use the ISDN cable provided by TANDBERG (or a standard BRI
cable).
The pinout of the S/T interface is:
BRI Pinout
Pin-3 TX+
RX+
Pin-4
RX-
Pin-5
TX-
Pin-6
ISDN PRI Interface:
1 x PRI (RJ-45 Jack) Primary Rate & Leased Line E1/T1 (G.703) Interface up to 2 Mbps
1 x PRI (RJ-45 Jack) Primary Rate (for future use).
To connect the system to PRI, use the ISDN cable provided by TANDBERG (or a standard PRI
cable).
The pinout of the E1/T1 interface is:
PRI Pinout Crossover PRI
cable
Pin-1 RX+ 4
211
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Pin-2 RX- 5
Pin-4 TX- 1
Pin-5 TX+ 2
Note! TANDBERG recommends always using category 5 cabling.
NET Interface:
1 x X.21 / V.35 / RS449 with 1 x RS366 Call Control up to 2 Mbps
V35:
V.10 (RS423).
For balanced signals a "0"=low voltage is defined as terminal A positive with respect to terminal
B.
For unbalanced signals a "0"= low voltage is defined as terminal positive with respect to GND.
Cable length max: Leased Line Control = 20 Meter
RS449:
212
Peripheral Equipment
RS366:
All balanced inputs and outputs (A and B) use balanced line signals according to V.11 (RS422)
and single ended signals in accordance with V.10 (RS423).
For balanced signals a "0"=low voltage is defined as terminal A positive with respect to terminal
B.
For unbalanced signals a "0"= low voltage is defined as terminal positive with respect to GND.
Cable length max: Leased Line Control = 20 Meter
213
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
All signals are electrically according to RS232.
Cable length max: 5 meter
X21:
214
Peripheral Equipment
All balanced inputs and outputs (A and B) use balanced line signals according to V.11 (RS422)
and single ended signals in accordance with V.10 (RS423).
For balanced signals a "0"=low voltage is defined as terminal A positive with respect to terminal
B.
For unbalanced signals a "0"= low voltage is defined as terminal positive with respect to GND.
Cable length max: 50 meter
5.1.4 Data port
The data port(s) are implemented as Digital Circuit Terminating Equipment (DCE). The connector
used are female 9-pin D-subs.
The TANDBERG main camera is normally connected to data port 2 and pin number 4 provides
12V DC / 1 Amps to the main camera. Otherwise the pin-outs for both data ports are the same.
Signal name Direction Pin
number
Carrier detect, CD From 1
DCE
Receive data, From 2
RXD DCE
Transmit data, To DCE 3
TXD
Data terminal From 4
ready, DTR DCE
Signal ground, 5
GND
Data set ready, From 6
DSR DCE
Ready to send, To DCE 7
RTS
Clear to send, From 8
CTS DCE
Ring indicator, RI From 9
DCE
215
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.2 Document Camera
A document camera can be used for showing text, diagrams and a variety of graphical material
as well as small three-dimensional objects.
How to use a document camera with your system:
1. Connect the document camera to the Doc Cam input, if available, on the system.
2. Open the Presentation menu from Main menu and choose Doc Cam.
3. You can also program the Presentation key on the remote to activate document camera.
See chapter Presentation Key for more information.
If you want to use S-Video from the document camera, you can connect the document camera to
the AUX input on the system.
Note that this requires a system with an additional video input.
216
Peripheral Equipment
5.3 DVD / VCR
DVD/VCR Playback
Mono
For playback, connect a cable between Video Out on the VCR and Video In (VCR) on the
system. Connect a cable between Audio Out on the VCR and the Audio In (VCR) on the system.
Choose VCR from the Presentation menu to activate the VCR input.
Make sure that Audio In (VCR) is On (see chapter Audio). If audio from VCR is too low, this level
can be adjusted in Audio Settings, Inputs, Level Settings. The audio from the VCR will be audible
in the local speaker system.
The audio from the VCR and your microphone(s) will be mixed and sent to the far end. When a
person talks on either local or far end, the VCR audio level will be reduced to make it easier to
comment on a video recording when Audio Settings, VCR Ducking: On.
DVD/VCR Recording
When recording a conference in stereo, the VCR will record the video as it appears on the main
monitor, the local audio and the remote audio. It will record the conference in stereo if stereo
audio is used in the conference.
When recording a videoconference, connect a cable between Video Out 2 on the system and
Video In on the VCR. Connect a cable between Audio Out 2 on the system and Audio In on the
VCR.
For stereo recording, connect:
Video cable between Video Out 2 on the system to Video In on the VCR
Audio cable between Audio Out 2 (VCR L) to VCR/DVD Audio In (L)
Audio cable between Audio Out 3 (VCR R) to VCR/DVD Audio In (R)
Make sure that:
That Stereo I/O Mode is set to On
128 AAC-LD is enabled
That AAC-LD is enabled
To enable VCR/DVD ducking (reduce volume when speaking), check that VCR Ducking
under Audio Settings is set to On.
When recording, the VCR will record the video as it appears on the main monitor, the local audio
and the audio from the far end.
Note that a system with one video output and one mixed (local and far end) audio output is
required for recording. For playback, a system with one video input and one audio input
without integrated echo cancellation is required.
217
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.4 Additional Cameras
Extra fixed Cameras
You can connect extra fixed cameras to your system, for example, a whiteboard camera. Connect
the video output of the additional camera to one of the available Video inputs on the system.
Multiple controllable Cameras
Attaching multiple cameras to one system expands visibility and is useful in large group
applications.
The system is able to control up to 4 WAVE II -cameras. Optional WAVE II cameras are supplied
with the necessary cabling. In addition, an external power supply for the camera is included.
WAVE II -camera number two must be connected to video input 2. Camera number three must be
connected to video input 3, and so forth.
The maximum length of the camera cable for multiple cameras supported by TANDBERG is 20 m
(65 ft).
218
Peripheral Equipment
Note that additional controllable cameras are only available for rollabout systems. Settops and
personal systems may be able to connect additional cameras.
219
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.5 Additional Microphones
If your environment is such that you require more than one microphone for your room, e.g. you
have a whiteboard at a distance from your table microphone, it is possible to connect additional
microphones to your system. See Appendix 4 for more information.
Note that this requires a system with more than one XLR input.
You can connect up to three additional microphones to your system for a total of 4 microphones.
The connectors are marked Mic1, Mic2, Mic3 (Mic 1-3 XLR) and 4 (RCA Input). The connected
microphones will by default be mixed.
When more than one microphone is connected, you have the option to use the Voice Activate
Camera Tracking feature.
Audio Science Microphone
TANDBERG's award-winning Audio Science microphone is a ceiling-mounted, wide coverage,
boundary microphone, which can eliminate the need for table microphones. It is designed to pick
up the audio from all conference participants seated within in its pick-up area, defined by a
quarter-sphere of approximately 14-foot (4.25m) radius extended in front of, and to the sides of
the microphone.
Please contact your TANDBERG representative for further information.
220
Peripheral Equipment
221
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.6 The TANDBERG DNAM
The TANDBERG Digital Natural Audio Module*:
Audio In: S/PDIF or Analog
Differential In: Differential Mono input (Analog).
Pinout: 1 GND, 2 and 3 signal
Loop out: Will always give a mono analog output of the input. Even with S/PDIF in, this
output will give an analog mono output.
5 x 40W continuous average output power, to the load specified by DNAM speakers.
Fuse 2A 250V Slow, 5 x 20mm, Littelfuse type 215002.
Stereo out:
222
Peripheral Equipment
*The TANDBERG Digital Natural Audio Module is integrated in some TANDBERG systems. Please contact your
TANDBERG representative for more information.
223
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.7 Stereo Speaker Kit
Note that the following applies only for systems with a stereo S/PDIF output.
The Stereo Speaker Kit provides an pair of floor-standing loudspeakers in addition to the built-in
DNAM. Using these speakers will enable stereo functionality in your system and thereby enhance
the sound experience.
To experience stereo sound, the stereo speakers have to be connected to the Digital Natural
Audio Module (DNAM) as well as confirming this under Stereo Settings in the main audio menu.
The stereo sound source may either be located at the far end, or locally as a sound source (CD,
DVD) connected to the codec audio AUX/VCR inputs. If using a local stereo sound source, you
also have to enable Stereo I/O mode (On) in the same audio menu, to be able to receive stereo
sound on your system, and to send stereo signals to the far end. See chapter 4.5.4 for more
information.
Check also that the full-range frequency audio coding AAC-LD is enabled (In Call Quality menu,
AAC-LD is checked, and AAC-LD 128 threshold is the same or lower than the call rate you are
planning to use). See chapter Audio Algorithm and AAC-LD 128kbps for more information.
An installation sheet is enclosed in the Stereo Loudspeaker Kit, which also describes
recommended physical speaker placement.
Note that if stereo speakers are enabled in the menu without having any stereo speakers
connected to the Digital NAM, or having other speakers than the TANDBERG stereo
speakers, it may cause the acoustic echo-canceller to malfunction.
224
Peripheral Equipment
5.8 Telephone Add-On
The system has a built in audio bridge* that can bring in Voice over IP (VoIP) telephony or normal
telephone sites using ISDN.
Note that this requires a system with mixed audio output (audio from local and far end) and
one audio input without integrated echo cancelling.
In addition to using ISDN and IP for your telephone sites, it is possible to connect a telephone
using normal POTS line** by
Connect the audio out from the conference telephone to the AUX input.
Connect the audio input from the conference telephone to the AUX output, which
provides a mixed signal between local and far end.
*optional MultiSite package available
** require a conference phone with external audio input and output
225
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.9 Dual Monitor
Note that this requires a system with dual monitor video output.
The Dual Monitor option consists of an additional monitor, bigger cabinet top-plate and
associated cabling. The Dual Monitor can be used to show full screen selfview, snapshots and
Duo Video.
To use the system in the Dual Monitor configuration:
1. Connect Video Out 2 (preferably) otherwise Video Out 4 on the system to a video input
on the dual monitor.
2. Set Dual Monitor to On in the General Settings menu.
226
Peripheral Equipment
5.10 XGA Monitors and Projectors
(Optional)
The system can be delivered with optional single or dual TV/XGA monitors. It can also be
connected to any DVI/VGA/PAL or NTSC display.
Note that this requires a system with minimum one DVI-I output.
227
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.11 VESA Display Power
Management
Because of the tremendous amount of energy consumed by monitors when operating, the system
will reduce power consumption and extend monitor lifecycle by suspending the (switch off)
monitors and projectors when the system goes into sleep/standby.
This applies for all VESA Display Power Management compliant displays that are connected to
the VGA/DVI output of the system. The display device need to comply with VESA display Power
Management system (DPMS).
Note that this requires a system supplied with a VGA/DVI output.
The VESA DPMS standard consists of four modes, Normal, Standby, Suspend and Off, and
applies to all Sync formats (e.g. VGA).
DPMS standard:
Normal Standby Suspend Off
H-sync On Off On Off
V-sync On On Off Off
Power savings None Minimal Substantial Maximum
Recovery time None 2-3 seconds 2-3 seconds 8-10 seconds
In Off mode some power may still be drawn in order to power indicator lights etc. EDID contains
the information on which mode a specific monitor supports.
TANDBERG supports all four modes. However, in F1 and above, all monitors not listed below are
automatically set to Off.
Monitor DPMS mode
Dell Off
T8000 - Pioneer Suspend
T6000 - SAMPO Suspend
Maestro - Projection Design Off
T7000 - Sharp Off
228
Peripheral Equipment
5.12 Digital Monitor Power
Management
DMPM is monitor power management applied over the digital DVI interface. TANDBERG
supports DMPM in software F2 and above. Six monitor power states are defined.
Monitor On Power state: Transmitter (TANDBERG codec) and receiver (Monitor) are powered
and active. This power state is equivalent with the DPMS normal mode.
Intermediate Power state: When the codec goes from active to standby, it turns off the DVI
transmitter and the monitor can go from Monitor On
Power state to Intermediate Power state.
Active-off Power state: The monitor can go from Intermediate Power state to Active-off Power
state when the monitor timer expires.
Non-Link Recoverable Off Power State: The monitor can enter Non-Link Recoverable Off
Power State when the codec is switched off or if the DVI cable is disconnected. This power state
is equivalent to the DPMS “Off (with no DPMS recovery)” state.
Monitor Power Switch Off Power state: This state can be entered when the power switch on
the monitor is toggled to its off position. This state has two sub-states dependent on if the codec
is switched on or off.
229
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
5.13 Extended Display Identification
Data (EDID)
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) is a VESA standard data format that will allow the
system to communicate its capabilities, including vendor information like the supported VGA-
formats and frequency range limits to a PC connected to the XGA/DVI input.
Note that this requires a system supplied with a XGA/DVI input.
This means that the PC always* will be able to output a valid VGA/DVI signal to the system with
no manual reconfiguration of the PC screen settings.
TANDBERG supports EDID structure v1.3, which adheres to the MS Plug & Play definition.
This standard contains information on product ID, basic display parameters, timing identifications
and detailed timing descriptions.
In F1 and above, TANDBERG will use the EDID information to decide which resolution to use,
800x600 @ 75Hz or 1024x768 @ 60Hz.
Example (1024x768@60Hz)
Detailed timing description:
PixelClockDiv10000: 6500
Horizontal Active: 1024
Horizontal Blanking: 320
Vertical Active: 768
Vertical Blanking: 38
Horizontal Sync 24
Offset:
Horizontal Sync Pulse 136
Width:
Vertical Sync Offset: 3
Vertical Sync Pulse 6
Width:
Horizontal Image Not available
Size:
Vertical Image Size: Not available
Horizontal Border: 0
Vertical Border: 0
230
Peripheral Equipment
Tested and verified monitors, EDID & Timing
Listed below are some of the monitors TANDBERG have tested and verified against:
ADI A715
Dell W1700
EIZO L367
EIZO F730
ErgoScan 400S
Hitachi CM640ET
Hitachi CM769ET
IBM 9494-HBO
IBM G97
IBM E74
IBM 6743-60N
JVC LT-23X475
Löewe TAA112747
MAG D700
MAG DJ707
Panasonic SL75
Pioneer PDP-502MXE
Pioneer PDP-50MXE1
Samsung 191T
*Need to comply with the VESA EDID standard.
231
6 Appendices
Appendices:
Appendix 1: Technical Specification
Appendix 2: Bandwidth Information
Appendix 3: Environmental considerations
Appendix 4: Guidelines for setting up videoconferencing rooms
Appendix 5: Security
Appendix 6: Using the file system
Appendix 7: Web Interface
Appendix 8: Connecting the system to PRI/T1
Appendix 9: Connecting the system to the Switched 56 network
Appendix 10: Connecting the system to ISDN using NT1 network adapters
Appendix 11: Wave II Camera Pinouts and Connectors
Appendix 12: Remote control
Appendix 13: CallManager registration
Appendix 14: Diagnostic Tools for IP
Appendix 15: System Upgrade
Appendix 16: Declaration of Conformity
Appendix 17: Dimensions
1
Appendices
Appendix 1
Technical Specification
SYSTEM COMPONENTS EMBEDDED ENCRYPTION
1 or 2 monitors, wireless remote control, Tracker, H.320 and H.323 point-to-point and multipoint calls
W.A.V.E. II camera, microphone, Audio ModuleTM, Standards-based: H.233, H.234, H.235 v2&v3,
integrated cabling, cart DES and AES
NIST-validated AES
MONITOR NIST-validated DES
32" NTSC or 33" PAL monitor Automatic key generation and exchange
Optional high-resolution monitors Suppor ted in DuoVideo,H.239 and Multisite
Other monitors supported
H.323 NETWORK FEATURES
BANDWIDTH Differentiated Services (DiffServ)
H.320 up to 2 Mbps Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)
H.323 up to 4 Mbps point-to-point IP precedence
SIP up to 4 Mbps IP type of service (ToS)
Up to 6 Mbps total MultiSite bandwidth IP adaptive bandwidth management (including flow
control)
VIDEO STANDARDS Auto gatekeeper discovery
H.261, H.263, H.263+, H.263++ (Natural Video), H.264 H.235 Authentication (Gatekeeper registration)
NTP Server
VIDEO FEATURES Dynamic playout and lip-sync buffering
Native 16:9 Widescreen Intelligent Packet Loss Recovery (IPLR)
Advanced Screen Layouts Automatic support for private and public IP addresses
Picture in Picture (PIP) using NAT
Picture outside Picture (POP) H.245 DTMF tones
Intelligent Video Management
SECURITY FEATURES
VIDEO INPUTS (5 INPUTS) Management via HTTPS
1 x MiniDin, S-video: main camera IP Administration Password
1 x MiniDin, S-video: auxiliary / document camera Menu Administration Password
1 x RCA / Phono, composite: document camera / aux Dialing Access code
1 x RCA / Phono, composite: VCR Streaming password
1 x DVI/SXGA: PC H.243 MCU Password
VNC password
VIDEO OUTPUTS (6 OUTPUTS) SNMP security alerts
1 x MiniDin, S-video: main monitor Disable IP services
1 x MiniDin, S-video: dual monitor
NETWORK INTERFACES
1 x RCA / Phono, composite: main monitor or VCR
1 x RCA / Phono, composite: dual monitor or VCR 6 x ISDN BRI (RJ-45), S-inter face
2 x DVI/XGA: main and dual monitor 1 x E1 / T1 G.703 (RJ-45) for ISDN PRI or Leased E1 /
T1
SXGA INPUT / XGA OUTPUT 1 x E1 / T1 G.703 (RJ-45) for future usage
Input: 640 x 480 – 1280 x 1024 1 x LAN / Ethernet (RJ-45) 10/100 Mbit (LAN / DSL /
Output: 640 x 480 – 1024 x 768 cable modem)
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) 1 x X.21 / V.35 / RS-449 with RS-366 dialing or Leased
VESA Monitor Power Management Line
1 x USB (for future use)
VIDEO FORMAT
ETHERNET / INTERNET / INTRANET CONNECTIVITY
NTSC, PAL, VGA, SVGA, XGA or SXGA
TCP / IP, DHCP, ARP, FTP, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS,
LIVE VIDEO RESOLUTIONS SOAP and XML
NATIVE NTSC: SNMP Enterprise Management
4SIF (704 x 480 pixels), Digital Clarity Internal web server
Interlaced SIF (352 x 480 pixels), Natural Video Internal streaming server
SIF (352 x 240 pixels) OTHER MAJOR ITU STANDARDS SUPPORTED
233
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
NATIVE PAL: H.231, H.233, H.234, H.235, H.235 v2&v3, H.239,
4CIF (704 x 576 pixels), Digital Clarity H.241,
Interlaced CIF (352 x 576 pixels), Natural Video H.243, H.281, BONDING (ISO 13871), H.320, H.323,
CIF (352 x 288 pixels) H.331, MPEG4 AAC-LD (20KHz audio)
QCIF (176 x 144 pixels)
W.A.V.E. (WIDE ANGLE VIEW) II CAMERA
SQCIF (128 x 96 pixels) decode only
NATIVE PC RESOLUTIONS: 10 x zoom 1/4" CCD +15° / -20° tilt
XGA (1024 x 768) + / -95°pan
SVGA (800 x 600 pixels) 61° vertical field of view
VGA (640 x 480 pixels) 96° total vertical field of view
77° horizontal field of view
STILL IMAGE TRANSFER 267° total horizontal field of view
CIF, SIF, 4CIF (H.261 Annex D), 4SIF, VGA, SVGA, 460 (PAL) / 470 (NTSC) TV lines
XGA Min. illumination 2 Lux (F1.8)
Auto or manual focus / brightness / white balance
AUDIO STANDARDS Far-end camera control
G.711, G.722, G.722.1, G.728 , MPEG4 AAC-LD 15 near and far-end camera pre-sets
Voice-activated camera positioning
AUDIO FEATURES Daisy chain support for up to 4 cameras VISCA
CD-Quality 20KHz Mono and Stereo camera support
Telephone add-on via MultiSite
PRESENTATIONS AND COLLABORATION
Four separate acoustic echo cancellers
Audio mixer Natural Presenter Package including:
Automatic Gain Control (AGC) PC Presenter
Automatic Noise Reduction PC SoftPresenter
Audio level meters Digital Clarity
VCR ducking DuoVideo and H.239
Advanced Video Layouts
AUDIO INPUTS (6 INPUTS) Streaming compatible with Cisco IP/TV,
3 x microphone, 24V phantom powered, XLR connector Apple QuickTime®, RealPlayer® v8 etc.
1 x RCA / Phono, Line Level: audio mixer
CLOSED CAPTIONING/TEXT CHAT
1 x RCA / Phono, Line Level: auxiliary (or VCR/DVD
Stereo L) T.140 standards-based
1 x RCA / Phono, Line Level: VCR/DVD (Stereo R)
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
AUDIO OUTPUTS (3 OUTPUTS) Support for the TANDBERG Management Suite
1 x RCA / Phono, S/PDIF (mono/stereo) or Total management via embedded web server, SNMP,
Analogue Line Level: main audio Telnet and FTP
1 x RCA / Phono, Line Level: auxiliary (or VCR Stereo L) Remote software upload: via webserver or via FTP
1 x RCA / Phono, Line Level: VCR (mono or Stereo R) server
2 x RS-232 for local software upgrades, local control
FRAME RATES – POINT-TO-POINT & MULTISITE and diagnostics
30 frames per second @ 168 kbps and above Onscreen Menu on TV and/or VGA monitors
60 fields per second @ 336 kbps and above (Point-to-
DIRECTORY SERVICES
point)
Support for Local, Global and Dynamic Server
MULTISITE FEATURES Directories
Audio and Video Transcoding Unlimited entries using Server directory* supporting
Video rate matching from 56 kbps - maximum LDAP and H.350
conference rate 400 number global directory
Continuos Presence CP5+1, CP4 and Voice Switched 200 number local directory
Best Impression 50 dedicated MultiSite entries
H.264, Encryption, Digital Clarity Last Number Dialed
DuoVideo and H.239 mixed and from any site Missed Calls
Telephony Call History
ISDN & IP Downspeeding and IPLR
15 SELECTABLE MENU LANGUAGES
MULTISITE (H.243) CASCADING ON ISDN AND IP English, German, French, Norwegian, Swedish, Italian,
Dial in / Dial out Spanish,
Chair control for host system Portuguese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese,
Snapshot of ongoing conference (JPEG) Japanese,
Snapshot of ongoing DuoVideo/H.239 presentation Russian, Korean, Finnish and Thai
(JPEG)
Separate welcome page for encrypted conferences CUSTOMIZED WELCOME SCREEN AND COMPANY
IP AND PRI/BRI/SERIAL INTERFACE (V.35) LOGO
Conference rates up to 6 Mbps
Up to 6 video and 5 audio sites POWER
4 sites @ 2 Mbps, 6 sites @ 768 (+telephone calls) Auto-sensing power supply
Mix IP with ISDN-PRI, ISDN-BRI or Serial Inter face up 100 - 250 VAC, 50 - 60 Hz
234
Appendices
to maximum conference rate 65 watts max. for codec and main camera
DUOVIDEO / H.239 OPERATING TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY
Available on all networks 0° C to 35° C (32° F to 95° F) ambient temperature.
10% to 90 % Relative Humidity (RH)
NETWORK FEATURES
STORAGE AND TRANSPORT TEMPERATURE
Auto H.320 / H.323 dialing
SIP -20° C to 60° C (-4° F to 140° F) at RH 10-90 % (non-
Downspeeding condensing)
Programmable network profiles
FOOTPRINT
Intelligent Call Management
HO on ISDN-PRI Facility Width: 41.3" / 105 cm
Maximum call length timer Depth: 24.6" / 62.5 cm
Automatic SPID and line number configuration
PRODUCT RELIABILITY / MTBF
(National ISDN, GR-2941-CORE)
Soft Mux The predicted reliability is expressed in the expected
NATO standard KG194 / KIV-7 encryptor support random Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) for the
H.331 Broadcast Mode electronic components based on the Power On Hours:
IP Address Conflict Warning Power On Hours (POH) > 69 000 hours
Useful Life Cycle > 6 years
ISO 9001 certificate is available upon request
* Requires TANDBERG Management Suite 9.0 or newer
System features vary depending on network selection and software package. All specifications subject to change without
notice. TANDBERG is a registered trademark or trademark of TANDBERG in the U.S. and other countries. RealPlayer is
a trademark or a registered trademark of RealNetworks, Inc. QuickTime is a registered trademark of Apple Computer,
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and NetMeeting are either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are proper ty of their respective
owners.
235
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 2
Bandwidth information for TANDBERG endpoints
Model 8000MXP, 7000MXP 6000MXP, Maestro
Bandwidth Standard: 1920 / Standard: 768 / 3072
Point to 4096 Option: 1920 / 4096
point
ISDN / IP
MultiSite Total: 6144kbps Total: 3072kbps 4x768
6x1152 video + 4 audio 3x1536
video + 5 audio video + no audio
5x1536
video + no audio Total: 6144kbps 6x1152
4x1920 video + 5 audio 5x1536
video + 5 audio video + no audio 4x1920
3x3072 video + 5 audio 3x3072
video + no audio video + no audio
Rate Yes Yes
Matching
Dual Yes Yes
Stream
(DuoVideo
/ H.239)
Secure All bandwidths All bandwidths
Conference
H.264 Up to 2Mbps Up to 2Mbps
Picture VS, CP4, CP5+1 VS, CP4, CP5+1
Mode
MultiSite
Model 3000MXP / 3000NET 2000MXP, 1500MXP
MXP
Bandwidth Standard: 384 / 1536 Standard: 1920 (IP only)
Point to Option: 512 / 1920 Options: 512 / 1920
point 3000NET: 384 / 1536
ISDN / IP
MultiSite Total: 1536kbps Total: 2304kbps 4x768
4x512 video + no video + no audio 4x512
audio video + 3 audio
4x384 video + 3 audio
Total: 2304kbps
4x768
video + no audio
236
Appendices
4x512
video + 3 audio
Rate Yes Yes
Matching
Dual Yes Yes
Stream
(DuoVideo
/ H.239)
Secure All bandwidths All bandwidths
Conference
H.264 Up to 2Mbps Up to 2Mbps
Picture VS, CP4, CP5+1 VS, CP4, CP5+1
Mode
MultiSite
Model 990MXP / 990NET 880MXP / 880NET MXP
MXP
Bandwidth Standard: 1920 (IP Standard: 1152 (IP only)
Point to only) Option: 384 / 1152
point Options: 512 / 1920
ISDN / IP 990NET: 768 / 1920
MultiSite Total: 2304kbps Total: 1152kbps 4x384
4x768 video + no audio 4x320
video + no audio video + 3 audio
4x512
video + 3 audio
Rate Yes Yes
Matching
Dual Yes Yes
Stream
(DuoVideo
/ H.239)
Secure All bandwidths All bandwidths
Conference
H.264 Up to 2Mbps Up to 768
Picture VS, CP4, CP5+1 VS, CP4, CP5+1
Mode
MultiSite
Model 770MXP 1000MXP
Bandwidth Standard: 768 (IP Standard: 768 (IP only)
Point to only) Options: 128 / 768, 384
point Option: 128 / 768 / 768
ISDN / IP
MultiSite Not Available Not Available
Rate Not Available Not Available
Matching
Dual Yes Yes
Stream
237
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
(DuoVideo
/ H.239)
Secure All bandwidths All bandwidths
Conference
H.264 Up to 768 Up to 768
Picture Not Available Not Available
Mode
MultiSite
Model 550MXP
Bandwidth Standard: 768 (IP only)
Point to Options: 128 / 768, 384
point / 768
ISDN / IP
MultiSite Not Available
Rate Not Available
Matching
Dual Not Available
Stream
(DuoVideo
/ H.239)
Secure All bandwidths
Conference
H.264 Up to 768
Picture Not Available
Mode
MultiSite
238
Appendices
Appendix 3
Environmental considerations
This section explains how to carry out basic adjustments and simple tests to ensure that you send
and receive the best possible image and audio quality when using your system.
Iris control and lighting
By default the system camera will use an automatic iris to compensate for changes in lighting. In
addition to this feature, you may further assist the system to maintain the best possible image
quality by paying special attention to environmental lighting and background colors as described
below. Remember the system will send live images of yourself and your immediate surroundings.
Avoid direct sunlight on the subject matter i.e. yourself, the background or onto the
camera lens as this will create harsh contrasts.
If light levels are too low you may need to consider using artificial lighting. As described
above, direct illumination of the subject matter and camera lens should be avoided.
When using artificial lighting, daylight type lamps will produce the most effective results.
Avoid colored lighting.
Indirect light from shaded sources or reflected light from pale walls often produces
excellent results.
Avoid harsh side lighting or strong light from above. Strong sunlight from a window or
skylight may put part or all of the subject matter in shadow or cause silhouetting.
If you still have problems with the iris and lighting, manual adjustment of the camera
parameters might help – see Video Settings menu.
Dim scenes can also be improved by manually adjusting the camera brightness setting.
Background
The appearance of the picture background is very important but easily overlooked. It is important
to remember that the camera also shows what is behind you when in a videoconference. To
ensure a suitable background we recommend you consider the following:
Use a neutrally colored background with a medium contrast and a soft texture, e.g. a
plain curtain with no heavy patterns or strong colors that may adversely tint the whole
scene.
Avoid moving backgrounds such as curtains blowing in a draught, moving objects, or
people walking behind as this may both reduce image quality and distract the attention of
the calling party.
Do not place the camera facing a doorway.
Loudspeaker volume
The audio system will use the Digital Natural Audio Module (DNAM) if available and supported by
the system. The volume of the audio system is controlled by the Volume Control keys on the
system remote control.
239
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 4
Guidelines for setting up videoconferencing rooms
The following are a set of guidelines to consider when either building a videoconferencing room,
or using an existing room for videoconferencing.
Lighting: Audio:
Low Contrast desired for light Noise Floor preferred less than
intensity. No dark spots. 44dBC.
Intensity @ table 800 - 1400 Lux as Reverb Time 0,3 to 0,5 sec.
measured with an Incident light
Ventilation:
Keep in mind Noise Floor.
meter.
Block sunlight from entering room.
Velocity = Noise. Therefore keep
velocity of air low.
Seating Area (Table):
Should allow all participants to see
Room:
Should be located away from noise.
Monitors.
Should allow camera to “see” all
Should not have windows.
Doors should be located off camera.
participants.
Non-shiny non-patterned preferably
light grey surface (if table used).
Walls:
Color: Generally high contrast color
desired. Light blue is commonly
used.
Acoustically reflective surfaces (such
as glass or concrete) should be
covered with curtains or sound
treatment.
How to prepare a typical room for videoconferencing:
The diagram below shows a typical room designed to obtain the best results when using the
system.
240
Appendices
The microphone should be placed at the front of the table to ensure that all speech will be
detected. The best position for the microphone is at least 2 meters (6.5 feet) in front of the system
on a plain, flat table with at least 0.3 meters (12 inches) of table in front of the microphone.
The document camera should be close to the chair person or a designated controller of the
document camera for ease of use (remember to arrange all the peripherals so that one participant
can reach each of them to point, change the display, tape, and so forth).
The camera supports up to 15 pre-stored camera positions.
The illustration shows three possible camera positions; one for all the participants, one for the
whiteboard and one for the main speaker. The remaining camera presets are then available for
other peripheral equipment, for example a VCR.
Position the system in such a way as to avoid the possibility of somebody inadvertently walking
into the camera’s field of view when entering the room. Other than the conference participants,
there should be no moving items in the sent image.
241
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 5
Security
The system has several features both to protect from unauthorized use and system access:
Access Code:
When Access Code is enabled, the user will be asked to enter an access code before he/she is
able to make a call. The system will verify if the entered access code is valid by checking the
code with the allowed codes listed in the access.txt file on the ftp-server in the system. If no
access.txt file is uploaded to the system, registration of the code will be done without validation.
E.g. you can enter whatever code you want and have access to the system.
The access.txt file is a plain text file with one line per access code as shown below:
1234
1250
A1
B2
ABC
To upload this file to the system, follow these steps:
Open a DOS-window and go to the folder where the ‘access.txt’ file is located.
Type ftp <IP-address of your local system).
User: press Enter or enter IP-password.
Type “bin” and press Enter.
Go to the user folder, type “cd user”.
Upload the ‘access.txt’ file, type ‘put access.txt’.
Exit from ftp, type "bye".
Administrator Password
Access to the administrator menu on the system unit can be controlled using password
protection. You can set the Administrator Password in Menu Settings, in Security or from the
dataport:
menupassword set <pin-code>. The pin-code should be maximum 5 - five digits. To erase the
password, enter an empty pin-code.
Streaming password
By setting a streaming password in the streaming menu on the system, a password has to be
entered on the streaming client to be able to see the video stream from the system.
IP Password
242
Appendices
By setting an IP Access Password on the system, all access to the system using IP (Telnet, FTP
and WEB) requires a password. This password can be enabled from telnet or dataport using the
command: ippassword <ip-password>. The default IP username and password is "TANDBERG".
To remove this password, use the command: "ippassword ”. From telnet, this is only possible by
first entering the correct password.
IP Services
The different IP services on the system - FTP, Telnet, Telnet Challenge, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP
and H.323 can be disabled to prevent access to the system. By using the commands below, the
services can be independently enabled/disabled:
xconfiguration Telnet/TelnetChallenge/FTP/HTTP/HTTPS/H323 Mode: <On/Off>
xconfiguration TelnetChallenge Mode: <On/Off> [port]
xconfiguration SNMP Mode: <On/Off/ReadOnly/TrapsOnly>
SNMP Security alert
This function will notify any Management Application (such as TMS - TANDBERG Management
Suite) if anyone tries to perform Remote Management on the system using an illegal password.
The Security alert that is sent to the Management Application will contain information about the IP
address and the service (WEB, Telnet, FTP) being used for the attempt. If TMS is used, email
notifications or alarms about the attempt can be sent to specified persons.
Encryption
All TANDBERG systems support both AES and DES encryption. By default this feature is
enabled such that when connecting with any other video system or MCU, a TANDBERG system
will attempt to establish a secure conference using AES or DES encryption. The TANDBERG
system will attempt this for both IP and ISDN connections. Where a remote system or MCU
supports encryption, the highest common encryption algorithm will be selected on a port-by-port
basis.
The type and status of the encryption negotiated is indicated by padlock symbols and on-screen
messages. Encryption on the TANDBERG systems is fully automatic, and provides clear security
status indicators;
An open padlock indicates that encryption is being initialized, but the conference is not
yet encrypted.
Single padlock indicates DES encryption.
Double padlock indicates AES encryption.
In addition to on-screen indicators the Call Status menu provides two information fields regarding
call encryption. The first field is the Encryption Code, which will identify either AES or DES. The
second field is the Encryption Check Code and is comprised of an alphanumeric string. This
string will be the same for systems on either side of an encrypted conference. If the Check Codes
do not match, this would indicate that the call has been exposed to a Man In The Middle attack.
When a system with MultiSite functionality hosts a conference, the highest possible encryption
algorithm will be negotiated on a site-by-site basis. MultiSite conferences can therefore support a
mix of AES and DES encrypted endpoints in the same conference. A conference will only be as
secure as its weakest link.
All systems supporting DES encryption can upgrade to AES encryption. Please contact your
TANDBERG representative for more information. The standards supporting the encryption
mechanisms employed by TANDBERG are: AES, DES, H.233, H234 and H.235 (H235v3 & v2 for
243
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
backwards compatibility) with extended Diffie Hellman key distribution via H.320, H.323 and
Leased Line connections.
The TANDBERG AES implementation is validated as conforming to the Advanced Encryption
Standard (AES) Algorithm, as specified in Federal Information Processing Standard Publication
197, Advanced Encryption Standard, by The National Institute of Standards and Technology
(NIST).
244
Appendices
Appendix 6
Using the file system
It is possible to access a file system within the TANDBERG system by using ftp:
DOS- ftp <IP-address of system>, or
window:
Web- ftp:// <IP-address of system>
browser:
Description of the different files:
all.prm all settings in the system (including directory)
dir.prm directory entries (up to 200 entries)
event.log logs fault situations etc.
sw.pkg the system software
globdir.prm file containing up to 400 entries. These entries can not be edited from the
system, but can be edited as a text-file.
Files accessible only by ‘ftp get /tmp/snapshots/xxx.jpg’ or ‘http://<IP-address of
system>/tmp/snapshots/xxx.jpg’:
site0.jpg Snapshot of current stream if MultiSite.
main.jpg Snapshot of selfview.
site1.jpg Snapshot of decoded stream if point-to-point.
duo.jpg Snapshot of the encoded stream if transmitting DuoVideo, the decoded stream if
receiving DuoVideo.
Custom logos
Go to the folder where your logo is located.
Type “ftp <IP-address of your local system>”.
Go to the user folder, type “cd user”.
Upload the logo, type "put <logo.jpg>".
The new logo will be displayed the next time you restart your system. Recommended maximum
size is: 704x576, file-format: jpg. If the file is too large, no logo will be displayed.
245
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 7
Web Interface
It is possible to access and maintain the system remotely via a local area network (LAN) using a
standard Web-browser. Connect your system to a LAN with a Network cable.
How to configure your system for web interface:
1. Open Administrator Settings and choose Network\LAN Settings
2. Specify IP-assignment DHCP or Static. If DHCP is selected, no other settings are
needed. If Static is selected, IP-address, IP-subnet mask and Gateway must be
specified.
3. Start your Web-browser. In the address field type the IP-address of the system. Enter the
password and the Web-page of the system will be shown. The default password is
TANDBERG.
4. Restart the system. Choose Restart from the Control Panel.
Example:
IP-assignment: Static
IP-address: 196.9.200.129
IP-subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway: 196.9.200.21
246
Appendices
Appendix 8
(Not available on all TANDBERG systems)
Connecting the system to PRI/T1
Using CSU adapter
Connecting the system to the ISDN network via the E1/T1-interface using an Adtran T1 ESF CSU
ACE or equivalent CSU, will allow up to 1.54 Mbps connection. The E1/T1-interface must be
connected to a CSU approved according to IEC 60950, UL 1950 or equivalent standard. The PRI-
line will run the AT&T 4ESS, 5ESS and National ISDN protocols in addition to Euro ISDN (E1).
Connecting to Adtran T1 ESF CSU ACE
Connect the PRI cable from the system to the input marked CPE (Customer Provided Equipment)
on the Adtran CSU (straight through category 5 cable is recommended). Connect to the network
via the NET connector on the Adtran CSU.
Configuration of the system
Open the Administrator Settings Menu from the Control Panel and select Network.
Choose Network Type: PRI and specify your PRI number, max. Channels, cable length (between
system and CSU) and switch type.
Configuration of Adtran T1 ESF CSU ACE
Enter 2)CONFIG menu using SCROLL and ENTER buttons.
Enter 3)TERMINAL menu. Check 1)FORMAT:ESF, 2)CODE: B8ZS , 3)SET LBO: 0-133
(corresponding to Cable Length setting on the system).
Go to main menu and enter 1)NETWORK menu. 7)SET LBO: 0.0 (according to
information from Telco).
Also, other network parameters should be set according to information from your Telco.
247
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 9
Connecting the system to the Switched 56 network
Using Telesync TS-256 SW56/ISDN adapter
Connecting the system to the SW56 network using a Telesync Adapter is described below. There
are different Telesync Adapters for different configurations of SW56 networks. The network types
tested with the system are SW56 2Wire and 4Wire.
Connecting
Connect the system ISDN1 cable to the BRI S/T interface on the Telesync Adapter. Connect the
two SW56 cables from the Telesync adapter Line 1 and Line 2 to the SW56 network.
Configuration of the system
Select network type to National ISDN.
LINE 1 SETUP
NUMBER1: program with number from the first SW56 line
NUMBER2: program with number from the second SW56 line
SPID1: program with number from the first SW56 line
SPID2: Leave blank
How to call
It is important to use Restrict (56k). Select Restrict (56k) in Call Settings in the Call menu (select
the field next to the phone book button in the call menu). A second number field will appear when
ISDN is selected for Net within Call Settings and you choose bandwidth 128 kbps. Enter the
second number in the call settings menu.
248
Appendices
Appendix 10
Connecting the system to ISDN using NT1 network
adapters
Connecting
Connect the first ISDN cable from ISDN 1 on the system to the S-interface on your first
NT1 network adapter. Connect the other ISDN cables to the appropriate NT1 network
adapters. Connect the U-interface of your NT1 adapter to the line provided from your
network provider.
For convenience the NT1 adapters could be placed inside the cabinet. If needed, use
the shorter ISDN cable (RJ45 connectors) delivered with the NT1 between the codec
and the NT1 and the longer ISDN cable between the NT1 and the connector (RJ45) at
the wall socket.
Configuring
The configuration of the system is performed in the same manner as described in
ISDN BRI Settings.
The NT1 should be powered up and you should check that the network is active.
Please check your NT1 User Manual.
249
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 11
(Not available with set top systems)
WAVE II Camera
Pinouts and Connectors
8-PIN RJ (shielded modular jack):
This connector is used for the power and control signals to the main camera.
Pin-8 +12V (presence when connected in
daisy chain)
Pin-7 GND
Pin-6 GND
Pin-5 RXD (in)
Pin-4 TXD (out)
Pin-3 +12V
Pin-2 GND
Pin-1 + 12V
Standard Phono:
Used for composite video signal
Power:
2.0 mm DC power jack (+12V, 1A required)
Standard Mini Din:
Used for S-Video signal
6-PIN RJ (modular jack):
250
Appendices
This connector is used when cascading cameras: Control (out) signal and external camera
detection. Note: It does not provide power for cascaded camera.
PRI Pinout
Pin-6 GND
Pin-5 GND
Pin-4 RXD (in)
Pin-3 TXD (out)
Pin-2 Presence (+12V in
daisy chain)
Pin-1 GND
Multiple Camera support:
The figure below is an example of how multiple cameras should be connected:
251
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 12
Remote Control (TRC 3)
The TANDBERG remote control transmits IR-signals using the following parameters:
Protocol Siemens SDA2208
Reference frequency 485kHz
Address 4&7
IR wavelenght 940nm
IR carrier ferquency 30kHz
Remote Control keycode map:
Button codes Remote control Button codes Remote Control
Decimal Hex Address Button name Decimal Hex Address Button
name
0 00 33 21 0 OK
1 01 0 NUMBER 1 34 22 0 CALL
2 02 0 NUMBER 2 35 23 0 END
CALL
3 03 0 NUMBER 3 36 24 0 PHONE
BOOK
4 04 0 NUMBER 4 37 25 0 MENU
5 05 0 NUMBER 5 38 26 0 CANCEL
6 06 0 NUMBER 6 39 27 0
7 07 0 NUMBER 7 40 28 0 PRESETS
8 08 0 NUMBER 8 41 29
9 09 0 NUMBER 9 42 2A
10 0A 0 NUMBER 0 43 2B
11 0B 0 * 44 2C
12 0C 0 # 45 2D
13 0D 46 2E
14 0E 47 2F
15 0F 48 30
16 10 49 31
17 11 PRESENTER 50 32
252
Appendices
18 12 0 51 33
19 13 52 34
20 14 53 35
21 15 54 36
22 16 0 ZOOM OUT 55 37
23 17 0 ZOOM IN 56 38
24 18 57 39
25 19 0 VOLUME 58 3A
DOWN
26 1A 0 VOLUME UP 59 3B
27 1B 0 MIC OFF 60 3C
28 1C 61 3D
29 1D 0 UP 62 3E
30 1E 0 DOWN 63 3F 0 WAKE UP
31 1F 0 LEFT 25 19 3 LOW
BATT
32 20 0 RIGHT XX 3 PROG
VER
253
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Appendix 13
Cisco CallManager registration
Configuring an H.323 client on the CallManager 4.0
The registration of a H.323 client in CallManager is supported on the CallManager (CCM) 4.0
software and forward.
1. To configure the CallManager with an H.323 client, log on to the administration web
interface and go to the phone configuration page.
2. The Phone configuration page is located on: device (top menu) -> Add a New device ->
Phone -> H.323 Client.
3. In the phone configuration page type the IP address of the TANDBERG system in the
Device name field, select device pool and push the insert button.
4. A pop-up box will now appear on the screen and ask you if you would like to configure
the directory number. Push the ok button.
5. You should now see the Directory Number Configuration WEB page. Enter the
E.164/phone number of your TANDBERG system in the Directory number field, and in
the “Forward and Pickup Settings” enter the time of “No Answer Ring Duration”. The time
selected has to have a value from 1 to 300 seconds.
6. Push the Add button to update the CallManager with the directory number settings.
You have now configured the CallManager with a H.323 client and should be able to register the
TANDBERG system to it.When the TANDBERG system is registered to a CallManager, it will be
possible to place and receive calls from this system to any other video and voice systems that are
registered on the same CallManager.
254
Appendices
Appendix 14
Diagnostic Tools for IP
To use these tools, will require using a PC and setting up a telnet session towards the system.
Q.931
To show Q.931 trace during a call you need to issue the command ‘syslog on’.One can get traces
for RAS, Q.931 and H.245 with this command. It is a complex trace and requires an extensive
knowledge in H.323 signalling to be understood.
Ping
Ping is used to see if the system is able to reach a specific IP-address, using a mechanism in IP
called ICMP. If the system is unable to register to its gatekeeper, or if it is unable to dial a specific
endpoint, one can use ping to see if there is at least an IP-route to the gatekeeper or to the
endpoint. In case you have problems, one would first ping the default gateway, then the
gatekeeper, and then the other endpoint.
Traceroute
Traceroute does exactly that; it traces the route an IP-packet takes to reach its destination and
displays all router hops. Traceroute is very useful for seeing exactly where there is a routing-
problem in the IP-network, and for checking where transport-delay is introduced.
Layer 4 Ports used in H.323 calls
The layer 4 ports used by the system in a H.323 call can be defined as follows:
Dynamic: The ports are allocated at random from 2048 to 65535.
Static: Will use the predefined layer 4 ports listed in the tables below.
Point-to-point + Duo Video
Function Port Type
Gatekeeper Discovery (RAS) 1719 UDP
Q.931 Call Setup 1720 TCP
H.245 Range 5555-5565 TCP
Video Range 2326-2341 UDP
Audio Range 2326-2341 UDP
Data/FECC Range 2326-2341 UDP
MultiSite + Duo Video
255
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Function Port Type
Gatekeeper Discovery (RAS) 1719 UDP
Q.931 Call Setup 1720 TCP
H.245* Range 5555-5565 TCP
Video Range 2326-2405 UDP
Audio Range 2326-2405 UDP
Data/FECC Range 2326-2405 UDP
(*) Note: While using MultiSite, if a site is disconnected and reconnected without terminating the
entire conference, the next site to be connected will have a H.245 port outside of the specified
range. If this functionality is required through a firewall, the range of TCP ports can be extended
past 5564. However, if a site is disconnected and reconnected, without ending the conference
enough times one can quickly end up outside of this range again.
256
Appendices
Appendix 15
System Upgrade
Before starting the software upgrade of the TANDBERG MXP system, please make sure to have
the new software file, (for instance s050000F30.pkg) and the Release Key for this software
available. Your TANDBERG Partner will provide this for you.
All options and settings will automatically be stored when upgrading, so no backup is necessary.
If the system upgrade process is aborted before it's complete, the system will work as normal with
the original software
The TANDBERG MXP systems can be upgraded in three different ways;
Using the web interface
Using FTP
Using ISDN
A) To upgrade using the the web interface, please do the following steps:
1. Type the IP address of the TANDBERG MXP system that shall be upgraded (for instance
10.0.8.77) in a standard browser, such as Internet Explorer 6.0.
2. The web interface of the codec will then be displayed. Select the ‘System Configuration’ tab on
top of the page, and then the sub-tab ‘Upgrade’.
The following page will now be displayed:
257
D1335504_T6000_MXP_User_Manual
Figure 1
3. Enter the Release key in the ‘Release Key’ field and press the ‘Install Software’ button.
A new page will now be displayed:
258
Appendices
Figure 2
4. Type in the path to where the new software file is stored, or select the file by using the ‘Browse’
button.
5. The progress for the sw upgrade can be tracked by pressing the ‘telnet’ link in the help text box
BEFORE pressing the install button. Please note that this is not a necessary action for a
successfull software upgrade. An indication of the software upgrade progress will also be shown
on the display of the system
6. Press the ‘Install’ button to start the software upgrade.
When the software upgrade is complete, you need to click on the restart button and press OK to
restart the system in order to activate the new software. Once verified, the system will reboot
once more to complete the upload of all systems parameters kept from the old software revision.
7. To verify that the new sw is installed, refresh the page shown in figure1 after restart. The
‘Software Version’ should now show the new software version uploaded to the system. The same
information can also be found in the menu on the system under ‘Control Panel/System
Information’.
B) Upgrading using FTP:
1. Copy the new software file to a folder on your harddisk, for instance c:\software.
2. Open a DOS window, and go to the folder where the new software is stored.
3. Type ftp <ip address of the TANDBERG MXP system>.
Type in the supplied ‘Release Key’ as user.
4.
Type in your IP password (defa